Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutPROJECT SPECIFICATIONS PROJECT SPECIFICATIONS FOR F. Y. 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION, AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION CITY OF WATERLOO CONTRACT NO. 720 RISE PROJECT NO.: RM-8155(671)--9D-07 I HEREBY CERTIFY THAT THIS PLAN AND SPECIFICATION WAS PREPARED BY ME OR UNDER MY DIRECT PERSONAL _ ,011111,011 11� SUPERVISION AND THAT I AM A DULY LICENSED �\ p° ,S 3. NC�� °° PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER UNDER THE LAWS OF THE STATE OF IOWA. Licensed z; 10400 �` 7//7 ca � '•. °" THOMAS J.NOONAN DATE 00 esSlo�• �� v�✓�' ti•. P.E.NO. 10400 1`t qr;5'° MY REGISTRATION RENEWAL DATE IS 12/31/09. pFygaio-w.x PAGES OR SHEETS COVERED BY THIS SEAL: ALL 6 XcE f'I ib-i;LEcj. (Folder\West Commercial St Extension-2008\Title Page.doc) - - -------4---:' t:. 5 'it. } s - -•-•.:-'.----:..r---,',-..:.,:t4.-..'„,.,%.-„:.-•--,-•• .-.'........„.."--...•' a ', 3. l_ 1111 :. , -'....„":".-...E.7„,..:01:. :1„„,':...-....._,'.: • F. Y.2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION, AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION -- CONTRACT NO. 720 -` RM-8155(671)--9D-07 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING AND NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 4. FORM OF BID BOND 5. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS 6. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE 7. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE AND RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION 8. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM 9. TSB AFFIRMATIVE ACTION RESPONSIBILITIES 10. POTENTIAL ITEMS OF WORK FOR MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION CONTRACT COMPLIANCE FORM INDEX SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM, LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES, MBE/WBE SCOPE LETTER, MBE AND/OR WBE PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM CERTIFICATION OF MBE/WBE ACCOMPLISHMENT 11. WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESSES ENTERPRISE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR'S GUIDE 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 13. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION A. STREET LIGHTING AND DETECTOR LOOPS B.DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT C.UNIT PAVERS D.CITY OF WATERLOO-DRIVEWAY AND SIDEWALK SPECIFICATIONS E. GENERAL REQUIREMENT-DIVISION 1 F.MASONRY-DIVISION 4 G.WOOD AND PLASTICS-DIVISION 6 H.THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION-DIVISION 7 I.DOORS AND WINDOWS-DIVISION 8 J.FINISHES-DIVISION 9 K.PROCESS EQUIPMENT-GENERAL PROVISIONS-SECTION 11200 L.NON-CLOG SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES-SECTION 11216 M.ELECTRICAL-DIVISION 26 14. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 15. SPECIAL PROVISIONS 16. SPECIAL PROVISION JD-RCRA 17. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 18. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 19. STORMWATER DISCHARGE PERMIT AND POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 20. FORM OF CONTRACT 21. FORM OF BOND NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING on Proposed Plans, Specifications, Form of Contract, and Estimate of Cost and the NOTICE TO BIDDERS for the Taking of Construction Bids for the F.Y. 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION RM-8155(671)--9D-07 in the City of Waterloo, Iowa CONTRACT NO. 720 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the_14th day of July , 2008,until 4:00 p.m. for the construction of the F. Y. 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION, Contract No. 720, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in open Council meeting to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 14th day of_July , 2008, at 5:30 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above- described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on July 14th_, 2008, said hearing to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc., Waterloo, Iowa are now on file in the office of the City Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 720 PAGE 1 OF 6 SCOPE OF WORK The extent of the work involved is the extension of West Commercial St. (approx. 3200 L.F.), the relocation of approx. 1300 L.F. of River Road, the construction of a new storm water pump station,the installation of owner-furnished pumps, controls and appurtenant items, the construction of approx 600 L.F. of force main, and such other work as maybe incidental thereto. BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten(10)working days after receipt of"Notice to Proceed". The storm sewer,pump station, force main and gatewell modifications shall be completed and operational by June 1, 2009. The final completion date for the project shall be September 1, 2009. METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against bi-monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety-five percent(95%) of the work as same is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one(31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material,men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay _ estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment maybe made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc., which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed -- improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Plans and Specifications are obtainable by a qualified bidder from the City Engineer upon payment of$50.00. The payment is not refundable. The prime contractor, subcontractors, or suppliers working on the project shall retain their own set of plans and specifications for use on the project. The prime contractor will be supplied with the needed number of reduced sets of plans and specifications at no additional cost. Full-sized sets of plans will be available at $45.00 per set or individual full-sized sheets at$0.75 per sheet. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 2 OF 6 CONTRACT AWARD Award of contract will be made to that responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo;price and other factors considered. The City reserves the right to select any combinations of Base Bid and Alternatives, except that Alternate Bid Nos. 1 and 2 will not be selected with each other. The City will consider bids received for the Base Bid and Alternate Bids under this Project and bids received for the Base Bid and Alternate Bids for a companion project entitled F.Y. 2008 West Commercial Street Stormwater Pumps, Contract No. 750, for pump, control and equipment items in determining which Bids, if any, will be awarded. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that may be in the best interest of the City. Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty(30) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders,prior to awarding the contract. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor in the construction of the improvement. PROPOSALS SUBMITTED The bidder shall submit bids on all Base Bid and Alternate Bid items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the unit bid price and the bid item extension (Unit Price x Estimated Qty)in numerals on the blanks provided. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price and extension, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price as being the valid unit bid price. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spreadsheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s)provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City)payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent(5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO. 720 PAGE 3 OF 6 furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds,his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of -- Attorney. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a"Performance Bond"within ten(10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City and the Engineer from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM/SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise(WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least ten percent(10%) for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent(2%) for WBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at$50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. WORKER RESIDENCY REQUIREMENT Attention is called to the requirement that at least ten percent(10%) of the total worker hours on this project shall be performed by bona fide Black Hawk County residents. A bona fide Black Hawk County resident shall have his principle residence within the corporate limits of Black Hawk County before the date of the bid opening for this project. The contractor and any subcontractors shall submit worker residency information on forms or in accordance with instructions furnished by the City. Information shall be submitted monthly to the City with the prime contractor responsible for the submission of worker residency information of all subcontractors. The prime contractor shall certify on the monthly submittals that this residency requirement is being met for this project. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 4 OF 6 contractor shall certify on the monthly submittals that this residency requirement is being met for this project. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period,plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of described below for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. For the completion of the storm sewer,pump station force main and gatewell modifications, Liquidated Damages shall be two thousand dollars ($2,000.00)per day. For the project completion the Liquidated Damages shall be one thousand dollars ($1,000.00)per day. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Also, days will not be charged for delays caused by late delivery of pumps, controls and/or appurtenant equipment items to be provided by others under —" Waterloo Contract No. 750. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, Engineering and contract administration. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by City officials, the Engineer, the prime contractor, and all subcontractors, if any. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Reciprocal Resident Bidder Preference requirement. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification in the form herein provided, to the effect that he will not have as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site. NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 5 OF 6 SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of Waterloo. Published pursuant to the provisions of Division VI of Chapter 384 of the City Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of , 2008. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY: Nancy Eckert City Clerk NOTICE OF HEARING CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 6 OF 6 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof Failure to do so will not relieve bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer- generated spread- sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s)provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is submitted. c. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. -- INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 1 of 11 d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered,but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. e. In preparing his bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided(i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required,the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. If the bidder chooses to submit the unit prices,total bid price, and total bid on a computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto,may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. _ The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening,but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. c. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall make the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 2 of 11 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. -- 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond(on the form furnished by the City)payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent(5%) of the bid submitted,which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bond,his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. 8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS a. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he as not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. b. Each bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any, execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5:00 P.M. the business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he has not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before executing any subcontract, the successful bidder shall submit the name of any proposed subcontractor for approval by the City. 9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal. Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. b. TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS (TSB)PRE-BID CONTRACT INFORMATION The Iowa D. O. T. TSB Pre-Bid Information Form(Form 730007WP 7-97) shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal. Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 3 of 11 10. MBE/WBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PURPOSE The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction contracts. The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts,but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's grow and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their"good- faith efforts"in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than$50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms.The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded construction contracts. -_ DEFINITIONS Goals: A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make "good-faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative action efforts to eradicate and prevent discrimination. Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical goal component of affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with respect to persons of any race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor) INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 4 of 11 Set Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority and women business enterprises. Contractor: --� As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or is listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list. Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or is listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list. Minority: Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American,Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124- - 1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1983). Lowest Responsible Bidder: Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on,judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. Broker: One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. Mayor's Advisory Committee: Mayor's Advisory Committee for Minority, Female, and Disadvantaged Business Enterprise. Good Faith Efforts: The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal -No Action necessary 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 5 of 11 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise(MBE) and Women Business Enterprise(WBE) as _ subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least 10% for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000 or more and projects under$50,000 where applicable at the Contract Compliance Officer's discretion. There is at least 2%WBE goal on -- City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make"good-faith efforts"to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration: A part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting * Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms * MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used * Reasons agreements were not reached * Follow-up after initial solicitations * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above(supported by appropriate documentation)based on overall program goals. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 6 of 11 RESPONSIBILITIES 1. City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms. D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and within two (2)business days forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. II. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance -- Program. Good-faith efforts include,but are not limited to,the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3)to appropriate MBE/WBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven(7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBE/WBE Certification List). If less than three(3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBE/WBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBE/WBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBE/WBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews,but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 7 of 11 D. If any MBE/WBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE was not selected. These reasons could include: a.Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids maybe required for verification. b. MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above(supported by appropriate documentation)based on overall program goals.E. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall submit the"Certification of MBE/WBE Accomplishment" (Form CCO-6)to the City of Waterloo III. MBE/WBE Firms A. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or are listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list. B. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. C. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid(Form CCO-5) to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven(7)working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 8 of 11 C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to,businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each bidder shall,upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 13. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. Award of contract will be made to that responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications,is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The City reserves the right to select any combination of Base Bid and Alternatives. The right is reserved to postpone award the contract for a reasonable time,not exceeding thirty(30) days. b. The City Council may, when in its interest,reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 9 of 11 c. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. 14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BOND,AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten(10) days after the prescribed forms are --- presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract documents in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a surety bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials,tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bond _ shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bond shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bond. c. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance. The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo, the Engineer and Cedar Valley Tech Works shall be named as an "Additional Insureds." The contractor shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 10 of 11 d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten(10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa,may grant,based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa,may Ad. either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re-advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the amount of the bid an the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. 15. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE -- Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Reciprocal Resident Bidder Preference requirement. -- Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification in the form herein provided, to the effect that he will not have as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site. i. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Page 11 of 11 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL F.Y.2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION CONTRACT NO.720 RM-8155(671)--9D-07 CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA Honorable Mayor and City Council -- Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: -- 1. The undersigned,being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of a Partnership consisting of the following partners ,having familiarized(himself) (themselves) (itself)with the existing conditions on the project area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda(if any), as prepared by Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying,Inc., are now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo,Iowa,hereby proposes to furnish all supervision,technical personnel, labor,materials,machinery,tools, appurtenances, equipment,and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this F.Y.2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST.EXTENSION,RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION,Contract No. 720, all in accordance with the above- ,listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following items and quantities: ITEM EST. UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNITS QTY. PRICE PRICE BASE BID 001. Clearing and Grubbing L.S. 1 002. Excavation, class 10 C.Y. 13,802 003. Place and Compact clean fill material C.Y. 10,679 004. Silt Fence(Erosion control fencing) L.F. 6570 005. Topsoil, furnish and spread C.Y. 4323 006 Seed, fertilize, and mulch(IDOT urban mix) ACRES 5.45 007. Removal of Floor slabs(PCC) S.Y. 32,644 FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 1 OF 9 008. Removal of foundations-Column Piers C.Y. _,128.5 009. Removal of steam tunnel Walls C.Y. 117 010. Pavement removal,P.C.C. S.Y. 19,280 011. Pavement removal,A.C.C. S.Y. 5643 012. Removal of driveway,P.C.C. S.Y. 361 013. Removal of sidewalk or bikeway S.Y. 566 -- 014. Removal of Granular surfacing S.Y. 425 015. Removal of concrete retaining walls C.Y. 126 016. Removal of Storm Sewer structures Each 40 017. Removal of storm Sewer pipe, 12-inch dia. L.F. 2578 or less 018. Removal of storm Sewer pipe, 15-inch thru L.F. 1514 24-inch dia. 019. Removal of storm Sewer pipe,27-inch thru L.F. 38 36-inch dia. 020. Removal of chainlink fence L.F. 368 021. Removal of bollards Each 26 022. Removal of guardrail L.F. 52 023. Removal of light poles Each 12 024. Removal of concrete footings for light poles Each 12 025. Removal of traffic sign Each 8 026. Removal of street sign Each 1 027. Removal of traffic signalization L.S. 1 028. Removal of 2 abandoned concrete bases L.S. 1 -- FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 2 OF 9 029. Removal of traffic signal pole base Each _4 030. Removal of traffic signal pole w/mastarm Each 2 031. Removal of traffic signal pole Each 2 032. Removal of Core Duct L.F. 1134 033. Adjustment of fixtures Each 2 034. Storm Sewer intake,IDOT RA-40 Each 21 035. Storm Sewer intake, IDOT RA-40,modified Each 2 036. Storm Sewer intake,DOT RA-41 Each 1 - 037. Storm Sewer manhole, IDOT RA-50 Each 5 038. Storm Sewer manhole,IDOT RA-50, Each 4 Modified-60"Dia. 039. Storm Sewer manhole, DOT RA-50, Each 3 Modified-72"Dia. 040. Storm Sewer manhole, IDOT RA-50, Each 1 Modified-84"Dia. 041. Storm Sewer manhole, DOT RA-50, Each 3 Modified-96"Dia. _ 042. Storm Sewer manhole, IDOT RA-50, Each 1 Modified-120"Dia. 043. Storm Sewer manhole, DOT RA-50, Each 1 Modified-144"Dia. 044. Storm Sewer manhole,IDOT RA-63, Each 2 045. Bar Screen,As Per Plan L.S. 1 046. Storm Sewer, 15-inch dia.,2000D RCP L.F. 1152.9 047. Storm Sewer, 18-inch dia., 2000D RCP L.F. 1006.7 FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 720 PAGE 3 OF 9 048. Storm Sewer, 24-inch dia., 2000D RCP L.F. 541.0 049. Storm Sewer, 30-inch dia., 2000D RCP L.F. 1032.2 050. Storm Sewer, 36-inch dia.,2000D RCP L.F. 269.8 051. Storm Sewer, 42-inch dia., 2000D RCP L.F. 394.9 052. Storm Sewer, 54-inch dia., 2000D RCP L.F. 203.0 053. Storm Sewer, 60-inch dia., 2000D RCP L.F. 78.2 054. Storm Sewer, 72-inch dia.,2000D RCP L.F. 155.1 055. Connection of Existing Storm Sewer Each 6 — 056. Special backfill material, 6"layer-furnished S.Y. 25,335 and placed 057. Special backfill material, 18"thick, crushed S.Y. 25,335 concrete-placement of owner furnished material 058. Geogrid,Tensar BX1100 or equal S.Y. 50,670 059. Pavement,P.C.C., 9-inch thick, [DOT S.Y. 19,693 class C 060. Driveways, 7"P.C.C. S.Y. 3696 061. Driveways, 8",P.C.C. S.Y. 774 062. Sidewalk, 5"P.C.C. S.Y. 1392 063. Detectable warnings for curb ramps S.F. 120 -- 064. Bikeway, 5"P.C.C. S.Y. 1604 065. P.C. Concrete Retaining Wall C.Y. 9.62 066. Fence,Chain Link,48 in.height L.F. 35.33 067. Painted pavement markings, symbols and Each 24 legends FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO. 720 PAGE 4 OF 9 068. Painted pavement markings STA 117.66 069. Earth shoulder construction STA 89 070. Signs, type A S.F. 81.00 071. Wood posts for signs L.F. 196 _ 072. Detector Loops Each 3 073. Lighting poles Each 1 074. Electrical circuits L.F. 193 075. Handholes Each 1 076. Conduit, 4-inch PVC, schedule 80 L.F. 88 077. Conduit, 4-inch PVC, schedule 40 L.F. 197 078. Road closure, RE-3B Each 4 079. Decorative cement concrete pavement L.S. 1 080. Driveway surfacing, class A, crushed stone Tons 103 081. Drain connection, 1"dia., complete Each 1 082. Drain copper, 1"dia. L.F. 57 083. Portland Cement Concrete Pavement L.S. 1 Samples 084. Field Office Each 1 085. Compliance with special provision L.S. 1 JD-RCRA 086. Traffic control L.S. 1 —` 087. Maintenance Bond,2-year L.S. 1 FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 - PAGE 5 OF 9 088. Pump Station construction, as per plan,including Installation of Pump Nos. 1 and 2, controls for pump Nos. 1 and 2, and appurtenant items. L.S. 1 089. Forcemain, 36-inch L.F. 589.2 090. Bend, 36-inch x 45 degrees Each 1 091. Bend, 36-inch x 221/2 degrees Each 2 092. Bend, 30-inch x 90 degrees Each 1 093. Reducing Bend, 36-inch x 30-inch Each 1 x 90 Degrees 094. Gatewell modifications, as per plan L.S. 1 TOTAL BASE BID ALT.NO. 1 ITEM EST. UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNITS QTY. PRICE PRICE 188. Installation of Pump No. 3 and additional controls L.S. 1 TOTAL-ALT.NO. 1 ALT.NO.2 ITEM. EST. UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNITS QTY. PRICE PRICE 288. Installation of Pump Nos. 3 and 4 and additional controls L.S. 1 TOTAL-ALT.NO.2 ALT. EST. UNIT TOTAL NO.3 DESCRIPTION UNITS QTY. PRICE PRICE 302. Excavation, class 10 C.Y. 998 -- 303. Place and compact clean fill material C.Y. 549 _ FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 6 OF 9 304. Silt fence(erosion control fencing) L.F. _500 305. Topsoil, furnish and spread C.Y. 234 306. Seed, fertilize, and mulch(IDOT Urban Mix)ACRES 0.29 307. Removal of floor slabs (PCC) S.Y. 2482 310. Pavement removal,P.C.C. S.Y. 973 356. Special backfill material, 6"layer-furnished and placed S.Y. 1950 357. Special backfill material, 18"thick, crushed S.Y. 1950 concrete-placement of owner furnished material 358. Geogrid,Tensar BX1100 or equal S.Y. 3900 359. Pavement,P.C.C., 9-inch thick, DOT class C S.Y. 1721 363. Detectable warnings for curb ramps S.F. 20 367. Painted pavement markings, symbols and Each 4 legends 368. Painted pavement markings STA 11.39 369. Earth shoulder construction STA 8 370. Signs,type A S.F. 6.25 371. Wood posts for signs L.F. 14 385. Compliance with special provision L.S. 1 JD-RCRA 386. Traffic control L.S. 1 387. Maintenance Bond,2-year L.S. 1 TOTAL-ALT.NO.3 FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 7 OF 9 ALT.NO.4 ITEM. EST. UNIT TOTAL NO. DESCRIPTION UNITS QTY. PRICE PRICE 479. Unit Pavers L.S. 1 TOTAL-ALT.NO.4 2. It is understood that the quantities set forth are approximate only and subject to variation and -- that the unit bid price for the work done shall govern in the actual payment to Contractor. 3. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa,to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty(30)days after the opening thereof,or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn,the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten(10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten(10) days after"Notice to Proceed" is issued. 4. Security in the sum of Dollars ($ )in the form of , is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 5. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. 6. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification. -- 7. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 8. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s),which have performed an aggregate of$10,000.00 -- in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC,within ten(10)days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 9. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 8 OF 9 10. The bidder shall list the MBE/WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s)to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s). The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on"SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL"Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract. The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 11. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or"NA". 12. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. 13. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. (Name of Bidder) (Date) BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S.No. FORM OF BID CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 9 OF 9 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS,that we, _4 as Principal,and as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO ,Iowa,hereinafter called "OWNER." In the penal sum Dollars($ ) lawful money of the United States,for the payment of which sum will and truly be made,we bind ourselves,our heirs,executors,administrators,and successors,jointly and severally,firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of ,2008,for NOW,THEREFORE, (a)If said Bid shall be rejected,or in the alternate, (b)If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract,and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith,and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, Then this obligation shall be void,otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect;it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall,in no event,exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. By virtue of statutory authority,the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond as provided in the specifications or by law. The Surety,for value received,hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or execute such contract;and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and the Surety,have hereunto set their hands and seals,and such of them as are corporations,have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their — proper officers this day of ,A.D.2008. (Seal) Principal By (Title) (Seal) Witness Surety By Witness Attorney-in-fact NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of ) -y )ss County of ) — ,being first duly sworn,deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner,Partner, Officer,Representative, or Agent) , of the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid; 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers,partners, owners, agents, representatives, _. employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant,has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, to fix any overhead,profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance,or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents,representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest,including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ,2008. Title My commission expires NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR " State of ) ) ss: County of ) ,being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner,Partner, Officer,Representative,or Agent) ,of hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to contract pertaining to the project in • (City or County and State) 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers,partners, owners, agents,representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant,has in any way colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly,with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal,or to fix any overhead,profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy,connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents,representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2008. Title My commission expires EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not -- discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor,vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age,mental or physical disability,political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading c. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex,national origin,religion, economic status, age,mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers'representative of the contractor's commitment under this section. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE PAGE 1 OF 2 5. The contractor, subcontractor,vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures,patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books,records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this _ contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program— Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract, subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non- discrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Official) (Title) (Date) EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE PAGE 2 OF 2 RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE In response to Illinois'law concerning resident preference and in accordance with Section 23.21 of the Iowa Code, all non-federal-aid public improvement projects, which include road construction, shall be performed by a qualified resident bidder. The resident bidder has been further defined as follows: To be a qualified resident bidder, the person, corporation, partnership, or firm — shall not have, as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site of a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. An Illinois laborer is any person who has resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain an Illinois resident. This applies to all labor on the project, whether skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled; whether manual or non-manual. This also applies to work subcontracted by or to the resident bidder on a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. The resident bidder may place on such work no more than three residents of Illinois who are his regularly employed executive and technical experts. As noted,this definition gives a preference as to whom the contractors or subcontractors can employ. The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a qualified resident bidder according to the above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of"Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents. If it is determined that the contractor does not meet this qualification after he begins work, a shutdown notice shall be issued and the voiding of the contract shall begin unless the contractor becomes qualified. RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION CONTRACT NO: PROJECT NAME: DATE OF LETTING: — To be a qualified resident bidder, the person, corporation,partnership, or firm shall not have, as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site of a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. An Illinois laborer is any person who has resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain an Illinois resident. This applies to all labor on the project, whether skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled, whether manual or non-manual. This also applies to work subcontracted by or to the resident bidder on a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. The resident bidder may place on such work no more than three residents of Illinois who are his regularly employed executive and technical experts. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the contractor and his subcontractors at the work site until this project is completed. I hereby certify that no Illinois resident laborer as defined above will be employed at the work site during the contract period from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME CORPORATE OFFICER TITLE DATE Revised February 2003 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company Address of Company Zip Telephone Number( ) Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number Estimated Construction Work Dates / Start Finish Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor — Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number( ) Subcontractor's Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer _ - 1 - C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or Subcontractor. _ 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic Name Address Position Sex Origin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY(Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training,upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employment opportunity and merit employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. - 2 - D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap. E. will give training (Name of Company) and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent feasible. III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION A. recognizes that the (Name of Company) effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy statement, and (Name of Company) will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to ensure that equal employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual merit, and to actively encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company on this basis. B. will undertake the (Name of Company) following six (6) steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program: _ 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment; 2. Local Recruitment and Employment; 3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and Employment; 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment; 5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and -- 6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities. C. will take -- (Name of Company) whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has adequate minority, female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment attempts: 1. Local advertising media(newspapers, radio, TV); 2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools); 3. Public and private institutions in the area(UNI, Hawkeye Community College); 4. Job Service of Iowa; and 5. Other. _ - 3 - D. will seek qualified minority, (Name of Company) female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or skill and responsibility. E. All sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program. F. Training,upgrading,promotion and transfer activities at all levels will be monitored to ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local group employees. G. will encourage other (Name of Company) companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will assist them in their efforts. H. has taken the following (Name of Company) Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write"NONE") 1. 2. I. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local --• contractors and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write "NONE") -- 1. 2. J. will require approved _ (Name of Company) Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non- minority contractors have adequate representation of minority, female and local persons in their total work force. -- - 4 - K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order 11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company,based on parity percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an annual basis. L. will keep records of (Name of Company) specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training,upgrading and promotion and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested. — M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: Minority Parity= .08 (8%) N. Affirmative Action(Name of Company) Employment Goals: The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and inflexible quotas which must be met,but must be targets,reasonably attainable by means of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire — Affirmative Action Program work." For the year 2008,please submit percentage targets for employing minorities and women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities and women, please submit that percentage. *Goals for Minorities: Goals for Women: *Your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or more for minorities and 1% and 5% or more for women. -- Please be advised that the goals or targets are purely your estimation of how many women and minorities your company can reasonably expect to hire in 2008. Note, that none of the goals are rigid or inflexible. They are targets that your company calculates as reasonably attainable. This will help the City in its monitoring procedures as required by City of Waterloo Resolution No. 1984-142(4). - 5 - CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL WORK FORCE (WATERLOO) HOURLY NAME AND ADDRESS JOB CATEGORY RACE SEX WAGE INDICATE: DISABLED VETERAN: DV VIETNAM ERA VETERAN: VV HANDICAPPED: H - 6 - We hereby certify that we are in compliance with all City and Federal Affirmative Action Regulations and agree to accept all liability for failure to comply. Respectfully submitted, By: Company Executive Date By: Equal Employment Opportunity Officer Date City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Officer Approved Disapproved Reason: By: Date: - 7 - DESCRIPTION OF JOB CATEGORIES 1. Officials/Manager: Occupations in which employees set broad policies, exercise overall responsibility for execution of all policies, or direct individual departments or special phases of the agency's operations or provide specialized consultation on a regional, district or area basis. Includes: department heads,bureau chiefs, division chiefs, directors, deputy directors, controllers, examiners, wardens, superintendents, unit supervisors, sheriffs, police and fire chiefs and inspectors and kindred workers. 2. Professionals: Occupations which require specialized and theoretical knowledge which is usually required through college training or thorough work experience and other training which provides comparable knowledge. Includes: personnel and labor relations workers, social workers, doctors, psychologists, registered nurses, economists, dietitians, lawyers, system analysts, accountants, Engineers, employment and vocational rehabilitation counselors, teachers or instructors,police and fire captains and lieutenants and kindred workers. 3. Technicians: Occupations which require a combination of basic scientific or technical knowledge and manual skill which can be obtained through specialized post-secondary school education and through equivalent on-the-job training. Includes: computer programmers and operations, draftsmen, surveyors, licensed practical nurses, photographs, radio operators, technical illustrators, police and fire sergeants and kindred workers. 4. Office/Clerical: Workers are responsible for internal and external communication, recording and retrieval of data and/or information and other paper work required in an office. Includes: bookkeepers,messengers, office machine operators, clerk-typists, stenographers, court transcribers, hearing reporters, statistical clerks, dispatchers, license distributors,payroll clerks and kindred workers. 5. Skilled Craft Workers: Workers perform jobs which require special manual skill and a thorough and comprehensive knowledge of the processes involved in the work which is acquired through on-the-job training programs. Includes: Mechanics and repairman, electricians,heavy equipment operators, stationary Engineers, skilled machine occupations, carpenters, compositors and typesetters and kindred workers. 6. Sales Workers: Occupations engaging wholly and primarily in direct selling. Includes: advertising agents and salesman, insurance agents and brokers, real estate agents and brokers, stock and bond salesmen, demonstrators, salesmen and sales clerks, grocery clerks and cashier checkers, and kindred workers. 7. Operatives (semi-skilled): Workers who operate machine or processing equipment or perform other factory-type duties of intermediate skill level which can be mastered in a few weeks and require only limited training. Includes: apprentices (auto mechanics), plumbers,building trades,metal working trades, bricklayers, carpenters, electricians, machinists, mechanics,printing trades, etc., operatives, attendants (auto service and parking),plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners,mine operatives and laborers, motormen, oilers and -- - 8 - greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary fireman, truck and tractor drivers,weavers, (textile),welders and flame cutters and kindred workers. 8. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers, gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers,longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen,raftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifting, digging,mixing, loading and pulling operations and kindred workers. 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered with a Federal or State agency. �- 10. Trainees (on-the-job): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. s White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial,professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. - 9 - CONTRACT PROVISION . Targeted Small Business (TSB) Affirmative Action Responsibilities on Non-Federal Aid Projects{Third-Party State-Assisted Projects) r June 2004 June 2004 TSB AFFIRMATIVE ACTION RESPONSIBILITIES ON NON-FEDERAL AID PROJECTS (THIRD-PARTY STALE-ASSISTED PROJECTS) 1. TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS (TSB)DEFINITION A TSB is a small business, as defined by Iowa Code Section 15.102(5),which is 51% or more owned, operated and actively managed by one or more women, minority persons or persons with a disability. Generally this is a for-profit small business enterprise under single management, is located in Iowa and has an annual gross income of less than 3 — million dollars computed as an average of the three preceding fiscal years. 2. TSB REQUIREMENTS , In all state-assisted projects made available through the Iowa Department of Transportation, local governments have certain affirmative action requirements to encourage and increase participation of disadvantaged individuals in business enterprises. These requirements are based on Iowa Code Section 19B.7 and 541 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 4. These requirements supersede all existing TSB regulations, orders, circulars and administrative requirements. 3. TSB DIRECTORY INFORMATION Available from: Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals Targeted Small Business Lucas Building Des Moines,IA 50319 Phone: 515-281-7357 Website: www.iowai.net/iowa/dia/tsb 4. THE CONTRACTOR'S TSB POLICY The contractor is expected to promote participation of disadvantaged business enterprises as suppliers, manufactures and subcontractors through a continuous, positive, result- oriented program. Therefore the contractor's TSB policy shall be: It is the policy of this firm that Targeted Small Business (TSB) concerns shall have the maximum Y practic Y y participate al opportunit to participate in contracts fnnr1,-d with ` state-assisted funds which are administered by this firm (e.g. suppliers, manufactures and subcontractors). The purpose of our policy is to encourage and increase the TSB participation in contracting opportunities made available by state-assisted programs. — 5. CONTRACTOR SHALL APPOINT An EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EEO) OH-10ER The contractor shall designate a responsible person to serve as TSB officer to fulfill the contractors affirmative action responsibilities. This person shall have the necessary statistics, funding, authority and responsibility to carry out and enforce the fiuifs FRO . policy. The FRO officer shall be responsible for developing, managing and implementing the program on a day-to-day basis. The officer shall also: A. For current TSB information, contact the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals (515-281-7357)to identify potential material suppliers,manufactures and contractors. B. Make every reasonable effort to involve TSBs by soliciting quotations from them and incorporating them into the firm's bid. C. Make every reasonable effort to establish systematic written and verbal contact with those TSBs having the materials or expertise to perform the work to be subcontracted, at least two weeks prior to the time quotations are to be submitted. Maintain complete records of negotiation efforts. —' D. Provide or arrange for assistance to TSBs in seeking bonding, analyzing plans/specifications or other actions that can be viewed as technical assistance. E. Ensure the scheduled progress payments are made to TSBs as agreed in subcontract agreements. F. Require all subcontractors and material suppliers to comply with all contract equal opportunity and affirmative action provisions. _ 6. COUNTING TSBs PARTICIPATION ON A PROJECT TSBs are to assume actual and contractual responsibilities for provision of materials/supplies, subcontracted work or other commercially useful function. A. The bidder may count: (1) Planned expenditures for materials/supplies to be obtained from TSB suppliers and manufacturers; or (2) Work to be subcontracted to a TSB; or (3) Any other commercially useful function. B. The contractor may count: (1) 100% of an expenditure to a TSB manufacturer that produces/supplies goods manufactured from raw materials. (2) 60% of an expenditure to TSB suppliers that are not manufacturers; provided the suppliers perform a commercially useful function in the supply process. (3) Only those expenditures to TSBs that perform a commercially useful function in the work of a contract,including those as a subcontractor. (4) Work the Contracting Authority has determined that it involves a commercially useful function. The TSB must have a necessary and useful role in the transaction of a kind for which there is a market outside the context of the TSB program. For example, leasing equipment or — purchasing materials from the prime contractor would not count. 7. REQUIRED DATA, DOCUMENTS AND CONTRACT AWARD PROCF:[)URES FROM BIDDERS/CONTRACTORS FOR PROJECTS WITH ASSIGNED GOALS A. Bidders • Bidders who fail to demonstrate reasonable positive efforts may be declared ineligible to be awarded the contract. Bidders shall complete the bidding documents plus a separate form called "TSB Pre-Bid Contact Information". This form includes: (1) Name(s) of the TSB(s)contacted regarding subcontractable items. (2) Date of the contract. (3) Whether or not a TSB bid/quotation was received. _ (4) Whether or not the TSB's bid/quotation was used. (5) The dollar amount proposed to be subcontracted. B. Contractors Using Quotes From TSBs Use those TSBs whose quotes are listed in the "Quotation Used in Bid" column along with a"yes"indicated on the Pre-bid Contact Information form. C. Contractors NOT Using Quotes From TSBs — If there are no TSBs listed on the Pre-bid Contract Information form, then the contractor shall document all efforts made to include TSB participation in this project by documenting the following: (1) What pre-solicitation or pre-bid meetings scheduled by the contracting — authority were attended? (2) Which general news circulation, trade associations and/or minority- focused media were advertised concerning the subcontracting opportunities? 0 e '1 I 1 . 1 ] /6 Iii t ‘:g 1 .1.' .5 ,1 z 4 4i i 8 . i'.. 187 ' 1 . r . $ t a N S C"' Jf ta. t ,' .. ..:vs 0 : , 1 . ° a . z r g • i g . g . I NI I I OL ¢7 1 c7 p t d I g K i 1 :F2 1 b - g I I i I t 1111 .= g-1 5.: U JIil1 (3) Were written notices sent to TSBs that TSBs were being solicited and was -- sufficient time allowed for the TSBs to participate effectively? (4) Were initial solicitations of interested TSBs followed up? (5) Were TSBs provided with adequate information about the plans, specifications and requirements of the contract? (6) Were interested TSBs negotiated with in good faith? If a TSB was rejected as unqualified, was the decision based on an investigation of their capabilities? (7) Were interested TSBs assisted in obtaining bonding, lines of credit or insurance required by the contractor? (8) Were services used of minority community organization, minority contractors. groups; local, state and federal minority business assistance offices or any other organization providing such assistance. The above documentation shall remain in the contractor's files for a period of three (3) _ years after the completion of the project and be available for examination by the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals. • 8. POSITIVE EFFORT DOCUMENTATION WHEN NO GOALS ARE ASSIGNED Contractors are also required to make positive efforts in utilizing TSBs on all state- assisted projects which are not assigned goals. Form "TSB Pre-bid Contact Information" is required to be submitted with bids on all projects. If there is no TSB participation, then the contractor shall comply with section 7C. of this document prior to the contract award. -- June 2004. .. UTILIZATION OF TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS (TSB)ENTERPRISES ON NON-FEDERAL AID PROJECTS (HIRKD-PARTY STATE-ASSISTED PROJECTS) • In accordance with Iowa Code Section 19B.7 and 541 Iowa Administrative Code Chapter 4, it is the policy of the Iowa Department of Transportation (Iowa DOT) that Targeted Small Business (TSB) enterprises shall have the maximum practicable opportunity to participate in the performance of contracts financed in whole or part with state funds. Under this policy it is the responsibility of the recipients of state funds to help finance projects to make a positive effort to solicit bids from and to utilize TSBs as contractors and ensure that the contractors make positive efforts to utilize these enterprises as subcontractors, suppliers or participants in the work covered by this agreement. The Recipient's "positive efforts" should include,but not be limited to: 1. Obtaining the names of qualified TSB contractors from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals (515-281-7357) or from its website: www.iowai.net/iowa/dia/tsb. 2. Notifying qualified TSBs of proposed projects involving state-assisted funding. Notification should be made in sufficient time to allow the TSBs to participate effectively in the bidding process. 3. Soliciting bids from qualified TSBs on each project, and identifying for TSBs -- the availability of subcontract work. 4. Including in the bid proposals for state-assisted projects, a contract provision titled "TSB Affirmative Action Responsibilities on Non-Federal Aid Projects (Third-Party State-Assisted Projects)", or a similar document developed by the Recipient. 5. Ensuring that the awarded contractor has and shall follow the contract provisions. The Recipient is encouraged to establish goals or percentages to achieve TSB participation in these projects. Contract goals may vary depending on the type of project, the projects sub-contractible items, the type of service or supplies needed for the project, and the availability of qualified TSBs in the area. The Recipient shall agree to provide the Iowa DOT the following documentation: — 1. Copies of correspondence and replies, and written notes of personal and/or telephone contacts with any TSBs. Such documentation can be used to demonstrate the Recipient's positive efforts and it should be placed in the general project file. 2. Bidding proposals noting established TSB goals,if any. 3. The dollar amount contracted to, subcontracted to, or supplied by qualified TSBs for the project or projects covered by this agreement. • 4. The attached "Checklist and Certification" form shall be filled out upon completion of each project and forwarded to the Iowa DOT's FFO Administrator, Office of Contracts, 800 Lincoln Way, Ames,Iowa 50010. un 2O04 CHECKLIST AND CERTIFICATION OF THE UTILIZATION OF TARGETED SMALL BUSINESS (TSB) ON NON-1EDERAL AID PROJECTS (THIRD-PARTY STALE-ASSIS l'ED PROJECTS) CITY: PROJECT NUMBER: COUNTY: AGREEMENT NUMBER: 1. Were qualified TSB names obtained from the Iowa Department of Inspections and Appeals? YES NO If no, explain 2. Were qualified TSBs notified of project? YES NO — If yes, by letter , telephone ,personal contact , other If no, explain 3. Were bids solicited from qualified TSBs? YES NO If no, explain 4. Was a goal or percentage (%) established YES NO for TSB participation? If yes,what was the goal or percentage (%) If no, explain why not 5. Did the prime contractor use positive efforts to YES NO utilize TSBs on subcontracts? If no, what action was taken by County/City Is documentation in files? YES NO 6. What was the dollar amount reimbursed to the City/County from the Iowa Department of Transportation? $ What was the final project cost? $ What was the dollar amount performed by TSBs? $ Was the goal or percentage (%) achieved? YES NO If no, explain I certify that the COUNTY/CITY(circle one)used positive efforts to utilize TSBs as participants in this project. PROJECT ENGINEER/MANAGER DATE ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the F.Y. 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION CONTRACT NO. 720,that have a potential for MBE/WBE Participation. This listing,however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a Prime Contractor. — BID TOTAL ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QUANTITY 001. Clearing and Grubbing L.S. 1 004. Silt Fence (Erosion Control Fencing) L.F. 6570 005. Topsoil, furnish and spread C.Y. 4323 006. Seed, fertilize, and mulch(IDOT Urban mix) ACRES 5.45 013. Removal of Sidewalk or bikeway S.Y. 566 020. Removal of chainlink fence L.F. 368 021. Removal of Bollards Each 26 022. Removal of Guardrail L.F. 52 060. Driveways, 7"P.C.C. S.Y. 3696 061. Driveways, 8"P.C.C. S.Y. 774 062. Sidewalk, 5"P.C.C. S.Y. 1392 063. Detectable warnings for curb ramps S.F. 120 -- 064. Bikeway, 5"P.C.C. S.Y. 1604 304. Silt Fence (Erosion Control Fencing) L.F. 500 305. Topsoil, furnish and spread C.Y. 234 306. Seed, fertilize, and mulch(IDOT Urban Mix) ACRES 0.29 363. Detectable Warnings for Curb Ramps S.F. 20 MBE/WBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent(10%) MBE goal and a two percent(2%) WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors,but the Pre- Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out completely. City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 -- CONTRACT COMPLIANCE FORM INDEX (as of 07-08-2002) Form CCO-1, Contract Compliance Policy This is the Current Contract Compliance Program for the City of Waterloo and must be adhered to for any City of Waterloo contracts over$50,000,funded solely with City funds. Form CCO-2, Subcontractors Bid Request Form This form acknowledges that the Prime Contractor has contacted potential MBE/WBE subcontractors- This form is initiated and signed by the Prime Contractor then signed by the MBEIWBE subcontractor and returned to the Prime contractor by the MBE/WBE contractor. Form CCO-3, - Letter to be used when soliciting for Subcontractor Quotes This is a sample letter from the Prime Contractor to Subcontractors soliciting bids for various contract items. Form CCO-4, Pre-Bid Contact Information Form This form and the accompanying Form CCO-4A, must be completed and submitted with the Prime Contractor's Bid. Certification of Prime Contractor Regarding MBE/WBE Unavailability — If any MBE/WBE's submitting bids are not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany Form CCO-4. Form CCO-4A, Pre-Bid Contact Information Instructions Detailed instructions on how Form CCO-4 should be completed and the responsibilities of the Prime Contractor and the Subcontractor. Form CCO- 5, Letter of Intent to Bid from MBE/WBE Contractor Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient scope letters are not received -` by the.City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. This form is completed and signed by the MBE/WBE. Form CCO-6,Final MBE/WBE Participation Amounts Upon Completion and Finalization of the project, the Prime Contractor must . submit this form with their final documents. It shall be filled out and signed by the Prime Contractor on the project. If project goals are not met, a detailed report must accompany this form prior to release of retainage. J:UACK-F\DBE File\Contract Compliance Program Form INDEXdoc SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name),hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on(project name) in the area of(description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor)has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by(date) and(time). Subcontractor's Company Name Date Subcontractor's Signature — Date Prime Bidder's Signature LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No. : Dear • (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the above referenced project. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) _ (Prime Contractor's Company Name)is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) Form CCO-3(11/28/2001) 0 0 o a ) V, G °CI ' -� 0 'Vct g 0 04 "d ct 0 0 o `� "d k � a a � _ E'er a) - Q,ci 0 w 0 W o W a 3 .� M Q a °o b 0 0 — i 0 '9 pQ w a " a 4w, Q oo w3 3 0 � d • o - rW o - a y 0.) - O � 4 o o 0 . o PQ ›, 0 A on P. 0 " 1 a) A a 00 a)a) 0 o O c. i'0 > >4, , • Gz1 E 0 b0 aJ o P.. ..) � • aU o o -0 v O � o �� P4 EI w a) a) ,?.- 0 o °' � Wz . `" A Q W z a� C 'a 0 b a� > 0 3 A U cc o - owN � � � W — W O 2 -° Y - O w 0, X m .0 aC i E. `" °' A Wpaa a al rgi H � � M pW �, U w a a) .0 0 `45 •� -" x H u w) � � 0 oC� 500 E5 v) W g V' i-,cts ,--, 0 4) b cc ', .. .d 0 . on ---( W aN' O A• O � w • 0 oGw a ! ' Or - pa U .� 2 .8 PP A � w . •� • o d Q CI on as o .al w EL' w A C1 0 o w W A o O 3 CZt O .0 � '-' g 4.4 W 0 a., '' '0 . ' � � W a A to � y > bop o5 C.) — , I. U P�• ° o = w 0 w co y W E .E o - o RI — a •3 1-4 U O 8 ▪ a)b .� N '5 ✓ : 00; • oY o• � o a ij Vrs V) o � b � � -8a ; 1,14 C 3CIb � W ° C p2 WI 0 0 o d) 3 O o U v �' a) o W 0 a0o w 4- 0 >, m .� c� a an O •�a o d 46:-e� Q 0 1- H w o y o O, O- o p O z 0 F-, U frill o U paw as ^ 0 ~ • a cil: 00 as 0 U a 3 °' E .•1a_ a> `.�sya Q .L�' O O E O N a F= P. z 3 v rn >,v >+ E -0 -- Y - 2w 4 -04. O o s. 4-1 to 0 bO O a) o a) O > 4-1 a c w U bA O ° W bA ~ _0 a) ,.SC a) -0 y.a Q aO U -- �� O ) ;.., co 'b N N W ¢i U al ° '0 y 0 O -•0 U H 'O — cn ..., � � cn � 5 -0 FFF. 0 .5 .� 0 C 'L7 a.-. CA•.. O a) U W O o.2 0 w 0 y -r m . a0i o - .o _ O O .fl o y0,� 'oo d" A J i. ct_ U �' 0 o bA -P t o a 0 0 R, = ° O . a) — cts '� [ w o rn o '" n° W o w 0 d 0 0 -fl Z w 3 o a °�' PI b w o b -0 n ': g al W U U 0 = Y •b W °D'5 °n o `� G� r C W ao O 2 .5aai o ti 1 -o -0 - 0 E+ ai a y 0 0 U ,� a y a, ° 0 at d a, '6 0 0, ;; a aW a.) ° 0 -w iy a) 0, o 0 o >, jWQ0U .-. Z a CO U U -0 ...0 0 ,� ,M 0— rn y i v a a � 3 ti • c° b n o • �• 2O aas y �;� a� l O �1 :isE 0 o 0 o `' a .o 1 ort al Ga o _9,7+ 0 o z cn > o �9 � 1. `Z \ 0 ai7' P. . . a � WO cn 0 ) ›w • W 0 a CO E.C. , 0 -. a U a] � �. o w `aE ° W to sr/D r.i � ]H g . . z 0 0• 0 H W -0 0 .° W 5 o cn 0 o O fl a' ° z 4. W o 0 a) to � Fz+ oo � d � -°• � � CO � � •� w 0 30 � .5 41 Z a�i 2i a -C 0 0 0 '" o y •�' W U O7.5 -d � w 0 cn o > 0 a o -a ° 3 a) 3. s. a) W d `' W •• W W '0 o . OA 0 1. 0GG RP E-+ a) 0 , a a) W a� +� [A a si o a� o ¢ ' z se d a Aa 0 �; ' `" ` '" `" o o g 0 — C 1. s w H an O "o a> O a) ;� w d . az o a) U 0 w o W 0 Act w U o o o Y 'Cl = 0 0n cn a) .,. 0 0 a) s� I o b aEg U °' W Q. O b U 3 CD 0 o 0aio P? �-a ° w a . � nod � 3•� 0 — ca v, a) o 3 ono m a� o a 00 . b a a� c� a� o > "i q •� 9 a� Q 0 " say. s W w a, 0 a w 5 w ct 0 v ° 0 3 3 b O 0 `n O .o . 0 0 0.) 8U) 0 >, cc: to AO b 0 = >,o E c i m -0 w '0 T O C U a� _ O a) O ^� rn U T) ��Y r, '� a) O W 0 al U 0 E .0 -0 0) -0 0 ° 'b a) a,a) F. 03 +-, O U a0i 'b U FA -0 z • w W 0 N > iU ° '� O y U CU) 4Lj 3 rwn No �; o b `�° co Q 'a 0 o sue. ,o O� ..0 © •onerip ^ >,... p ,n 3 o d o oO o o a ap b ci r-, o p 0 ,b Q" w �� - 0 o a�i ' ai U 0 c 9 • o U 'b W a . o -0 > 0 eo a o 0 Q) O 0 �' wccl U °q o a) ' ° w E±' 0 0 0 a 03 0 0 0 E. o m o . >, 0 t g 4 0 0, t U O qq c0 O rn o od Z (� a Q o wU s" on0 d ° 0 0 o o 0 cai .o ci c0 Jo ci -0 a) ,. >, 0 �� U U ... •� Wgo � o :a 0 >,ZO o y � Ub '4 0 G; U U U 0 O >, O .0 C. w. N — .t0 = d ° a, 0 Uc� E-+ 7) ).-•, 2 a) . W � Ua � a w a. a a r. w � a`i7o et bp cri3 v � � = .0 ,� w LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBE/WBE LETTER) _g According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program- 2002, all MBE/WBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven(7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE — Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: — Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: — Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 — Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 Form CCO-5(06-20-2002) d,erloo,° CITY OF WATERLOO CERTIFICATION OF MBE/WBE ACCOMPLISHMENT (To be completed by the Prime Contractor and submitted with the final documents) Contract: — Prime Contractor: Letting Date: Completion Date: MBE/WBE Commitment Listed on Pre-Bid Form: $ MBE/WBE Company Dollars Committed Dollar Amount Paid % of Goal $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ $ TOTAL — 1 (Name) the (Corporate Officer) of certify that the MBE/WBE -- (Prime Contractor) accomplishment to be true and accurate. (Date) (Signature) Form CCO-6 (11-28-2001) CERTIFIED MBE / WBE CONTRACTORS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Oter�aa ♦o CONTRACT COMPLIANCE OFFICE Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, Iowa 50703 — City WEB Site: www.ci.waterloo.ia.us Contract Compliance WEB Site for listing updates: http://www.wplwloo.lib.ia.us/contractcompliance/ Contact: Louis Starks, Contracts and Grants Coordinator Email: louis.starks a,waterloo-ia.org Phone: (319) 291-4429 Fax: (319) 291-4431 MBE VIBE Certified Contractors List Page 1 of CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CARTER ELECTRIC 725 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)232-9808 Pager: (319) 235-4021 Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: — ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR COCK IREN ROOFING 1708 Newell Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 232-7513 Contact: James Cockhren Specializing in: ROOFING CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319)235-0885 Fax: (319) 236-8177 Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 833-0118 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE RE1 E FLATWORK POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION MBEiW.BE Certified Contractors List Page 2 of CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS D.C. CORPORATION - 426 Beech Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319) 236-9075 FAX: (319) 236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING(ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION — GREER'S WORKS - 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION — ELIAS GROVER CEMENT CONTRACTORS 116 Carl Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 234-3839 — Contact: Elias Grover, Owner Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, ASPHALT, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION LOVE'S ENTERPRISE 835 West Fifth St. P.O. Box 246 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319)233-3260 -' Contact: David Love Certified: Iowa DOT, City of Waterloo Certified MBE — Specializing in: CONCRETE PAVING, ASPHALT, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, TRUCKING MBE WBE Certified Contractors List Page 3 of 5 OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PAULINE COMPANY, INC. 139 Clark Street P. O. Box 1623 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 236-2345 FAX: (319) 236-1568 email: DJToay@aol.com Certified: Targeted Small Business, Iowa DOT, City of Waterloo Certified MBE Contact: W.C. Stokes, Owner Specializing in: EROSION CONTROL, TRUCKING, GUARDRAIL, CLEARING AND GRUBBING CONCRETE PAVING, ASPHALT, CURB AND GUTTER, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, MASONRY WORK, ROOFING, CD BASKETS, ROADWAY PIPE, TILE LOCATING, REVETMENT SHOULDERS, FIELD FENCE, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION WORK QUICK CONSTRUCTION 21.7 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)232-5564 Contact: Leroy Harrington _ Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION CHARLIE SCHAUF TRUCKING 627 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 232-4717 Contact: Charles Schauf Specializing in: • 1)r`JrvThJra MB.E/!VB.E Certified Contractors List Page _. o': CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS ATLAS PAINTING, INC.* 911 Sycamore Street P.O.BOX 65 Waterloo, IA 50704 — Phone: (319) 232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING — PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE* 4003 University Avenue Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone : (319) 233-6131 FAX: (319) 233-6133 email: JR11486@cfu.net Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC.* 2920 Texas Street Waterloo, IA 50702 Phone : (319) 233-7481 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Patricia J. Kimball — Specializing in: STORM SEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARY SEWER, INTAKE STRUCTURES * DENOTES WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE _ :13 =/W.t3.E Certified Contractors List — Page. ; of STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) All questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? _ 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers. 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 2 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at , this day of , 2008. (Name of Bidder) By: Title: State of ) _ ) ss: County of ) ,being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and — correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2008. Notary Public My commission expires STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS A. STREET LIGHTING AND DETECTOR LOOPS B. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT-SECTION 02768 C. UNIT PAVERS-SECTION 02780 D. CITY OF WATERLOO-DRIVEWAY AND SIDEWALK SPECIFICATIONS E. PROJECT MEETINGS-SECTION 01200 F. CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS-SECTION 1500 G. PROCESS EQUIPMENT-GENERAL PROVISIONS-SECTION 11200 H. NON-CLOG SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES-SECTION 11216 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 1 RN-8155(671)--9D-07 SPECIFICATIONS — FOR 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION STREET LIGHTING AND DETECTOR LOOPS IN WATERLOO, - IOWA DOT PROJECT NUMBER: RN--8155(671)-9D-07 1. SCOPE This Specifications covers the work described in the Plans, Specifications and Special Provisions. It covers furnishing all labor, equipment and materials, and performing all required operations to complete the work as per Plans and Specifications. Unless otherwise modified by the Specifications, all work, including equipment, material and installation, shall be in accordance with the appropriate Iowa DOT standard and supplemental specifications. Where reference is made to the codes, standard specifications, supplemental specifications, the safety orders, the general orders, the standards, laws, and ordinances, it shall mean the version of the reference that is in effect on the bid advertising date.All requirements of other specifications contained or referred to in the contract documents which conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 2. DEFINITIONS Terms used in this Special Provisions shall have the meanings defined in paragraphs a to i — below. a Specifications means this document titled "SPECIFICATIONS FOR 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION STREET LIGHTING AND DETECTOR LOOPS IN WATERLOO, IOWA" prepared for this particular project to revise, modify, augment or complete the Specifications. b IDOT means the Iowa Department of Transportation. c City means City of Waterloo, Iowa or its representatives. d WTOD means City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department. e Punch List means a list of items that need to be corrected by the contractor on the project before the final acceptance can be made. f Response Time means the elapsed time from when the contractor is given a notice to make certain actions to the time the contractor actually starts the action. g Contractor means the contractor and/or contractor's representatives and sub- contractors. h LED means light emitting diode. i LED Unit means the optical assembly of one section of a signal head with LED light source. — SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 10 RN-Si55(671)--90-07 3. RELATED SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS The contractor shall comply with all of the standards listed in paragraphs below unless otherwise modified by plans, Specifications, or Special Provisions. The contractor shall notify WTOD in writing of any discrepancy or ambiguity as to the intent or meaning of the plans, Specifications, or Special Provision before starting to work on that area. WTOD will supply the contractor in writing with the intent. The decision of WTOD shall be final and conclusive. ITE (Institute of Transportation Engineers) Standards. IDOT Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, and all current Supplemental Specifications in particular Sections 2402, 2403, 2404, 2405. 2408, 2423, 4187, and Division 26. Specifications of the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. National Electrical Code. National Electrical Safety Code. MUTCD - Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) standards. ASTM (American Society for Testing Materials) standards. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) standards. IMSA (International Municipal Signal Association)standards. Local Ordinances. All pertinent state and federal laws and regulations covering material, design, construction, and operation. 4. LUMINAIRES The luminaires shall be as shown in the plans and as modified in these Specifications. Luminaires shall be 250 watt high pressure sodium vapor with integral constant wattage ballast wired and installed for operation on 120 volt AC, single phase, 60 Hz. Luminaires shall provide ANSI/IES light distribution pattern Type II. Luminaire and lamp size required for a particular system shall be as shown in the plans. Lighting conductors installed for luminaires shall be 1/C No. 10 stranded type THWN, unless otherwise indicated on the plans The contractor shall verify that the luminaire photocell is operational prior to installation. Each luminaire shall be complete with EEI-NEMA Standard through terminal polarized, twist- lock type photoelectric control receptacle. Individual luminaires shall be provided with molded in-line fuse connector within the mast arm pole base. Molded fused connector shall provide waterproof connections with breakaway feature, and be sized to fit the conductors. Fuses shall be 10-ampere cartridge type. The neutral conductor shall not be fused. The photoelectric control turning "ON" and "OFF" roadway luminaires shall be in accordance with the following: The photoelectric controls shall be of a solid-state crystal sensing type with an inverted turn-on and turn-off design and shall meet the design and quality requirements specified in the current SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 10 RN-8155(671)--9D-07 acceptable standards to ANSI C136.10. The device shall have surge protection conforming to the requirements in the current acceptable surge protection ANSI standards. The voltage rating of the control device shall be multi-voltage operating properly over the input voltage range of one hundred five (105) to two hundred eight-five (285) volts, 50-60 Hertz, alternating current with no change in the turn-on and turn-off foot-candle values, and a maximum total drift of not more than one percent (1%) over ten (10) years. The control device shall be fully rated at 1800 VA, fifteen (15) amps for all HID lamps. The control device shall have a minimum thirty (30) second time delay to eliminate false operation due to lighting or stray passing lights, shall provide fail-safe operation (the light supply shall remain "ON" if the control circuit fails), and shall be equipped with an arrester for built-in transient surge protection. The "TURN ON" level of the control device shall be three (3.0) foot-candles at the appropriate voltage; the "TURN OFF" level of the control device sixty percent(60%) of the turn on value. 5. MATERIAL AND INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS The contract work shall comply with the applicable requirements of IDOT's Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction and current supplements in particular the following parts: Section 2402: Excavation for Structures Section 2403: Structural Concrete Section 2404: Reinforcements Section 2405: Foundations and Substructures Section 2408: Steel Structures Section 2423: Supplemental Standards for Highway Signs, Luminaires, and Traffic Signals Section 2525: Traffic Signalization Section 4187: Material for Support Structures Division 26: Roadside Development (2601.01 to 2612) MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS Materials shall be of new stock unless the plans provide for the relocation or the use of -- materials furnished by others. New materials shall be the products of approved suppliers and manufacturers, approved by the engineer. Miscellaneous electrical equipment and materials shall be UL approved. CONCRETE Concrete for foundations and handholes shall be class C-4 structural concrete meeting the requirements of section 2403 of "The Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction", IDOT, and current supplements. CONDUITS The number, type, and size of conduit shall be as specified on the plans. Poly Vinyl Chloride. Conduit specified on the plans, as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride meeting the requirements of NEMA TC-2, type 2, and applicable UL standards. SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 3 OF 10 RN-8155(671)--9D-07 REINFORCEMENT BARS All reinforcement bars for concrete foundations shall be of the type and size specified on the plans and meet the requirements of section 2404 of"The Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction", IDOT, and current supplements. CABLES AND WIRES -- The number of conductors and size of all traffic signal cable shall be as specified on the plans. All wire shall be plainly marked on the outside of the sheath with the manufacturer's name and identification of the type of the cable. Service Conductors. Power cable shall be a 600-volt, stranded, insulated, single conductor, #8 AWG (black and white) unless otherwise stated in the plans. Ground wire shall be #6 AWG green stranded copper wire. Luminaire Conductors. Conductors shall consist of type THWN/THHN, 600 volt, and single conductor copper stranded wires, which run continuously between poles. Conductors shall meet the requirements of section 4185.12 of the IDOT standards Specifications and shall be of the size and number shown on the plans. Detector Lead-In Cable. Detector lead-in cable shall be #14 AWG, meeting the requirements of IMSA Specification 50-2 or latest revision thereof. HANDHOLES The contractor may furnish a pour-in-place concrete handhole, with cast iron ring and cover, or a pre-cast concrete handhole, with cast iron ring and cover. Concrete pipe, meeting AASHTO Specification designation M86 for non-reinforced or M170 class III for reinforced, of suitable length and diameter, and provided with cable hooks made with a minimum 1/4" diameter steel material. Cast iron ring and cover may be rated light duty for non-traffic areas (155 pound minimum). The cover shall have the name "TRAFFIC" in two (2) inch letters cast into the lid. FOUNDATIONS The concrete bases shall conform to the dimensions shown on the plans. The bottom of all foundations shall rest securely on firm undisturbed ground. Forms shall be used for the above ground portion of all foundations. Whenever the excavation for a foundation is irregular in shape, forms shall be used to,provide the proper dimensions of the foundations below grade. The material for the forms shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent warping or other deflections from the specified pattern. The forms shall be leveled and a means shall be provided for holding them rigidly in place while the concrete is being deposited. Where the foundation cannot be constructed as shown on the plans because of an obstruction, the contractor shall relocate the foundation or use other effective methods of supporting the pole after securing the engineer's approval. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper elevation, offset and level of each foundation. Conduit, drains and ground rods shall be installed as shown on the plans. Conduit inlets shall be installed as shown on the plans. Two conduit inlets shall be installed as a minimum per foundation. Inlets not used shall be capped below grade. A ground rod shall be placed external to each foundation. All ground rods shall be a minimum of five-eighths (5/8) inch in diameter, eight (8) foot long, copper clad and shall be external to the concrete foundation, SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 4 OF 10 RN-8155(671}--9D-07 driven four(4) inches below ground surface. Anchor bolts, conduits and reinforcement shall be held rigidly in place before the concrete is poured. Anchor bolts shall be held in place by _ means of a template constructed to space the anchor bolts uniformly in accordance with the pattern shown on the plans, and not to protrude excessively after installation of equipment. The center of the template and the center of the concrete base shall coincide unless otherwise directed by the engineer. High-frequency vibrator shall consolidate concrete after it is placed in the form. The top of the base shall be finished level or flush with the sidewalk where _ indicated on plans and the top edges shall be rounded with an edger having a radius of one- half(1/2) inch. The exposed surface of the base shall have a rubbed surface finish. Should the contractor or his representative find that it is necessary to alter or reconfigure any portion of the installation or there would be a conflict with the design versus the site grade ditches, utilities, etc. The City or its representative shall be notified in writing of the portions that are in conflict. Immediate response shall be given by the City or its representative to avoid delays. After the foundation or base has been poured, absolutely no modification of any sort may be made. If the anchor bolts, conduit, or any part of the foundation or base in installed in an incorrect manner such as below grade, as determined by the engineer, the entire foundation or base shall be removed and a new foundation or base installed. The contractor shall bear all costs of replacing work deemed unsatisfactory by the engineer. Prior to setting poles, the anchor bolts shall be covered in such a manner as to protect them against damage and to protect the public from possible injury. The foundation must be given seven days to cure before the poles are erected. New bases shall be constructed and finished to the dimensions shown on the drawings. Concrete shall be as specified in paragraph 2403.03 of the IDOT Specifications for class C, mix no. C-4, air-entrained P.C. concrete, and shall be placed in accordance with section 2403 of said Specifications. Reinforcement shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification section 2404. The top of the signal base shall be at a minimum of two (2) inches and a maximum of three inches above the finished grade. HANDHOLES (CONCRETE) Handholes shall be constructed at the locations indicated on the plans. When the use of forms are required, they shall be set level and of sufficient thickness to prevent warping or other deflections from the specified pattern. A means shall be provided for holding the forms rigidly in place while the concrete is being placed. Frames and covers for handholes shall be cast iron and conform to the dimensions shown on the plans. The top of the handhole shall be set flush with the sidewalk or driveway surface. When constructed in an earth shoulder away from the pavement edge, the top surface of the handhole shall be approximately one (1) inch above the surface of the ground or as indicated on plans. The ends of the conduit leading into the handhole shall extend a minimum of one (1) inch and not more than two (2) inches beyond the inside wall. All conduits in the handhole shall slope in a manner so as to provide drainage of water or condensation. Each handhole shall contain a minimum of two cable hooks. The hooks shall be permanently fastened to the inside wall near the top of the handhole. -- SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 5 OF 10 RN-8155(671)--913-07 When precast concrete sections are used for handholes, the conduit entrances shall be neatly grouted between the conduit and the precast concrete. The handhole ring shall fit snugly inside the precast concrete section. Grouting shall be done immediately after conduits are placed into the handhole to prevent washing in of debris. After installation of handhole and before acceptance by the City, all foreign debris including but not limited to dirt, leaves, grout, concrete, cans and glass shall be removed. All loop detector lead-in conductors shall be placed into a handhole prior to winter shut down. CONDUIT All conduit ends shall be threaded and shall be capped with standard pipe caps until wiring is started. When caps are removed, the threaded ends shall be provided with approved conduit bushings. Conduit buried in open trenches shall be placed a minimum of eighteen inches (18) deep and -- shall extend a minimum of three (3)feet- six (6) inches from the back of curb unless otherwise directed by the engineer. Open trench methods of placing conduit will be permitted except where the conduit is to be placed under existing pavement. Conduit in pavement areas shall be placed to a minimum depth of twenty-four(24) inches below the finished pavement surface or as directed by the engineer. The backfill materials from the placement of conduit in open trenches shall be deposited in the trench in layers not to exceed six (6) inches in depth and each layer shall be thoroughly compacted before the next layer is placed. All cinders, broken concrete, or other hard abrasive materials shall be moved and shall not be used in the backfill material. All surplus material shall be removed from the public right-of-way and properly disposed Whenever excavation is made across parkways, driveways or sodded areas, the sod, topsoil, crushed stone or gravel shall be replaced or restored as nearly as possible to its original grade and the grade involved shall be left in a neat and presentable condition. Concrete sidewalks, pavements, base courses and bituminous surfaces shall be replaced with new materials. Underground conduits shall be laid at a distance of at least six (6) inches from any water line or other utility line. When the plans require the conduit be placed without disturbing the existing pavement the term "pushed" is used. Pushed conduit shall be placed by jacking, pushing, boring or any other means necessary to place the conduit without cutting or removing pavement. The size of a bored hole shall not exceed the outside diameter of the conduit, which is to be placed. Tunneling under the pavement or water jetting will not be permitted. Pits for boring shall not be closer than two (2) feet to the back of curb unless otherwise directed by the engineer. When it is impractical to push the conduit under pavement due to unanticipated obstructions, the contractor may, with the engineer's permission, cut the existing pavement. Where conduit is to be placed by trenching methods under existing asphaltic pavement, an eight (8) inch wide by eighteen (18) inch deep trench shall be opened along neat lines. The trench shall be backfilled with crushed stone, acceptable to the engineer, filled with class M high-early strength concrete to within four (4) inches of the surface level. The concrete shall be allowed to set for a minimum of forty-eight (48) hours without being exposed to traffic. The final four (4) inches of backfill shall be a hot bituminous concrete plant mix acceptable to the engineer. SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 6 OF 10 RN-8155(671)--9D-07 - A polyethylene pull rope shall be installed in all conduits, which is identified on the plans for _ future use. At least two (2) feet of pull rope shall be doubled back into the conduit at each termination. Conduit shall be laid to drain and one (1) inch drains with crushed stone sumps shall be -- installed as shown on the plans and at all low points. The backfill shall be mechanically compacted in six (6) inch layers to a density equal to that of the surrounding material. Conduit shall be connected to existing and new light bases and — junction boxes. All required fittings shall be furnished and installed by the contractor to provide a continuous, enclosed conduit system between poles. Conduit under pavement and driveways shall be rigid steel conduit or PVC schedule 80, type 2, in accordance with IDOT — Specification section 4185.10. All trenches shall be backfilled with material containing no broken pieces of concrete or asphalt, stone, brick, wood or other unsuitable material including nested clods.All conductors and wiring shall be furnished as new material and installed by the contractor and shall conform to IDOT Specification 2525. Conduit not under pavement or driveways shall be schedule 40 PVC. All unused conduits, whether for future use or for later use in the project shall be capped. All conduits shall be sloped to drain toward the nearest handhole, and if this should prove to be impractical, then a conduit drain shall be provided with crushed stone drainage sumps at all low points, as detailed in the drawings for traffic signal bases. A permeable membrane to keep sand from washing back into the conduit shall be installed at the conduit drain. ELECTRICAL All wiring, except loop and magnetic detector wire, shall be one continuous length of cable from the splice in the handhole compartment of the light pole to the terminal compartment in the controller cabinet. Splices for detectors will be permitted between the detector wire and the detector lead-in cable only at the first handhole provided adjacent to the detector and will be done by City personnel. All splices in the handhole compartment of a light pole shall be made using twist wire connectors. Slack for each cable shall be provided by a four (4) foot length in each handhole and a two (2) foot length in each light base (measured from the handhole compartment to the end of the — cable). In those handholes where detector splices are made, a four (4) foot length of cable slack shall be provided in both the loop wire and the shielded lead-in cable. Cables shall be pulled through conduit by means of a cable grip designed to provide a firm hold upon the exterior covering of the cable or cables, with a minimum of dragging on the ground or pavement. This shall be accomplished by means of reels mounted on jacks or rollers and other suitable devices. A suitable wire lubricant shall be used to reduce friction and strain on wires or cables. Service cable runs shall be continuous from the power line located on the service pole to the _ meter located on the controller cabinet or from the meter located on the service pole to the terminal compartment in the controller whichever is applicable. The service riser shall be topped by standard weather head or otherwise replaced with "U" Guard. SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 7 OF 10 Rai-8155(671)--9D-07 Clearances to the overhead utilities shall be specified by the serving utility. The power company will furnish the electrical meter. The contractor shall supply the service cabinet. All work shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2525 and the M.U.T.C.D. All wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code and City Ordinance, and shall be subject to the inspection of the City Traffic Operations Department. POLE ERECTION All poles are to be erected vertically with the mast arm at a right angle to the centerline of the street, unless otherwise specified, and securely bolted to the cast-in-place concrete foundations at the locations indicated on the plans. Leveling shall be accomplished by the use of nuts on each anchor bolt. One nut shall be placed on each anchor bolt and the pole placed in position on these nuts. The top nuts shall then be placed loosely and the pole adjusted to the vertical position by adjusting both the upper and lower nuts and final tightening of top nut to expose a maximum of three full threads. BONDING AND GROUNDING Metal conduit, service equipment, anchor bolts, metal poles, pedestals, controller cabinets, interconnect cable shields, and all other electrical equipment shall be made mechanically and electrically secure to from a continuous system, and shall be effectively grounded. The grounding conductor shall be a #6 AWG stranded green copper wire. Grounding bar shall be accomplished by bonding the grounding circuits to copper clad metal, driven electrodes. All electrodes shall be as a minimum, 5/8" in diameter and eight (8) foot long copper clad. The electrodes shall be driven vertically until the top of the rod is a minimum of four (4) inches below grade. Bonding to the ground rod shall be made by means of suitable screw type positive ground rod clamps. Grounding to waterlines will not be permitted. — Bonding of standards and pedestals shall be by means of a bonding strap attached to an anchor bolt or to 1-3/16", or longer, brass or bronze bolt installed in the pole base. The service meter and socket shall be bonded to a ground electrode by use of a ground clamp and a #6 AWG copper wire and shall be by means of cadmium plated grounding bushing and bonding jumpers. Where there is a change at a pull box or manhole for non-metallic conduit to metallic conduit, the grounding wire in the non-metallic conduit shall be bonded to the metallic conduit. Existing ungrounded metal poles shall be grounded by means of a driven ground rod. Loop Splicing. The electrical splice between the loop lead-in cable to the controller and the loop wire shall be soldered using dipped or resin core solder and provided with a watertight protective covering for the spliced wire, the shielding on the loop lead-ins and the end of the tubing containing the loop wires. No torch soldering will be allowed. Remove the insulation from each conductor of a pair of lead-in cable conductors for one (1) inch and scrape both copper conductors with knife until bright. Remove the plastic tubing from the loop wires for one and one-half (1-1/2) inches. Remove the insulation from the loop wires for one (1) inch and scrape both copper conductors with knife until bright. Solder the loop wires together where needed for series connection and to the lead-in wires and cover with a wire nut twisted on tightly. Cover the exposed shielding, drain wire and wire nut splices with. 3M ScotchKote Electrical Coating (part#054007-14853 or approved equivalent). Any unused loop lead-in wire shall have the end of it also covered with the Scotchkote product. -- SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 8 OF 10 RN-8155(671)--9D-07 LOOP DETECTORS/AMPLIFIERS All loop detector amplifiers shall be two (2) channel card rack mounted. The card rack will include an appropriate power supply. Acceptable amplifiers shall be 1DC, Sarasota, EDI, Reno or City approved equivalent. The two (2) channel card rack detectors shall have a separate output to be used for system detection from each channel. The detector card rack shall also accommodate video detection cards when necessary. Detectors shall have the capability of operating in "pulse" mode, _ on each channel, adjustable in one (1) second increments or less, "xtension"Iay timing timBonn each channel, adjustable in 0.5-second increments or less. Internal lightning protection. _ Loop isolation transformer to allow operation with a single point short between loop p and The detector card rack shall include a slot for a 4 circuit 754 Opticom phase selector. The preemption outputs from the controller shall be wired to the Yellow input of the 4 pedestrian load switch positions to power the preemption confirmation lights. Lightnino and Over voltage Protection. The contractor or his representative shall furnish and install lightning protection devices within each control cabinet to protect all equipment from over voltage and over current. Protection devices shall consist of a solid-state non-gas tube surge protector connected to each of the interconnect conductors. Poly Vinyl Chloride. Conduit specified on the plans, as polyvinyl chloride (PVC) shall be rigid polyvinyl chloride meeting the requirements of NEMA TC-2, type 2, and applicable UL — standards. All wire shall be plainly marked on the outside of the sheath with the manufacturer's name and identification of the type of the cable. SERVICE INSTALLATION (Lighting): The contractor shall supply and install a two-inch (2") RSC or PVC (which ever is applicable) to the source of power either to the transformer or up the power pole with a weather head connector as required by the power company supplied by the contractor. The size of the service conductors shall be 3c-#3 AWG stranded conductor. The contractor will be responsible for coordination this work with the power company. The address of the source of power shall be shown on the project plans. FOUNDATIONS The bottom of all foundations shall rest securely on firm undisturbed ground. Forms shall be used for the above ground portion of all foundations. Whenever the excavation for a foundation is irregular in shape, forms shall be used to provide the proper dimensions of the foundations below grade. The material for the forms shall be of sufficient thickness to prevent warping or other deflections from the specified pattern. The forms shall be leveled and a means shall be provided for holding them rigidly in place while the concrete is being deposited. The contractor shall be responsible for the proper elevation, offset and level of each foundation. Anchor bolts and reinforcement shall be held rigidly in place before the concrete is poured. Anchor bolts shall be held in place by means of a template constructed to space the anchor SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 9 OF 10 RN-8155 671 i--9D-07 bolts uniformly in accordance with the pattern shown on the plans, and not to protrude excessively after installation of equipment. The center of the template and the center of the concrete base shall coincide unless otherwise directed by the engineer. High-frequency vibrator shall consolidate concrete after it is placed in the form. The top of the base shall be rounded with an edger having a radius of one-half inch. The exposed surface of the base shall have a rubbed surface finish. Should the contractor find that it is necessary to alter or reconfigure any portion of the installation or there would be a conflict with the design versus the site grade ditches, utilities, etc., the City shall be notified in writing of the portions that are in conflict. Immediate response will be given by the City or its representative to avoid delays. After the foundation or base has been poured, no modification of any sort shall be made. If any part of the foundation or base is installed in an incorrect manner, as determined by the engineer, the entire foundation or base shall be removed and the contractor shall install a new foundation or base at no extra cost to the City. Prior to installing the structures, the anchor bolts shall be covered in such a manner as to protect them against damage and to protect the public from possible injury. The foundation must be given seven days to cure before the structures are erected. Concrete shall be as specified in paragraph 2403.03 of the IDOT Specifications for class C, mix no. C-4, air-entrained P.C. concrete, and shall be placed in accordance with section 2403 of said Specifications. Whenever excavation is made across parkways, driveways or sodded areas, the sod, topsoil, crushed stone or gravel shall be replaced or restored as nearly as possible to its original grade and the grade involved shall be left in a neat and presentable condition. Concrete sidewalks, pavements, base courses and bituminous surfaces shall be replaced with new materials. The backfill shall be mechanically compacted in six (6) inch layers to a density equal to that of the surrounding material. -- SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 10 OF 10 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station SECTION 02768 -DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Colored cement concrete pavement. 2. Stamped cement concrete pavement. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Color Admixture 2. Curing Compound 3. Sealer B. Design mixtures. C. Material certificates. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Producer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready- mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment. B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents. C. Mockups: Cast mockups of sections approximately 5' by 5' of decorative cement concrete pavement to demonstrate typical pattern, texture, surface fmish, color,joints, and standard of workmanship. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 FORMS A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type materials to provide full-depth,continuous, straight,and smooth exposed surfaces. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768 - 1 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. 2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. 2.4 COLOR MATERIALS A. Integral Color: C-27 Westwood Brown [(rate as specified by manufacturer) mixed with gray Portland cement, tan sand, and gravel], by SGS Concentrated Mortar Colors "Classic Series" from L.M. Scofield Company (www.scofield.com) "chromix" admixture, or Chem Masters Chemtint, or approved equal. The integral color admixture shall be added to the concrete mix at the batch plant as per manufacturer's recommendation. B. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black,nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. C. Pigmented-Powder Release Agent: Factory-packaged dry combination of surface-conditioning and dispersing agents interground with coloring pigments that facilitates release of stamp mats. Use coloring pigments that are finely ground, nonfading mineral oxides interground with cement. D. Liquid Release Agent: Manufacturer's standard clear, evaporating formulation that facilitates release of stamp mats and texture rollers. 2.5 IMPRINTING TOOLS A. Stamp Mats: Cobblestone tile pattern (No. 3610)—Lithotex Pavecrafters by Scofield Systems (www.scofield.com) or approved equal B. Stamp Mats: Semirigid polyurethane mats with projecting textured and ridged underside capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete. C. Stamp Tools: Open-grid, aluminum or rigid plastic stamp tool capable of imprinting joint patterns on plastic concrete. D. Rollers: Manually controlled, water-filled aluminum rollers with projecting ridges on drum capable of imprinting texture and joint patterns on plastic concrete. E. Texture Rollers: Manually controlled, abrasion-resistant polyurethane rollers capable of imprinting texture on plastic concrete. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768 -2 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station 2.6 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne,monomolecular film forming,manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, specifically manufactured for colored concrete. 1. For integrally colored concrete, curing compound shall be pigmented type approved by T, coloring admixture manufacturer. 2. For concrete indicated to be sealed, curing compound shall be compatible with sealer. C. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Manufacturer's standard waterborne,membrane-forming, medium-gloss, — acrylic copolymer emulsion solution, specifically manufactured for colored concrete,containing not less than 15 percent solids by volume,nonyellowing,and UV resistant. 2.7 RELA LED MATERIALS A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. 2.8 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. B. Color Pigment: Add color pigment to concrete mixture according to manufacturer's written instructions and to result in hardened concrete color consistent with approved mockup. PART 3 -EXECUTION A. See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. 3.2 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. 3.3 STAMPING A. Mat Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, accurately align and place stamp mats in sequence. Uniformly load mats and press into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Remove stamp mats immediately. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp mats. B. Tool Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and ends 3 inches, and secure to edge forms. — Lightly broom surface to remove air bubbles. Accurately align and place stamp tools in DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768 -3 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station sequence and tamp into concrete to produce required imprint pattern and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Remove stamp tools immediately. Hand stamp edges and surfaces unable to be imprinted by stamp tools. Unroll and remove polyethylene film immediately after tool stamping. 1. Antiquing Agent: Apply over liquid release agent according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Roller Stamping: While initially finished concrete is plastic, cover surface with polyethylene film, stretch taut to remove wrinkles, lap sides and ends 3 inches, and secure to edge forms. Lightly broom surface to remove air bubbles. Accurately align roller and repeat rolling operation to produce required imprint pattem and depth of imprint on concrete surface. Hand stamp surfaces inaccessible to roller. Unroll and remove polyethylene film immediately after arlear roller stamping. 1. Antiquing Agent: Apply over liquid release agent according to manufacturer's written -. instructions. 3.4 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection. C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing. D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface. E. Curing Compound: Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing. Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas that have been subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 1. Cure integrally colored concrete with a pigmented curing compound. 3.5 SEALER A. Clear Acrylic Sealer: Apply uniformly in two coats in continuous operations according to manufacturer's written instructions. Allow first coat to dry before applying second coat, at 90- degrees to the direction of the first coat using same application methods and rates. 1. Begin sealing dry surface no sooner than 14 days after concrete placement. DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768 -4 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station 3.6 PAVEMENT TOLERANCES } A. Comply with tolerances of ACI 117 and ACI 330.1. 3.7 REPAIRS AND PRO1'hCTION A. Remove and replace decorative cement concrete pavement that is broken, damaged, or does not comply with requirements in this Section in complete sections from joint to joint, unless otherwise approved by Architect. END OF SECTION 02768 -- DECORATIVE CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT 02768 -5 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station SECTION 02780 -UNIT PAVERS .; PART 1 - GENERAL r 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete pavers set in sand setting bed over PCC base. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For materials other than water and aggregates. B. Samples for unit pavers 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Build mockups for each form and pattern of unit paver. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. -- 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Protection: Do not use frozen materials or build on frozen subgrade or setting beds. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.1 CONCRETE PAVERS fr A. Concrete Pavers: Solid interlocking paving units complying with ASTM C 936 and resistant to freezing and thawing when tested according to ASTM C 67, made from normal-weight aggregates. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for concrete pavers is based on Unilock Holland Premier 4"x8" nominal size paver (www.unilock.com). Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the named product or approved equal. 2. Thickness: 7 cm 3. Color: per plan UNIT PAVERS 02780- 1 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, — River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station 2.2 PCC Base Slab A. See IDOT Standard Specification 2301 and plan notes for concrete. 2.3 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED MATERIALS A. Sand for joints and bedding: The bedding and joint sand shall be clean, non-plastic, and free from deleterious or foreign matter. It can be natural or manufactured from crushed rock. Do not use limestone screenings or stone dust that do not conform to the grading requirements in Table 1. When concrete pavers are subject to vehicular traffic,the sands shall be as hard as practically available. B. The bedding sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 33 as shown in Table — 1: TABLE 1 BEDDING SAND GRADING REQUIREMENTS ASTM C 33 Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) 100 No. 4 (4.75 mm) 95 to 100 No. 8 (2.36 mm) 85 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 50 to 85 No. 30 (600 pm) 25 to 60 No. 50 (300 pm) 10 to 30 No. 100 (150 pm) 2 to 10 C. The joint sand shall conform to the grading requirements of ASTM C 144 as shown in Table 2 below: TABLE 2 JOINT SAND GRADING REQUIREMENTS ASTM C 144 Natural Sand Manufactured Sand Sieve Size Percent Passing Percent Passing No. 4(4.75 mm) 100 100 — No. 8 (2.36 mm) 95 - 100 95 to 100 No. 16 (1.18 mm) 70- 100 70 to 100 No. 30 (600 pm) 40 - 75 40 to 75 No. 50 (300 pm) 10 - 35 20 to 40 _ UNIT PAVERS 02780-2 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station No. 100 (150 pm) 2 - 15 -x 10to25 No. 200 (75 pm) 0 0 to 10 2.4 DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE: A. Drainage Geotextile: Nonwoven needle-punched geotextile made from polyolefms or polyesters; with elongation greater than 50 percent; complying with AASHTO M 288 and the following: 1. Apparent Opening Size: No.40(0.425-mm)sieve,maximum;ASTM D 4751. 2. Permittivity: 0.5 per second,minimum;ASTM D 4491. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Mix pavers from several pallets or cubes, as they are placed,to produce uniform blend of colors and textures. B. Cut unit pavers with motor-driven masonry saw equipment to provide pattern indicated and to fit adjoining work neatly. Use full units without cutting where possible. 1. For concrete pavers, a block splitter may be used. C. Joint Pattern: see plan D. Tolerances: Do not exceed 1/16-inch unit-to-unit offset from flush (lippage)nor 1/8 inch in 24 inches and 1/4 inch in 10 feet from level,or indicated slope,for finished surface of paving. E. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide foam filler as backing for sealant-filled joints. Install joint filler before setting pavers. F. Expansion and Control Joints: Provide joint filler at locations and of widths indicated. Install joint filler before setting pavers. Make top of joint filler flush with top of pavers. 3.2 AGGREGATE SETTING-BED APPLICATIONS A. Place drainage geotextile over PCC base slab,overlapping ends and edges at least 12 inches. B. Place leveling course and screed to a thickness of 1-1/8, taking care that moisture content remains constant and density is loose and constant until pavers are set and compacted. C. Set pavers with a minimum joint width of 1/16 inch and a maximum of 1/8 inch, being careful not to disturb leveling base. If pavers have spacer bars, place pavers hand tight against spacer bars. UNIT PAVERS 02780-3 FY 2008 West Commercial St.Extension, River Road Relocation, and Storm Water Pump Station D. Vibrate pavers into leveling course with a low-amplitude plate vibrator capable of a 3500- to 5000-lbf compaction force at 80 to 90 Hz. E. Spread dry sand and fill joints immediately after vibrating pavers into leveling course. Vibrate —. pavers and add sand until joints are completely filled, then remove excess sand. Leave a slight surplus of sand on the surface for joint filling. END OF SECTION 02780 UNIT PAVERS 02780-4 CITY OF WATERLOO DRIVEWAY AND SIDEWALK SPECIFICATIONS DRIVEWAY AND SIDEWALK SPECIFICATIONS BE IT ORDAINED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF WATERLOO, IOWA: Sec. 1. That, from or after the passage of these specifications and the taking effect thereof, all driveways and sidewalks constructed adjacent to public streets, alleys, and highways of said City shall conform to these specifications and regulations, unless otherwise directed by the City Council of said City. Sec. 2. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVES. Whenever the term "Engineer" is used in this Specification, it shall mean the City Engineer or his authorized representative. _ Sec. 3. BONDS AND PERMITS. No person, firm or corporation, except the City Engineer, while acting in their official capacity, or a contractor in performing the necessary work within the City Limits, shall construct or cause to be constructed any sidewalk or driveway adjacent to any street, avenue, alley or highway within the City of Waterloo, Iowa, excepting such walks as are required to connect residences or other buildings with the City sidewalks, curbs or street roadways, without filing a right-of-waybond with the City _ Clerk and obtaining a permit therefore, signed by the City Engineer. The permit shall describe the location of th'e work and state the time in which it is to be done. The said permit shall be valid for a time period not to exceed six (6) months from the date the permit is authorized. AU permits shall expire at the end of the current year's permitted construction season. If work, as stated on the aforementioned permit, is not completed within the above referenced six (6) month time period or the close of the current year's permitted construction season, the permit shall be considered expired and said work will require a new permit to be obtained. If an extension of time is required, the permit holder shall present said permit to the City Engineer for said extension of completion, and no extension of time shall be valid _ unless signed by the City Engineer. Work contracted by the City shall not require a permit. Sec. 4. SUBGRADE. The subgrade upon which the sidewalk and/or driveway is to be placed shall be prepared by excavating or filling with suitable material to a minimum depth of four (4) inches below the finished subgrade elevation of the sidewalk and/or driveway. Said subgrade shall be tamped with an approved hand tamper or vibratory plate or rolled with an approved steel roller until smooth, firm, uniform, and unyielding (as approved by the — Engineer) to the required depth below the finished grade line. All soft, 02/19/2003 - 1 - � r spongy or yielding spots and all vegetable or other perishable matter shall be removed and the space refilled with suitable material. NO SAND will be allowed for fill; unless it is similar to the existing subgrade material found at the work site. The subgrade shall be thoroughly moistened, as approved by the Engineer, prior to the placement of PCC. If the contractor is required to add water to the said subgrade to provide uniform moisture content, the method of incorporating said water into the subgrade shall not form mud or pools of water. Sec. 5. FILLS AND CUTS. When filling is necessary to bring the walk and/or drive -`° to grade, the fill shall be deposited and compacted in layers of not more than six (6) inches. The top of all such fills shall extend beyond the walk and/or drive on each side of not less than one (1) foot vertical to four (4) feet horizontal. The distance from edge of cuts at the base shall be at least one (1) foot from the nearest edge of the walk and/or drive. Material shall be compacted to a minimum of ninety-five percent (95%) of its Standard Proctor Density or subbase density specification of the contract plans. Sec. 6. FORMS. Forms of wood or steel shall be used along each edge of sidewalk and/or driveway. These forms shall be set true to line and grade and shall be held rigidly in place by stakes placed outside the forms and flush with or below the top edge of the forms. Said stakes shall be spaced no more than four (4) feet apart for wood forms and five (5) feet apart for steel forms. All steel forms shall have a height equal to the full specified depth of sidewalk and/or driveway. Standard dimensional lumber for wood forms shall be acceptable, i.e., 2" x 4", 2" x 6", etc., and shall be free from warp as approved by the Engineer. All forms shall be clean and free from mortar and/or dirt. When the sidewalk and/or driveway is curved, a one (1) inch nominal thickness wood form or flexible steel form shall be permitted. These forms shall be staked no more than two (2) feet apart or as approved by the Engineer. Sec. 7. SAWING OF CONCRETE. Where sawing is required to remove existing concrete sidewalk, it shall be sawed full depth to prevent any damage to adjacent squares of sidewalk. Sawing for curb cuts shall be full depth with the SAW CUTS COMING TO A POINT WITH NO OVERLAPPING OR OVERCUTTING ALLOWED. The Contractor may elect to utilize a "corner saw" or 6" diameter full depth core drill at the boxout corners to prevent said "overcutting". If the Engineer determines that the overcutting may 02/19/2003 - 2 - damage the surrounding slab, the sawcut shall be extended to the next transverse joint. Additional hand work may be required in ;corners of the removed box-outs as approved by the Engineer.) When the curb section is sawed for a curb cut and the pavement transverse or longitudinal joint is within four (4) feet, sawing shall continue to the — pavement joint and the pavement removed. New curb shall be constructed as needed for proper curb cut dimension. Sec. 8. SETTING FORMS. The forms shall be well staked as detailed in Sec. 6 to the lines and grades given by the Engineer, and their edges shall conform to the finished grade of the walk. Forms shall be so set that the walk shall have a slope toward the street of one quarter (1/4) inch for each foot of width. The forms for a new gutter section at driveways shall be set so that a two (2) inch lip shall be constructed. The gutter flow line shall continue through the driveways so the water is directed away from the curb lip toward the center of the street Sec. 9. EXPANSION JOINTS. Strips of an approved type of non-extruding pre molded asphaltic expansion joint material one-half (1/2) inch thick shall be placed perpendicular to the side forms, and to the full depth of the walk at least once in every sixty (60) feet of walk or as directed by the Engineer, or shown on the plans. Similar joints shall be provided when new walks abut _ other concrete walks, structures, approach walks, or curbs. :h For lots having a frontage width of over sixty (60) feet, the expansion shall — be placed on a joint approximately half way from the driveway to the farthest property line. One-half (1/2) inch expansion shall be used between the driveway approach and sidewalk; one-half (1/2) inch expansion shall be used between the approach and back of curb as detailed on Exhibit "A" contained herein. Sec. 10. READY-MIXED CONCRETE: Ready-mixed concrete shall be used for all sidewalks on City right of way. The term, "Ready-Mixed" concrete, shall be _.. construed to mean either central plant-mixed concrete or central-plant- proportioned, truck-mixed concrete. Central plant-mixed concrete shall be mixed according to the provisions below, and shaii be transported to the -- site of the work in truck mixers. Truck-mixed concrete shall be construed to mean concrete partly or wholly mixed in the transporting vehicle. 02/19/2003 - 3 - • A. Transporting Concrete. Vehicles for transporting concrete shall be so constructed as to ensure against foss of any of the ingredients of the concrete and to ensure rapid discharge of the concrete. The concrete, at the time of delivery, shall be uniform in composition and of the specified consistency. Concrete in which the cement has been in contact with the water and aggregate for more than 1-1/2 hours before the time it. is placed shall not be used. Under no circumstances shall partially hardened or retempered concrete be used. B. Delivery. The methods of delivering and handling the concrete shall be such as will facilitate placing with a minimum of rehandling and without damage to the concrete. C. Truck-Mixed Concrete. When a stationary mixer is used for partial mixing of the concrete, the mixing time in the stationary mixer shall be not less than is required to intermingle the ingredients but not less than 30 seconds. When a truck mixer is used either for complete mixing or to finish partial mixing done in a satisfactory mixer, each batch shall be mixed not less than 50 or more than 100 revolutions of the drum at the rate. of rotation designated by the mixer manufacturer as mixing speed. Additional mixing, if any, shall 'be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as the agitating speed. When a truck mixer is used for transporting concrete which has been completely mixed in a stationary mixer, mixing during transportation shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the equipment as the agitating speed. D. Mixes. The acceptable mixes for driveways and sidewalks shall be A- 4, C-4 or M-4. The usage of Class C fly ash additive will be -4 acceptable from March 16 to October 15. The fly ash substitution rate by weight shall not be more than 15 percent. NO USE OF GROUND GRANULATED BLAST FURNACE SLAG (GGBFS) SHALL BE PERMITTED. Class II aggregate shall be utilized. Entrained Air Content for all driveways and sidewalks shall be in accordance with IDOT Specifications Section 2301.04; target 7%, minimum 6%, maximum 8%. Field adjustments may be required to result in 6% finished 02/19/2003 - 4 - entrained air. The slump of the concrete shall not exceed four (4) inches. 2- Sec. 11. PLACING CONCRETE. Ready-mixed concrete shall be placed immediately after delivery. Concrete shall be placed in a manner which will avoid segregation or separation of the ingredients. The concrete shall be spread evenly and tamped or vibrated, and it shall be well spaded against the forms, expansion joints or other abutting structures. Retempering of concrete by remixing with or without additional materials, shall not be —' permitted. Sec. 12. CURING OF CONCRETE. Unless the concrete is protected for cold weather, all exposed surfaces, including surfaces from which the forms have been removed, shall be cured with a white pigmented curing compound meeting requirements of Iowa DOT Specification Section 4105. NO CLEAR CURING COMPOUNDS SHALL BE PERMITTED. Curing compound shall be applied in a fine spray to form a continuous, uniform film on the surface and vertical edges of the sidewalk and/or driveway slab as soon as the free water has appreciably disappeared. The rate of application shall be not less then 0.067 gallon .per square yard (covering 15 square yards per gallon). Care shall be taken to ensure that liquid curing materials shall be well agitated in the supply drum or tank immediately before transfer to the distributor, and kept thoroughly agitated during application. Application shall be by means of power spraying equipment capable of producing a fine spray which will not damage the surface of the concrete. Hand operated sprayers will be allowed, provided that the compound remains a uniform color, and with uniform coverage. If forms are used, within 30 minutes after their removal, the vertical edges of the sidewalk and/or driveway shall be coated with curing material, _ applied at the same rate as on the surface. If the coating is damaged within 72 hours after being applied, due to other operations, the affected areas shall be recoated without delay. Coating of the sawed surface with curing compound will not be permitted on joints that are to be sealed. -- All curb cuts that require removal and replacement of existing PCC curb and gutter and/or pavement sections after August 31 shall be protected by -" application of a curing compound/linseed oil combination product to extend 02/19/2003 - 5 - _ the curing of the concrete and to protect the entire finished concrete surface of the pavement and curbs from the de-icing agents utilized during cold weather. The above referenced combination curing product shall conform to W.R. Meadows LIN-SEALTM WHITE Curing and Anti-Spalling Compound or Engineer approved equivalent. Said product shall be applied as specified above with application rate not less than 0.067 gallon per square yard (covering 15 square yards per'gallon). Cold Weather Cure. Concrete less than 36 hours old shall be protected in the following manner: Night Temperature Forecast Type of Protection 35 to 32 degrees F One layer of burlap 31 to 22 degrees F Two layers of burlap or one layer of plastic on one layer of burlap Below 21 degrees F 6 inches of hay or straw* *Equivalent commercial insulating material approved by the Engineer may be used. For concrete placed after October 1 and which requires this protection, the protection shall remain until the concrete is five (5) days old. Some rough equivalents that may be used in lieu of straw are as follows: 1. Four (4) layers of burlap sandwiched between two (2) layers of plastic. 2. Three (3) layers of Burlene. 3. One (1) layer of fast track blankets. These or other equivalents may be used as long as the materials provide for a minimum of 0.75 R value and the surface of the protected concrete is maintained above 40 degrees F. When cold weather protection has to be used to protect concrete, the -- impervious coating can be applied after the cold weather protection has been removed. The coating needs to be applied within four (4) hours after the removal of cold weather protection. After been removed, the sides shall ba fil with topsoil the forms have be �� � vdi.u, be uacki it{ed wNJGii immediately. Sec. 13. WEATHER. Concrete shall not be placed when stormy or inclement weather prevents good workmanship. No lumps or frozen aggregate shall be used, 02/19/2003 - 6 - and concrete shall not be placed on a frozen subgrade. If weather conditions are favorable concreting operations may be started when the temperature is at least 34 degrees F. and rising. At time of placement, the temperature of the mixed concrete as discharged from the mixer shall be 55 degrees F. or above, and may proceed as long as the temperature of the fresh concrete can be maintained at or above 55 degrees F. Mixing and -- placing of concrete shall stop when the air temperature is 38 degrees F. and falling. Cold weather curing methods shall be used for protection of the slab from freezing temperatures. -- Sec. 14. CONSTRUCTION JOINTS. At the close of each day's work, and at any other time when the process of depositing concrete is stopped for thirty minutes or more, a construction joint shall be placed. Sections less than four (4) feet between joints shall not be permitted. If the sidewalk is wider than four _ (4) feet, the sections shall be the same distance between joints as the width. For this joint a wood header board shall be used having a two (2) inch — nominal thickness and conform to the cross section of the walk. This header board shall be set accurately and held in place perpendicular to the surface and at right angles to the centerline. Sec. 15. THICKNESS. The concrete walks constructed under this Specification shall have a minimum thickness of four (4) inches. Driveway approaches and driveway sidewalk sections shall be five-(5) inches thick for residential, defined as a single family house or duplex unit, and six (6) inches thick for three-plex unit or larger, commercial property and alleys. In any case, the walk shall be constructed in one course. Sec. 16. WIDTH. The width of sidewalks constructed under this Specification shall be four (4) feet, except where a different width of sidewalk has already been —' constructed within the same block, in which case it shall conform to the width of the existing sidewalk, or unless otherwise permitted or ordered by the City Engineer. Sec. 17. FINISH AND SLAB MARKINGS. After working the concrete to an approximate true surface, the concrete shall be cut with a tool to the required sawing thickness to form the concrete into four-foot squares or as directed by the Engineer. This cutting shall be followed by a marking tool -- forming a groove at least one-half (1/2) inch. The surface shall be finished true to grade, with a steel trowel, and afterward roughened slightly with a broom. Sawing will be permitted, provided the sawing depth is as follows: 02/19/2003 - 7 - _ SIDEWALK THICKNESS SAW CUT DEPTH 4 INCHES 1-1/2" 5 INCHES 1-3/4" 6 INCHES 2" All approaches over fifteen (15) feet in width shall have one longitudinal saw cut, as a minimum, centered in the approach, or as directed by the Engineer. Approaches over fifteen (15) feet in depth from back of curb shall have one transverse joint, as a minimum, centered from back of curb to sidewalk. Sawing of the concrete shall be completed within 24 hours after the finish work has been completed. Sec. 18. CARE AND PROTECTION. Workmen shall not be permitted to walk on freshly laid concrete, and where any sand or dirt sets on the surface, it shall be carefully removed before finishing. When completed, the sidewalk shall be protected from traffic for at least three (3) days. Alleys, driveways and street crossing shall be protected from vehicular traffic for at least seven (7) days. The forms shall not be removed before twenty-four (24) hours, and when removed, earth shall be banked and compacted against the edge of the driveway or sidewalk. -- Sec. 19. ASPHALT DRIVEWAY APPROACH. If asphalt is used for a driveway approach, the following criteria shall apply: 1. Residential Drive-6-1/2" thick 2. Commercial Drive 7-1/2" thick 3. Asphalt materials shall meet the requirements of IDOT Type A Mix-3/4" or 1/2" mix for base, 1/2" or 3/8" mix for surface. The top 2" shall not be constructed with base mix. The asphalt shall be placed in layers with the base material and the surface material being compacted to a minimum of ninety-six percent (96%) of its Standard Marshall Density or street density specification on contract plans. All asphalt driveway work shall not be placed after October 15, except with approval by the City Engineer. Asphalt shall not be used for overlay of any sidewalk. Asphalt shall only -be used for sidewalk construction in accordance with Sec. 28 of these specifications. Sec. 20. ADJUSTMENTS. Whenever any adjustment of the grade slope or slab markings is necessary or advisable in order to have the work conform to 02/19/2003 - 8 - • • existing abutting walk or other abutting structures, the adjustment shall be made only with the permission, and under the direction of the Engineer. Sec. 21. SIDEWALKS OVER AREAWAYS. Whenever sidewalks are constructed over areaways, the requirements of these specifications are applicable only to the extent that they do not conflict with the requirements of the Building Code of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, and the construction is to be under the supervision of the Building Official. Sec. 22. INDIVIDUAL CONTRACTS. Any contract made between property owners and private contractors for the construction of sidewalks or driveways within the City Limits shall be made in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. Sec. 23. TESTING AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have the right to go upon any work site where sidewalks, driveways or alleys are being constructed and make tests to do such other acts as may be necessary to determine — compliance with the current specifications. Sec. 24. BARRICADING AND TRAFFIC CONTROL. Barricades and traffic control --- items shall be provided in order to take every reasonable precaution for providing for the safety of the general public traveling. to, through, within, along and across the construction area. Barricades and traffic control items shall conform to the FHWA Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (latest revision) and more particularly detailed in Part IV of the MUTCD "Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street: and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility, and Incident Management Operations" (Revision 3, September 3, 1993 and Revision 4A, issued February 19, — 1998). The Contractor shall take every reasonable precaution to prevent the public from entering the work area and to prevent the work from interfering with traffic. — The Contractor or individual completing repairs shall barricade both ends of each area where curb cut or sidewalk is removed. Type I or Type II — barricades shall be used. Barricades shall be clean with good reflective properties. Where alley approaches are removed, Type 11 or Type III barricades, with steady burn or flashing amber lights, shall be used on both the alley and street side of the approach. The barricades described above for pedestrian traffic shall also be required. Alley approach walks shall be replaced the day it is removed. 02/19/2003 - 9 - • • The +Engineer., or authorized, ;'representative, :-shall periodically .review b-arricading:and traffic(centre! that;hasbeen-but in ,placeby':the •Contractor. • If .barricading :and traffic 'control :devvices•:are :found ibe 'Without .proper Imairitenan.ce, penalties Shall be .assessed. Improper maintenance shall include,bat:not be itirriited to,the fei:lowing situations: A. Less than M0 percent of;lights in w.orking:order. B. Any ibarricade for!Sign;move d'or;tipped 'C. 'F.encing nie supported an:a•vertical positi:an. D. ;Fenndngrret placed around.excavati:orrs When workers/:equipment-are!net.working;at:the location. E. !Leek,of proper.ba•rricades'or'signage. The American Traffic .:Safety '.Service :Association :(ATTSA) :publication 'Q.uality Standards!for',Work:Zone-TT:etc`Control !Devices" (Copyright 1993 -' ATSSA) -shall :be ;utilized 'by the ':Engin.eer, ,or :authorized ;representative, to determine the:acce.ptable qualityi'evel for ypic•àl':work zone barricading and traffic:.control.devices. :Each :incident is treated,:as :a separate ;citation .on.an;individual :basis. It is - net :intended that :minor :deficiencies be ;penalized :if 'corrected the day. notification is given. In :addition to the ffellowing :schedule Of fines, the -.Engineer cmay :suspend :work for ;irresponsible :arrd/or :repeated 'failure 'to �- construct The.pr-ojeet:using barti cad ing:and traffic ccontrdl procedures. Penalties: :1stDffense `.Written warninggiven by City -2nd..Offense `$ 200 .3rd Offense '$ -250 •4th':Offe-nse •.:$ :50.0 5thOffense $10.00 6th-Offense Engineer'.s:discretion (amount ..ormore equal'or:greater than'$1;000 Sec. 25. :PERMITS :ON.JOB. :All .per:rriitsshall be 'kept.-atthe pl:ace'of construction.for which they were _issued while ;the 'work is 'being done and exhibited when called for bythe'City Official!havingthe'authority:to-examine the same. — Sec. 26. PATCHING. The sidewalk:maybe;patched after:inspection and approval by the City'Engineer. 'Surf depr ion 't4 t hteen the ..:,.,,i:,?.,�.e �u�,F,�.e$Sivi iS"r'viu i aiii alGa of elgl IIGGI I (18) square :inches'or less may:qualify for:repair by patching. 'Holes to the'full 'depth of -the sidewalk and•sections of the sidewalk completely missing not exceeding •eighteen (18) square inches may.also be-repaired'by,patching. No sidewalk panel shall have a patched area, including surface and full-depth patches, 02/19/2003 - 10 - • • exceeding fifty (50) percent of the panel's total area nor a total full-depth — patch area greater than one-half (1/2) square foot. Preapproved patching materials include the following materials and �. vendors: 1. Home Depot: A. QUIKRETE Vinyl Concrete Patcher (grey) -- The QUIKRETE Companies, Atlanta, Georgia 2. Marquart Block Co.: A. BONSAL Vinyl Concrete Patcher (grey) W.R. Bonsai Company, Charlotte, North Carolina 3. Menard Cashway Lumber: _ A. AKONA Vinyl Cement Patch AKONA Corp., Maple Plain, Minnesota -- 4. Waterloo Lumber Co. A. WEL-COTE Concrete Patch with Latex Bond WELCO Manufacturing Company, North Kansas City, Missouri USAGE OF THE ABOVE REFERENCED MATERIALS SHALL BE IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE MANUFACTURERS RECOMMENDATIONS. Sec. 27. DETAILED DRAWINGS. Standard Details as shown on attached Exhibits "A" entitled "Standard Detail for Sidewalks", "B" entitled "Standard Curb Cuts -- and Drive Approaches," and "C" entitled °Standard Detail for Commerical Radius Drive Detail" are hereby made a part of these specifications. Sec. 28. ASPHALT SIDEWALKS AT RAILROAD CROSSINGS. At railroad crossings, asphalt may be used for sidewalk. The asphalt sidewalk shall be a _ minimum 4-inch thickness and shall extend no greater than 10 feet from the edge of railroad ties. Asphalt shall not be allowed to overlay existing concrete sidewalk. Sidewalks over railroad crossings shall be constructed to meet current ADA requirements concerning width and slope. Attached Exhibit "D" entitled "Standard Detail for Asphalt Sidewalks at Railroad Crossings" is hereby made part of these specifications. --- 02/19/2003 - 11 - • Sec- 29. WATER SHUT-OFF VALVES. During the placement of concrete where water -- valves (pay boxes) are present, concrete shall be separated from the water valve in accordance with a method approved by the Engineer. An acceptable method consists of the following: Placement of ASTM 3034 plastic PVC pipe around the water valve cap before concrete is placed. This pipe should be cut to the appropriate depth of sidewalk. After placement and finishing of the concrete, the pipe section shall be removed and the area under the cap filled with suitable fill material. A maximum space of one-quarter inch (1/4") between the finished sidewalk and water valve cap will be acceptable. Sec. 30. SLIP FORM SIDEWALK. Construction of sidewalk by slip form construction methods shall only be allowed at locations that will permit a minimum of one hundred fifty (150) feet of continuous pouring length of sidewalk and as approved by the Engineer. The slip form paving machine shall be approved by the Engineer and designed for the specific purpose of placing, consolidating, and finishing concrete sidewalk slabs without use of fixed side forms. Edges of the concrete slab as built by the machine shall- be approximately vertical. The machine shall be self-propelled and shall be equipped with means for spreading the concrete to a uniform depth before it enters the throat of the machine. The machine shall vibrate the concrete to the full width and depth being placed in a single passage. Such vibration shall be accomplished by vibrating tubes or arms working in the concrete of the vibrating pan operating on the surface of the concrete. The amplitude, rate of vibration, and locking device for depth shall be as specified in Iowa DOT Specifications, Article 2301.07, Paragraph A(6)(a). The slip form paving shall produce a surface reasonably free of surface voids and tears. The slip form paving shall be equipped with automatic horizontal and vertical grade controls. The subgrade shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 4 and 5 of these specifications. SEC. 31. CURB SAWING ^n^. DRIVEWAY -s:-nr.ra a r_:eo-.. This CURB SA ING FOR DRIVE Al APPROACHES. This work consists of horizontally and vertically saw cutting existing PCC concrete curb to accommodate the construction of new driveway approaches in lieu of conventional PCC box-out curb cut removal and replacement methods. This method of existing PCC curb removal shall be utilized only at locations 02/19/2003 - 12 - specifically approved by the Engineer. Contractors proposing to utilize this — method of driveway approach construction shall submit a written request to the Engineer for review a minimum of three (3) working days prior to the date anticipated for making the permit application. This method of construction shall only be considered for approval in areas where the existing FCC concrete roadway and/or PCC curb and gutter has been constructed or reconstructed within ten (10) years of the date of the permit application, as determined by the Engineer. The PCC curb sawing system shall employ a precision track-mounted circular diamond blade fully automatic wall saw system as approved by the - Engineer prior to the start of any work. The saw mounted track shall be securely anchored to the existing PCC roadway as recommended by the manufacturer of said track equipment. The track shall be mounted to _ provide for curb sawing, matching the existing street profile along neat lines and including the bevel cut (3" rise in 9" length) at each end of the driveway approach curb cut. No uncontrolled hand sawing of the two end bevel cuts shall be allowed; i.e. the wall saw track shall control the aforementioned dimensional bevel cut. The curb sawing shall be full depth at the base of the curb section face and shall be at a maximum elevation of 1/2" above the existing gutter and sawn at an angle that will provide an elevation of 2" above the existing gutter at the back of curb. The corners of resulting edge lips of the sawn curb shall be ground using a diamond grinding wheel to a radius of 1/4" and as approved by the Engineer. Upon completion of the curb sawing operations, all track -mounting anchoring bolds, sleeves, lead plugs, etc. shall be immediately removed from the PCC slab. The resulting holes shall be air blasted clean and filled _ immediately with TK-9000, 100% EXPDXY CRACK FILLER as manufactured by TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation, Minnetonka, Minnesota, or equal approved by the Engineer. -.. The exposed saw cut curb face shall be coated to a nominal thickness of 3/8" with SEAL TIGHT-MEADOW PATCH-T2 polymer-modified, thin repair patch mortar as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, Inc., Hampshire, Illinois, or equal approved by the Engineer. Said material shall be placed, mixed and sealed in accordance with manufacturers specifications. The mortar shall not fill any existing pavement joints and shall be surface scored to maintain the joint integrity. The specified mortar repair coating shall be applied to the exposed sawn curb face within the same working day of the curb removal operations. 02/19/2003 - 13 - If the above described curb sawing construction method causes any damage to existing curb and/or street, as determined by the Engineer, a standard 2' minimum curb cut box-out shall be installed. Curb sawing for driveway approaches by use of the precision track-mounted diamond blade wall saw system shall be performed by workers experienced in operating the required equipment and installation of the above referenced patching and coating products. Contractors proposing to utilize this method of driveway approach construction shall provide documentation and references of previous projects of similar scope as an attachment to the aforementioned written — request letter. SEC. 32. PRECAST DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES A. General. Detectable warnings shall consist of a surface of truncated domes aligned in a square grid pattern and shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications for installation and material. 1. Dome Size. Truncated domes in a detectable warning surface shall. have a base diameter of 0.9 inches minimum to -1.4 inches maximum, a top diameter of 50% of the base diameter minimum to 65% of the base diameter maximum, and a height of 0.2 inches. 2. Dome Spacing. Truncated domes in a detectable warning surface -- shall have a center-to-center spacing of 1.6 inches minimum and 2.4 inches maximum, and a base-to-base spacing of 0.65 inches minimum, measured between the most adjacent domes on square grid. 3. Contrast. Detectable warning surfaces shall contrast visually with adjacent walking surfaces. Approved color shall be #20 RED 10% as supplied by Dynamic Color Solutions or approved equal. 4. Size. Detectable warning surfaces shall extend 24 inches minimum in the direction of travel and the full width of the curb -- ramp, landing, or blended transition. Approved size shall be 24" x 24" x 4" or 24" x 24" x 2" with 4" thick P.C.C. mortar bed per Exhibit A included herein. 5. Lifting Provisions. Units are to be made with cast in place inserts or galvanized lift loops to facilitate installation. 03/06/2003 - 14- 6. Cure. The area between the precast sections and the back of curb shall be cured per Section 12 Curing of Concrete. Contractors shall use care so that no cure is applied to the precast sections. B. Location. 1. Curb Ramps and Blended Transitions. The detectable warning surface shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6 inches minimum and 8 inches maximum from the curb line. 2. Rail Crossings. The detectable warning surface shall be located so that the edge nearest the rail shall be eight (8) feet. — C. Approved Vendors (or equal) 1. Lister Concrete Products, Inc. 2116 Commercial Street Waterloo, Iowa 50702(319)232-4727 2. Hanover Architectural Products 240 Bender Road Hanover, Pennsylvania 17331 (717)637-0500 3. Steps Plus, Inc. -- 6375 Thompson Road Syracuse, New York 13206 (315)432-0885 SEC. 33. STAMPED DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES A. General. Detectable warnings shall consist of a surface of truncated domes aligned in a square grid pattern and shall comply with the — manufacturer's specifications for installation and material. 1. Dome Size. Truncated domes in a detectable warning surface — shall have a base diameter of 0.9 inches minimum to 1.4 inches maximum, a top diameter of 50% of the base diameter minimum to 65% of the base diameter maximum, and a height of 0.2 inches. 02/19/2003 - 15 - 2. Dome Spacing, Truncated domes in a detectable warning surface shall have a center-to-center spacing of 1.6 inches minimum and 2.4 inches maximum, and a base-to-base spacing of 0.65 inches minimum, measured between the most adjacent domes on square grid. 3. Dome Count. At least 85% of domes in the stamped area shall meet required dimensions. 4. Contrast. Detectable warning surfaces shall contrast visually with adjacent walking surfaces. Approved color shall be #20 RED 10% as supplied by Dynamic Color Solutions or approved equal. 5. Cure. A clear cure approved by the engineer shall be used on the colored concrete areas. 6. Approved suppliers for the truncated stamp for curb ramps shall be as follows (or approved equal). A. Cobblecrete International ADA Texturing Tool _ B. lncrete Systems ADA Detectible Warning System 400 7. All areas designated for "stamping" shall be poured "full depth" with colored concrete as shown on Exhibit A. B. Location. 1. Curb Ramps and Blended Transitions. The detectable warning surface shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6 inches minimum and 8 inches maximum from the curb line. 2. Rail Crossings. The detectable warning surface shall be located so that the edge nearest the rail shall be eight (8) feet. 03/06/2003 16 - Fs 28 -E-I' eIN Et O CN sN y 2 s m _ v °y O I O o cry C. M 0 3 O \ �.F 3 c 3 E. .. 2.5, z_. Q (n w ... �mh _J o w o -i v c o w �a ] Q g,� `M c E ..o as ov o ~ 0 � `o^ �g - Ev a gc Q • �� a v� J o� - v'� • u_• u .°..”5 • Cl; 152, 0 Q Q N a °0 ▪ �� E o - o N 9: Q 1- 1 3 w9 Em u ' = 0 o f _m ,� c z i'n�j E# U v -z c Ev v Ec o 2s. C.) �nn � _/ Z • N 90- C.. d0 3p .,ry - %aG n ] E nUt — I / 0 X y J rn c °is 4 o E 3 Q P r m€ .. g.i3 m 9 m y E v P N c o• W 0 a Z �g ca .. Ec .E - w« _Eto n c yv x 3A o c °u C�Ca 1p o o ' e d" EZ ` `f.v —� m qv 15 c —Uo g N 2,n6� c� dnN e a - E n nab C m (L i j° B� V - vQo m - T. ov oY Q^ gL `N o NpE, G m v mrn I0 0 -E.CN - - E2 z.o: E s ^! oEc 33 6 n v .au.:u ='ail u = -2 2 v ...�. W -ta w2 -apt E ;-. 5 •cuo z orn- :tE `oE E` n mDc uN .m E E rw a murn Ec tEz' �E o E €uu° oddm E E N - ,:, — 'L`�- � R 'z a°u u n«� 5 isw u u `;°c :,,,,-.E s°. E "ar.'E u cz o �a rn QO'u CJ dO lid•o a« Q� LL. 6a6 aU nV e e 0 e © — .I N U @.a a " �} Z m Ln C7 40 � a r9 - 7Ti _ c C 2 s a ¢ � '° a E _:4_,*_� - I— w_ z ! \ i ;9it\\ 1 lk _ c�x .I s' x a N a cV W F ®v N 1 W -so _, filk W r� Jt„, .., i. I ° c) , A v.-, ,...i.a e n h ® N ° 9_14-, 3 `v �. a I.1WI u4j 'i O a I i i IlLiy�'S[I '� w g M a E. _ � y J' W tZ' 'lliiirliEil v WUa °a^,rcr miV m F/ . 44 7iz ® a z ` a • i w ,, yy W El �m m v d` W �1 — • Z 03 `I.Ss.:..rlp... . F-Z 1 gi e1 RIiiI ,� w a 1 -0 1!!!P \ Q cc v W > 6N - U Q ��; ..a a a w ® N (n 1- Itk w W If 1,7_o. .1 L Le il w 1.1 ' E o r U_ Q_ 1^T !eie c Ho a. W- 4 v9 U IE& v'o ... iGo w to 0 Do O Q zaN 0 CO bj tt m Oath J ik 8: z Q U Q of •a - aF: NJ W z5EN 8W kLJ! WQz • LL.1 Naoc !goo o�iU o m = �a zac= w^'a �a O <Q 1— WKQ? tOS'LN j- Z Q �••W §6o 1 o I 3 Xotr I- Vz I— I—Z X ¢xcoiA me,u. h 3- W U U) Q L1J EL Il > a , cm La,i Du.v < 1IL..LLLU17 JJJ t V I ' C O mF • b QJN 3CW Wm ?O NZZ �. Zd N rFO} . l 3z SW z Qw Wz FE r] m P U d �c.'ci (n mU • ��o �� wa a o cFi of Q �N= . X oo ado EL m�W " m <k'2 V K W ?Z N O' NP 6 m 0 6 2 C g C 2 zo ? =FCClm. ~ �$d a o m�o �o.+w< xi o�aU >4a U �' r8; Qan %aTa i 08 woxw IN C3i O a w m m Gi o yz m ma .�ia Z �� & 3! EUo 3 < m =.ao gEN • cc 0 3 W U coa 0T Eiao gpp < �oaw • a0a ;i= N E 0 3 m':i 4 z .�.img ;z aoa ado 0ra riE¢ 46-Fn vi coi 'ciwoN wg az o z • V m W a N dp N U o' % E ci ii E U O% te N n J ®< FF F 3 w U Zh 40 ` N zo o .� x o .W W : ! ! oN�111111 0 jNW 7H )'n 3WII PJ C F FUF ' m a 5 Z U : NaN n`-' U mJdz W YJ ZwZ • — . • . . . . r y • o I • MA ? g / j z �z / / > _ /& / J U ƒ e f ' / _ b 4 . ca 2& c a0J mo / - - ' _ \6 . / L [ § •\ fCQƒ C _[ § /az 2 ( o §}• b ƒ E 9 )$_ix/ ( z0 / _ ( Nu 7\ CO 26L /„ _ ( 0. / 0/ / ` 1 §/E 0 ) . (k I- / • - - <0 o < - / §) § \ LU 0_ \� Cr oa/ . . | /\r §k /1 \) / §\W I §§) » ( §» k��k 4 . mL J z con | 2 3± \ zkG§ ;/ . )* e ƒ(0) & - / . I i, * 41111111k 77s .,,,, . I � I .IH 1. \ . . f . \\o o • _J a ® 7 2 I ® \ . ®' 0 . . f © » li. ¥ 1 _ct / ow Po_ e ow 0 o m/ \ . k) = I m' 0 a[2 �[ �e § ? W/ I > M( \(\ � / §\ \ ���( 2» 3 . 0 -� ®¥§ ` ¥ f- . < a . oou § Mo< - - § /[ �� ® eo= »�§ §® )(\§ .CD I 0 \ z)/ I\� \z- ( 2\ue _ / (\� (§2 �� �� `�/�• - <�0 J P)-( /)) /� co \ / o ( /(& \k\ cn \ s 0<m WM § \5z »M \ }�\§ ® cc/JO ' # 0- Y crZ M` & J k<§ <E m��\ N,,, ^ _ �« )/e •.§ e�zo . . -o( j§/) j() ¥(« \) �(\§§ . _ I . . . _ I - (../1 . CD. z —fY PI • • 0 — 0 W cn v) NI 0 y v) 0 _J—1 0- L.L1 ij j I...L1 ...„(I— 0 0 0 .---- — < 0 L LI_ g,• < 0_ I r — I-- V)I--• X Ld,' .... . JF., ...• ta 2 • ..• L& ..,.,.. e g ..JAB b .- . . 1 ,-.4• I RIF, g ra gi g 4 I b ESE (777CA \\\\,4 2' ag t., Ln CC m:8 I a 5 _ a r, i g r'• 0 . < i t ... = ,.._... \ ... cc ..,.. 1-- 1.••••' D M 2 C.NN-NN, = • 'SI ,..4 t 1 b —— 14k. .—., g g . k:' . -.9. • .::::.• ::....• g c:.:.:.:'; • g § . . . . . . DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 01200 Project Meetings Section 01500 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls SECTION 01200 PROJECT MEETINGS — PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. General Meeting Information B. Preconstruction Meeting C. Progress Meeting D. Pre-installation Meeting 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS IN OTHER PARTS OF PROJECT MANUAL A. Instruction to Bidders: Pre Bid Conferences 1.03 GENERAL INFORMATION A. Contractor or A/E shall schedule and administer preconstruction meetings,periodic progress meetings, and specially called meetings throughout the progress of the Work. 1. Prepare agenda for meetings. 2. Distribute written notice of each meeting two days in advance of meeting date. 3. Make physical arrangements for meetings. 4. Preside at meetings. 5. Record the minutes; include all significant proceedings and decisions. 6. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after each meeting. a. To all participants in the meeting. b. To all parties affected by decisions made at the meeting. c. Furnish three copies of minutes to A/E. 7. Any discrepancies noted in the meeting minutes shall be directed to the person responsible for the distribution within the two weeks after receipt. If no comments are received,the minutes will stand as true and correct. B. Representatives of contractors, subcontractors and suppliers attending the meetings shall be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of the entity each represents. C. A/E may attend meetings to ascertain the Work is expedited consistent with Contract Documents and the construction schedules. 1.04 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING A. A/E will arrange and schedule within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed. �— 01200-1 B. Location: A central site, convenient for all parties, designated by A/E. C. Attendance: 1. Owner's representative 2. A/E and his professional consultants 3. Resident Project representative 4. Contractor's superintendent 5. Major subcontractors 6. Major suppliers 7. Agencies'representatives 8. Utilities' representatives 9. Others as appropriate D. Suggested Agendum 1. Distribution and discussion of: a. List of major subcontractors and supplies b. Projected construction schedules 2. Critical work sequencing. 3. Major equipment deliveries and priorities. 4. Project coordination: a. Designation of responsible personnel 5. Procedures and processing of: a. Field decisions b. Proposal requests c. Submittals d. Change orders e. Applications for payment 6. Adequacy of distribution of Contract Documents. 7. Procedures for maintaining Record Documents. 8. Use of premise: a. Office,work and storage areas b. Owner's requirements 01200-2 9. Construction facilities, controls and construction aids. 10. Temporary utilities. 11. Environmental, safety and first-aid procedures. 12. Security procedures. 13. Housekeeping procedures. 1.05 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Contractor or A/E will arrange and schedule regular weekly meetings as required. B. Hold called meetings as required by progress of the work. C. Location of the meetings: The project field office of the Contractor. D. Attendance: 1. A/E or his professional consultants as needed. 2. Subcontractors as appropriate to the agenda. 3. Suppliers as appropriate to the agenda. 4. Others. E. Suggested Agenda: 1. Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. 2. Review of work progress since previous meeting. 3. Field observations,problems, conflicts. 4. Problem which impede Construction Schedule. 5. Review of off-site fabrication, delivery schedules. 6. Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. 7. Revisions to Construction Schedule. 8. Plan progress, schedule, during succeeding work period. 9. Coordination of schedules. 10. Review submittal schedules; expedite as required. 11. Maintenance of quality standards. 01200-3 12. Review proposed changes for: a. Effect on Construction Schedule and on completion date.b. Effect on other contracts of the Project. 1.06 PRE-INSTALLATION CONFERENCE A. Contractor shall arrange and schedule well in advance of installation of major unit of work. 1. Requiring Coordination with other work. 2. Interface with other work. — 3. Refer to specific product section. B. Location: At project site. C. Attendance 1. Owner's representative 2. A/E and his professional consultant 3. Resident Project representative 4. Contractor's superintendent 5. Installer 6. Representative of Manufacturer or fabricator D. Suggested Agenda 1. Inspect work site and equipment to be installed 2. Options and related change orders 3. Shop drawings,product data and samples 4. Verify measurements and dimensions 5. Space and access limitation 6. Structural limitation 7. Attachment and connection 8. Possible conflicts and compatibility problems 9. Time schedules 10. Governing regulation 01200-4 11. Inspection and test procedures 12. Warranty and Guarantee E. Installation 1. Proceed only after unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 2. Under proper work conditions. 3. Specified testing. 4. Final protection. END OF SECTION 01200 01200-5 SECTION 01500 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities — B. Temporary Controls and Heat C. Construction Facilities D. Project Management 1.02 UTILITIES A. Water for construction purposes is not available at the site. Contractors shall make arrangements — for necessary water. 1.03 FENCES AND BARRICADES — A. Contractor shall provide all fences and barricades and other safety appliances as are required to protect the work,the workmen and the public from injury. All shall comply to the local — requirements. 1.04 DEWATERING _ A. For the entire duration of the Contract,the Contractor,at his expense, shall keep all parts of the project site, including excavations, free from any accumulations of water, no matter what the source or cause of such water,by adequate trenching and pumping as required. See construction plans for additional requirements. 1.05 SHORING AND BRACING A. The existing buildings, structures, streets,walkways,utilities, and other improvements and excavation shall be protected from loss of ground or cavity embankments. See Section 02150 for additional requirements. 1.06 TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL A. The Contractor shall schedule and conduct his operations so as to minimize erosion of soils and to prevent silting and muddying of streams and sewers. Construction of drainage facilities, subbase, _. paving,turf establishment items, and other contract work which will contribute to the control of erosion and sedimentation shall be carried out concurrently with earthwork operations or as soon thereafter as practicable. B. Where erosion is likely to be a problem, and where potentials for water pollution exist,the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the A/E for acceptance,his proposed schedules for accomplishment of the affected work,including any temporary measures proposed. No work shall be started in the affected areas until the applicable erosion control schedules and proposed methods of operation have been accepted by the A/E. C. Remove all preventive measures at completion of the project. 01500-1 -- 1.07 TEMPORARY ENCLOSURES AND HEAT A. The General Contractor shall provide temporary enclosures and closures in order to retain heat so that specified temperatures can be maintained and the work can proceed. He shall provide temporary closures over wall and floor openings, etc.,to enclose the work. Temperature inside the enclosures and/or enclosed part or parts of the structure shall be: Not less than 60°F for 48 hours prior to and during the time when and where concrete work, cement finish or masonry work are being done or cured. Not less than 50°F where any other trades, such as electricians, plumbers, etc.,are working. B. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials,to dissipate humidity and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes,vapors or gases. C. Each Contractor shall pay for any additional temporary heating facilities necessary to meet the above requirements, and the fuel, and the attendance required,until a structure is enclosed. 1.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls,projections,jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors and other surfaces from traffic,dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects,by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.09 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work(and existing facilities), and Owner's operations from unauthorized entry,vandalism,or theft. 1.10 SIGNS A. No signs,billboards or other advertisements shall be erected on the premises by the General Contractor or the subcontractors without A/E's permission. Each General Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary temporary signs required for the prosecution of the work such as"Office","Men","Danger","High Voltage", etc. 1.11 CONTRACTOR'S FIELD OFFICE A. Each Contractor shall maintain a suitable field office at the site of the work during the construction and installation of work under his contract. Said office shall be the headquarters of a representative authorized to receive drawings, instructions or other communications or articles from the Owner or the A/E. At least one copy of the contract documents, specifications, 01500-2 drawings and approved shop drawings shall be kept at the said office available for use at any time. The Contractor shall, at his own expense,provide at least one telephone at the site of his field office. All such field offices, storage sheds and the like shall remain the property of the —' Contractor and shall be removed after completion of the work and the site restored to its original condition. 1.12 FIRST-AID FACILITIES A. Emergency first-aid facilities shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with all Federal, ._ State and Local laws, statutes,ordinances, codes and regulations. 1.13 PROJECT MANAGEMENT A. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the work of his employee's and all subcontractors and others involved to maintain the accepted progress schedule. His duties shall also include the planning of the work,the scheduling of ordering and delivery of materials, and checking and control of all work under this contract. Construction schedules shall be submitted to the A/E for review and acceptance prior to the start of any work. Schedules shall be verified or updated as necessary on a monthly basis. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for completed supervision and control of his subcontractors as though they were his own forces. Notices to the Contractor shall be considered notice to all — affected subcontractors. C. The Contractor shall appoint a qualified representative to act as the Project Coordinator, or Superintendent,who shall be responsible for coordinating all work and providing liaison with the A/E and the Owner. The Project Coordinator or Superintendent shall, in addition,plan the work, schedule the ordering and delivery of materials, and check and control the various phases of the manufacture and delivery of all work under this contract. The Project Coordinator or Superintendent shall,in all matters,represent the Contractor at the sites of the work in the absence of a corporate officer or principal of the firm. D. The Project Coordinator or Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the A/E,unless the Project Coordinator or Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. — E. Important directions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request of the Contractor. 1.14 CLEANING A. The Contractor shall clean the work area each day, shall remove all trash and waste materials,and — shall maintain the site in a neat and orderly condition throughout the construction period. END OF SECTION 01500 01500-3 -- DIVISION 4 MASONRY Section 04200 Unit Masonry SECTION 04200 — UNIT MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS — Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. — 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Concrete unit masonry. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section. — 1. Division 2 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for exposed sheet metal flashing installed in masonry. — 2. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include the following: a. Wood nailers and blocking built into unit masonry and specified in Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry". b. Hollow metal frames in unit masonry openings are specified in Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames". 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide unit masonry that develops the following installed compressive strengths (I'm): 1. For concrete masonry: As follows: a. 2800 psi — 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General 1. Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 — Specification Sections. a. Product data for each different masonry unit, accessory, and other manufactured product indicated. 04200-1 — b. Samples for verification purposes of the following: (1) Full-size units for each different exposed masonry unit required showing full range of exposed color,texture and dimensions to be expected in completed construction. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Unit Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6"Specifications for Masonry Structures", except as otherwise indicated. — 1. Revise ACI 530.1/ASCE 6 to exclude Sections 1.4 and 1.7; Parts 2.1.2, 3.1.2,and 4.1.2; and Articles 1.5.1.2, 1.5.1.3,2.1.1.1,2.1.1.2,and 2.3.3.9 and to modify Article 2.1.1.4 by deleting requirement for installing vent pipes and conduits build into masonry. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from — one manufacturer for each different product required for each continuous surface or visually related surfaces. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of uniform quality from one manufacturer for each Cementitious component and from one source and producer for each aggregate. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle masonry units off the ground,under cover, and in a dry location to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,temperature changes, contaminants,corrosion, and other causes. If units become wet, do not place until units are in an air-dried condition. C. Store Cementitious materials off the ground,under cover, and in dry location. D. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. E. Store masonry accessories,including metal items,to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS — A. Protection of Masonry: During erection,cover tops of walls,projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where one wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, -- secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. 04200-2 C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout,mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left — exposed or painted. Remove immediately any grout,mortar and soil that comes in contact with such masonry. 1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and mortar splatter by means of coverings spread on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes from mortar droppings. D. Cold Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard for cold weather — construction and the following: 1. Do not lay masonry units that are wet or frozen. 2. Remove masonry damaged by freezing conditions. E. Hot Weather Construction: Comply with referenced unit masonry standard. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements specified in this Section — applicable to each material indicated. 2.02 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS — A. General: Comply with requirements indicated below applicable to each form of concrete masonry unit required. 1. Provide special shapes where indicated and as follows: a. For lintels, corners,jambs, sash, control joints,headers,bonding, and other special conditions. b. Bullnose units for interior outside corners. — B. Size: Provide concrete masonry units complying with requirements indicated below for size that are manufactured to specified face dimensions within tolerances specified in the applicable — referenced ASTM specification for concrete masonry units. 1. Concrete Masonry Units: Manufactured to specified dimensions of 3/8 inch less than nominal widths by nominal heights by nominal lengths indicated on drawings. 2. Provide Type I,moisture-controlled units with dry-block. 04200-3 — C. Exposed Faces: Manufacturer's standard color and texture,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where special finishes are indicated,provide units with exposed faces of the following general description matching color and texture of Architect's sample: a. Type I-No score, split face with dry block. Color#85 Burgundy. b. Type II- Single score, smooth face with dry block. Color Natural White. c. Type III-No score, smooth face with dry block. Color#85 Burgundy. D. Hollow Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C90, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 2800 psi 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. E. Solid Load-Bearing Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C145, Grade N and as follows: 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net area compressive strength indicated below: a. 2800 psi 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 2.03 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150,Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold weather construction. Provide natural color cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Masonry Cement: ASTM C91. 1. For pigmented mortars,use premixed,colored masonry cements of formulation required to produce color indicated, or if not indicated, as selected from manufacturer's standard formulations.Pigments shall not exceed 5 percent of masonry cement by weight for mineral oxides nor 1 percent for carbon black. C. Dry Block Mortar Admix: All mortar to include manufacturer's recommended amount of dry block mortar additive. D. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 1. Mortar to match color of block-#85 Burgundy and Natural White. E. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207,Type S F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C144, except for joints less than 1/4 inch use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 04200-4 G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C404. — H. Water: Clean and potable. 2.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. General: Provide reinforcing steel complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry — standard and this article. B. Steel Reinforcing Bars: Material and grade as follows: — 1. Billet steel complying with ASTM A615. 2. Grade 60 C. Deformed Reinforcing Wire: ASTM A496. D. Plain Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185. E. Deformed Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A497. — 2.05 JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide joint reinforcement complying with requirements of referenced unit masonry standard and this article, formed from the following: 1. Galvanized carbon steel wire,coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. B. Description: Welded-wire units prefabricated with deformed continuous side rods and plain cross rods into straight lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units,and complying with requirements indicated below: 1. Wire Diameter for Side Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). 2. Wire Diameter for Cross Rods: 0.1483 inch(9 gage). 3. For single-wythe masonry provide type as follows with single pair of side rods: a. Truss design with continuous diagonal cross roads spaced not more than 16"o.c. C. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturer's offering — products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. AA Wire Products Co. 2. Dur-O-Wal,Inc. 3. Masonry Reinforcing Corp. of America 4. National Wire Products Industries 5. Southern Construction Products,Inc. 04200-5 -- 2.06 TIES AND ANCHORS A. General: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent articles that comply with requirements for metal and size of referenced unit masonry standard and of this article. B. Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire: ASTM A82, coating class as required by referenced unit masonry standard for application indicated. 1. Wire Diameter: 0.1875 inch 2.07 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Vinyl Sheet Flashing: Flexible sheet flashings especially formulated from virgin polyvinyl chloride with plasticizers and other modifiers to remain flexible and waterproof in concealed masonry applications,black in color and of thickness indicated below: 1. Thickness: 30 mils. 2. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry. — B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Vinyl Sheet Flashing a. "Lexsuco Water Barrier", International Permalite, Inc. b. "Nervastral",Nervastral,Inc. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Non-metallic Expansion Joint Strips: Pre-molded filler strips complying with ASTM D1056, Type 2 (closed cell), Class A(cellular rubber and rubber-like materials with specific resistance to petroleum base oils), Grade 1 (compression-deflection range of 2-5 psi), compressible up to 35 percent,of width and thickness indicated, formulated from the following material: 1. Polyvinyl chloride B. Preformed Control Joint Gaskets: Material as indicated below, designed to fit standard sash — block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. 1. Polyvinyl Chloride: ASTM D2287, General Purpose Grade,Type PVC-65406. C. Bond Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep Holes: Provide the following: 1. Wicking Material: Material as indicated below, in length required to produce 2 inches exposure on exterior and 18 inches in cavity between wythes: a. Cotton sash cord. 04200-6 2.08 INSULATION A. Loose Granular Vermiculite Insulation: ASTM C516,Type II(surface-treated for water repellency and limited moisture absorption), Grade 3 (Fine), complying with 29 CFR 1926 by — containing less than 0.10 percent by weight of asbestos and that demonstration shows will not release asbestos fibers in excess of 0.1 fibers per cubic centimeter under reasonably foreseeable jobsite conditions. — B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturer which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to, the following: —. 1. Zonolite Masonry Insulation-Grace Construction Products 2.09 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength,general-purpose cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence,and other new construction stains from new masonry surfaces of type indicated below without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces; expressly approved for intended use by manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned: 1. For masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains,use formulation consisting of a concentrated blend of surface-acting acids, chelating, and wetting agents. 2. For dark colored masonry not subject to metallic oxidation stains,use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of surface-acting acids and special inhibitors. 3. For masonry subject to metallic oxidation stains,use formulation consisting of a liquid blend of organic and inorganic acids and special inhibitors. 4. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. "Sure Klean No. 600 Detergent",ProSoCo,Inc. b. "Sure Klean No. 101 Lime Solvent",ProSoCo,Inc. c. "Sure Klean Vana Trol",ProSoCo,Inc. — 2.10 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not add admixtures unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. -- 2. All mortar to include manufacturer's recommended amount of dry block mortar additive. 3. Mortar to have colored pigments to match concrete block-#85 Burgundy and Natural White. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C270,Proportion Specification, for job mixed mortar and ASTM C1142 for ready mixed mortar, of types indicated below: 04200-7 1. For masonry below grade and in contact with earth, and where indicated,use type indicated below: a. Type M 2. For reinforced masonry and where indicated,use type indicated below: a. Type S C. Pigmented Mortar: Select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color desired. 1. Mortar to match color of block-#85 Burgundy and Natural White. D. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C476 and referenced unit masonry standard. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions affecting performance of unit masonry. B. Examine rough-in and built-in construction to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with referenced unit masonry standard and other requirements indicated applicable to each type of installation included in Project. 1. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to the full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to the actual thickness of the masonry units, using units of nominal thickness indicated. a. Build classes and recesses as shown or required to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Provide not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings and between adjacent chases and recesses. b. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completion of masonry. After installation of equipment, complete masonry to match construction immediately adjacent to the opening. c. Cut masonry units with motor-driven saws to provide clean, sharp,un-chipped edges. Cut units as required to provide continuous pattern and to fit adjoining construction. Use full-size units without cutting where possible. 04200-8 3.03 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES Comply with construction tolerances of referenced unit masonry standard. A. Variation from Plumb: For vertical lines and surfaces of colufnns,walls and arises, do not exceed 1/4"in 10' or 3/8"in a story height not to exceed 20',not 1/2"in 40' or more. For external corners, expansion joints, control joints,and other conspicuous lines,do not exceed 1/4"in any — story or 20' maximum,not 1/2"in 40' or more. For vertical alignment of head joints do not exceed plus or minus 1/4"in 10', 1/2"maximum. B. Variation from Level: For bed joints and lines of exposed lintels, sills,parapets,horizontal grooves and other conspicuous lines,do not exceed 1/4"in any bay or 20' maximum,nor 1/2"in 40' or more. For top surface of bearing walls do not exceed 1/8"between adjacent floor elements in 10' or 1/16"within width of a single unit. C. Variation of Linear Building Line: For position in plan and related portion of columns,walls and partitions, do not exceed 1/2"in any bay or 20' maximum,nor 3/4"in 40' or more. D. Variation in Cross-Sectional Dimensions: For columns and thickness of walls, from dimensions shown, do not exceed minus 1/4"or plus 1/2". — E. Variation in Mortar Joint Thickness: Do not exceed bed joint thickness limited to 1/2". Do not exceed head joint thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8". 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings,movement-type joints,returns,and offsets. Avoid the use of less-than-half-size units at corners,jambs, and where possible at other locations. — 1. Lay up walls to comply with specified construction tolerances,with corners accurately spaced and coordinated with other construction. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Lay exposed masonry in the following bond patterns; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. 1. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 2 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. — C. Stopping and Resuming Work: In each course,rake back 1/2-unit length for one-half running bond or 1/3-unit length for one-third running bond; do not tooth. Clean exposed surfaces of set -- masonry,wet clay masonry units lightly(if required), and remove loose masonry units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry. D. Built-In Work: As construction progresses,build-in items specified under this and other Sections of the Specifications. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. 1. Fill space between hollow metal frames and masonry solidly with mortar,unless otherwise indicated. a. At exterior frames,insert extruded polystyrene board insulation around perimeter of frame in thickness indicated but not less than 3/4 inch to act as a thermal break between frame and masonry. 04200-9 "' 2. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units,place a layer of metal lath in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. 3. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 3 courses(24 inches)under lintels and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With full mortar coverage on horizontal and vertical face shells. 2. Bed webs in mortar in starting course on footings and in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters,and where adjacent to cells or cavities to be filled with grout. 3. For starting course on footings where cells are not grouted, spread out full mortar bed including areas under cells. B. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to be concealed or to be covered by other materials,unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 HORIZONTAL JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcement as indicated. Install longitudinal side rods in mortar for their entire length with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcing a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Cut or interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide continuity at corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated"L"and"T" sections. Cut and bend reinforcement units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at returns,offsets,column fireproofmg,pipe enclosures and other special conditions. 3.07 MOVEMENT(CONTROL AND EXPANSION)JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joints in unit masonry where indicated. Build in related items as the masonry progresses. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints unless provisions are made to prevent in-plane restraint of wall or partition movement. 1. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows: a. Fit bond breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of block units on one side of control joint. Fill the resultant core with grout and rake joints in exposed faces. 2. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: a. Build in joint fillers where indicated. b. Form open joint of width indicated but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealers"., Maintain joint free and clear of mortar. 04200-10 3.08 LINTELS —' A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and wherever openings of more than 1'-0"for brick size units and 2'-0"for block size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. Provide precise or formed-in-place masonry lintels. Cure Precast lintels before handling and — installation. Temporarily support formed-in-place lintels. 1. For hollow concrete masonry unit walls,use specially formed bond beam units with — reinforcement bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. 3.09 FLASHING/WEEP HOLES A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to the downward flow of water in the wall, and where indicated. 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so that they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive/sealant/tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer before covering with mortar. — 2. Install weep holes in the head joints in exterior wythes of the first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashings and as follows: a. Form weep holes with product specified in Part 2 of this Section. b. Space weep holes 24 inches o.c. 3.10 REPAIRING,POINTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose,chipped,broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or if units do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units and in fresh mortar or grout,pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point-up all joints including corners, openings, and adjacent — construction to provide a neat,uniform appearance,prepared for application of sealants. C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Protect adjacent non-masonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent,polyethylene film, or waterproof masking tape. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water prior to application of cleaners;remove cleaners promptly by rinsing thoroughly with clear water. 04200-11 4. Clean brick by means of bucket and brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA "Technical Note No.20 Revised"using the following masonry cleaner: a. Proprietary acidic cleaner; apply in compliance with directions of acidic cleaner manufacturer. 5. Clean concrete masonry by means of cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 45 applicable to type of stain present on exposed surfaces. D. Protection: Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure unit masonry is without damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 04200 04200-12 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS Section 06100 Rough Carpentry Section 06192 Prefabricated Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses SECTION 06100 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Wood grounds,nailers and blocking. — 2. Sheathing. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section"Prefabricated Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses". 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Single-Source Responsibility for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood products from one source from a single manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Delivery and Storage: Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect against exposure to weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stack lumber as well as plywood and other panels; provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under temporary coverings including polyethylene and similar materials. 1. For lumber and plywood pressure treated with waterborne chemicals,place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMBER,GENERAL A. Lumber Standards: Furnish lumber manufactured to comply with PS 20"American Softwood Lumber Standard"and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC)Board of Review. B. Grade Stamps: Provide lumber with each piece factory-marked with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species,moisture content at time of surfacing, and mill. C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. Provide actual sizes as required by PS 20,for moisture content specified for each use. 06100-1 D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,unless otherwise indicated. — E. Provide seasoned lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness,unless otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. For light framing(2 to 4 inches thick,2 to 4 inches wide)provide the following grade and species: 1. "Standard"grade. 2. Any species of specified grade. — B. For structural light framing(2 to 4 inches thick,2 to 4 inches wide),provide the following grade and species: 1. "No. 3"grade. 2. Any species of specified grade. — C. For structural framing(2 to 4 inches thick, 5 inches and wider),provide the following grade and species: — 1. Any species and grade that complies with the following requirements for species group as defined in Table 8.1 a of N.F.P.A.National Design Specification, for extreme fiber stress in bending"Fb"for single and repetitive members, and for modulus of elasticity"E": a. Group II species,"Fb"of 1200 psi for single member use and of 1400 psi for repetitive member use, and"E"of 1,600,000 psi. 2.03' MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction including rooftop equipment curbs and support bases, cant strips,bucks,nailers,blocking, furring, grounds, stripping and similar members. — B. Fabricate miscellaneous lumber from dimension lumber of sizes indicated and into shapes shown. C. Moisture content: 19 percent maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment. D. Grade: "Standard"grade light-framing-size lumber of any species or board-size lumber as required. "No. 3 Common"or"Standard"grade boards per WCLIB or WWPA rules or"No. 2 Boards"per SPIB rules. _ 2.04 CONSTRUCTION PANELS, GENERAL A. Construction Panel Standards: Comply with PS 1 "U.S.Product Standard for Construction and — Industrial Plywood"for plywood construction panels and, for products not manufactured under PS 1 provisions,with APA PRP-108. B. Trademark: Furnish construction panels that are each factory-marked with APA trademark evidencing compliance with grade requirements. 06100-2 — 2.05 CONCEALED PERFORMANCE-RATED CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. General: Where construction panels are indicated for the following concealed types of applications,provide APA Performance-Rated Panels complying with requirements designated under each application for grade designation, span rating, exposure durability classification, edge detail(where applicable),and thickness: B. Roof Sheathing: APA RATED SHEATHING. 1. Exposure Durability Classification: EXTERIOR. 2. Span Rating: As required to suit rafter spacing indicated. 2.06 CONSTRUCTION PANELS FOR BACKING A. Plywood Backing panels: For mounting electrical or telephone equipment,provide fire-retardant- treated plywood panels with grade designation,APA C-D PLUGGED EXPOSURE 1, in — thickness indicated, or,if not otherwise indicated,not less than 15/32 inch. 2.07 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Wire,Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B 18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B 18.2.1. — F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.08 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size,metal and finish indicated that comply with requirements specified, including the following: 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which model code evaluation/research reports exist that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this Project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. 06100-3 B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to — fabrication to comply with ASTM A525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A446, Grade A(structural quality); ASTM A526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. — 1. Use galvanized steel framing anchors for rough carpentry exposed to weather,in ground contact,or in area of high relative humidity,and where indicated. — 2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Sill Sealer Gaskets: Glass fiber resilient insulation fabricated in strip form for use as a sill sealer; 1 inch nominal thickness compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated; in rolls of 50 feet or 100 feet in length. B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG-01 that is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel — manufacturer. C. Water Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and-accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2- propynyl butyl carbonate(IPBC) as its active ingredient. 2.10 PRESERVATIVE WOOD TREATMENT BY PRESSURE PROCESS A. General: Where lumber or plywood is indicated as preservative-treated wood or is specified herein to be treated, comply with applicable requirements of AWPA Standards C2(Lumber) and C9 (Plywood). Mark each treated item with the AWPB or SPIB Quality Mark Requirements. — B. Pressure-treat above-ground items with water-borne preservatives to minimum retention of 0.25 pcf. For interior uses, after treatment,kiln-dry lumber and plywood to a maximum moisture — content,respectively, of 19 percent and 15 percent. Treat indicated items and the following: 1. Wood cants,nailers,curbs,equipment support bases,blocking, stripping and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers and waterproofing. 2. Wood sills, sleepers,blocking, furring, stripping and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. — 3. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. 4. Wood floor plates installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. C. Complete fabrication of treated items prior to treatment,where possible. If cut after treatment, coat cut surfaces to comply with AWPA M4. Inspect each piece of lumber or plywood after drying and discard damaged or defective pieces. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION,GENERAL — A. Discard units of material with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry construction and that are too small to use in fabricating rough carpentry with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement. 06100-4 — B. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines,with members plumb and true to line and cut and fitted. C. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. Correlate location of furring,nailers,blocking,grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated. E. Countersink nail heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. F. Use common wire nails,unless otherwise indicated. Use finishing nails for finish work. Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting of wood;pre-drill as required. 3.02 WOOD GROUNDS,NAILERS,BLOCKING AND SLEEPERS A. Install wood grounds,nailers,blocking and sleepers where shown and where required for screeding or attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached. Coordinate location with other work involved. B. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible,anchor to formwork before concrete placement. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in Form No.E30,"APA Design/Construction Guide-Residential& Commercial", for types of construction panels and applications indicated. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Sheathing: Nail or staple to framing. 2. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail to supports. END OF SECTION 06100 06100-5 SECTION 06192 PREFABRICATED METAL-PLATE-CONNECTED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hip and girder trusses at hip ends of roof. B. Roof sheathing is specified in Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry". 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Prefabricated metal-plate-connected wood trusses include planar structural units consisting of metal-plate-connected members that are fabricated from dimension lumber and that have been cut —. and assembled prior to delivery to the project site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for lumber,metal connector plates,hardware, fabrication process and fasteners. 2. Shop drawings indicating species, species group, sizes and stress grades of lumber to be used;pitch, span, camber, configuration and spacing for each type of truss required;type, size,material,finish,design values and location of metal connector plates; and bearing details. a. To the extent engineering design considerations are indicated as fabricator's — responsibility, include design analysis indicating loading, assumed allowable stress, stress diagrams and calculations and other information needed for review that have been signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. b. Provide shop drawings that have been signed and stamped by a qualified professional engineer. 3. Product certificate, signed by officer of fabricating firm, certifying that metal-plate- connected wood trusses supplied for Project comply with specified requirements. 06192-1 — 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TPI Standards: Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following Truss Plate Institute(TIP)publications: 1. "Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". 2. "Commentary and Recommendations for Handling and Erecting Wood Trusses". 3. "Commentary and Recommendation for Bracing Wood Trusses". 4. "Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". B. Connector Plate Manufacturer's Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI and that complies with TPI quality control procedures for manufacturer of connector plates published in TPI"Quality Standard for Metal Connector Plate Manufacturer". C. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA"National Design Specification for Wood Construction". D. Single-Source Engineering Responsibility: Provide trusses engineered by the metal plate connector manufacturer to support superimposed dead and live loads indicated,with design approved and certified by a qualified professional engineer. E. Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer, legally authorized to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated that have resulted in the installation of metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those of this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. F. Fabricator's Qualifications: A firm that complies with the following requirements for quality control and is experienced in prefabricating metal-plate-connected wood trusses similar to those of this Project that have a record of successful in-service performance. G. Single-Source Responsibility for Connector Plates: Provide metal connector plates from a single manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handle and store trusses with care and comply with manufacturer's instructions and TPI recommendations to avoid damage from bending,overturning or other cause which trusses are not designed to resist or endure. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Time delivery and erection of trusses to avoid extended on-site storage and to avoid delaying work of other trades whose work must follow erection of trusses. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 CONNECTOR PLATE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering metal connector plates that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 06192-2 1. Alpine Engineered Products,Inc. — 2. Bemax of Florida,Inc. 3. Clary Corporation 4. Computrus, Inc. ,. 5. Gang-Nail Systems,Inc. 6. Hydro-Air Engineering,Inc. 7. Inter-Lock Steel Co.,Inc. 8. Metal-Lock, Inc. 9. Robbins Manufacturing Co. 10. TEE-Lok Corp. 11. Truss Connectors of America 12. Truswal Systems Corporation 2.02 LUMBER A. Factory mark each piece of lumber with type, grade,mill and grading agency. — B. Lumber Standard: Manufacturer lumber to comply with PS 20"American Softwood Lumber Standard"and with applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by American Lumber Standards Committee's(ALSC)Board of Review. C. Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions. D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S,manufactured to actual sizes required by PS 20 to comply with requirements indicated below: 1. Moisture Content: Seasoned,with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing and shipment for sizes 2 inches or less in nominal thickness,unless otherwise .— indicated. 2. Any species and grade that complies with the following requirements for species group as defined in Table 8.1a of NFPA National Design Specification,for extreme fiber stress in bending"Fb"for single and repetitive members, and for modulus of elasticity"E". a. Group II species,"Fb"of 1200 psi for single member use and of 1400 psi for repetitive member use, and"E"of 1,600,000 psi. 2.03 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES . A. General: Fabricate connector plates from metal complying with requirements indicated in this article. — 06192-3 — B. Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Sheet: Structural(physical)quality steel sheet complying with ASTM -- A446, Grade A; zinc coated by hot-dip process to comply with ASTM A525,Designation G60; minimum coated metal thickness indicated but not less than 0.036 inch. C. Electrolytic Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: Structural(physical) quality steel sheet complying with ASTM A591, Coating Class C, and,for structural properties,with ASTM A446, Grade A; zinc coated by electro-deposition;with minimum coated metal thickness indicated,but not less than, 0.047 inch. D. Any metal indicated above. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Where truss members are exposed to weather or to high relative humidity,provide fasteners with a hot-dip zinc coating per ASTM A153 or of AISI Type 304 stainless steel. B. Nails,Wire,Brads and Staples: FS FF-N-105. C. Power Driven Fasteners: National Evaluation Report NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ANSI B18.6.1. E. Lag Bolts: ANSI B18.2.1. F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and where indicated, flat washers. 2.05 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS A. General: Provide metal framing anchors of type, size, metal and fmish indicated that comply --� with requirements specified, including the following: 1. Current Evaluation/Research Reports: Provide products for which reports exist from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that evidence compliance of metal framing anchors for application indicated with the building code in effect for this project. 2. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products for which manufacturer publishes allowable design loads that are determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and that are demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing laboratory. B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Steel sheet zinc-coated by hot-dip process on continuous lines prior to fabrication to comply with ASTM A525 for Coating Designation G60 and with ASTM A446, Grade A(structural quality);ASTM A526 (commercial quality); or ASTM A527 (lock-forming quality); as standard with manufacturer for type of anchor indicated. 06192-4 2.06 FABRICATION — A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths,angles and sizes to produce close-fitting joints with wood-to-wood bearing in assembled units. - — B. Fabricate metal connector plates to size, configuration,thickness and anchorage details required to withstand design loadings for types of joint designs indicated. — C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated using jigs or other means to ensure uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances specified in TPI"Quality Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses". Position members to produce design camber indicated. D. Connect truss members by means of metal connector plates accurately located and securely fastened to each side of wood members by means indicated or approved. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Erect and brace trusses to comply with applicable requirements of referenced TPI standards. B. Where trusses do not fit,return them to fabricator and replace with trusses of correct size; do not alter trusses in the field. C. Erect trusses with plane of truss webs vertical(plumb)and parallel to each other, located ✓- accurately at design spacing indicated. D. Hoist trusses in place by means of lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required, — exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes. E. Anchor trusses securely at all bearing points to comply with methods and details indicated. F. Install permanent bracing and related components to enable trusses to maintain design spacing, withstand live and dead loads, including lateral loads,and to comply with other indicated requirements. G. Do not cut or remove truss members. END OF SECTION 06192 06192-5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION — Section 02710 Building Insulation Section 07311 Asphalt Shingles Section 07600 Flashing and Sheet Metal Section 07720 Roof Accessories Section 07901 Sealants "is. SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Insulation under slabs-on-grade. -- 2. Loose-fill building insulation. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Thermal Resistivity: Where the thermal resistivity of insulation products are designated by "r-values",they represent the reciprocal of thermal conductivity(k-values). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogeneous material exactly 1 inch thick. Thermal resistivities are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F.between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each type of insulation product specified. 2. Product test reports from and based on tests performed by qualified independent testing laboratory evidencing compliance of insulation products with requirements including r-values (aged values for plastic foam insulations), fire performance characteristics,perm ratings,water absorption ratings and other properties,based on comprehensive testing of current products. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials identical to those whose indicated fire performance characteristics have been determined per the ASTM test method indicated below,by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Surface Burning Characteristic: ASTM E84. 2. Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119. 07210-1 3. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E136. — B. Single-Source Responsibility for Insulation Products: Obtain each type of building insulation from a single source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and -- physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations _ for handling, storage and protection during installation. B. Protect plastic insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver plastic insulating materials to project site ahead of installation time. 3. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area on construction. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: a. AFM Corporation b. Grace Construction Products Div.,W.R. Grace& Co. 2. Manufacturers of Glass Fiber Insulation: a. CertainTeed Corp. b. Manvill: Building Insulations Div.,Manville Sales Corp. c. Owens/Coming Fiberglas Corp. 2.02 INSULATING MATERIALS A. General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards. 1. Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated, selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses,width and lengths. 07210-2 _ B. Molded Polystyrene Board Insulation: Rigid,cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C578 for type indicated; and as follows: 1. Type I, 0.9 pcf min. density, aged r-values of 4.0 and 3.6 at 40 and 75 deg. F. (4.4 and 23.9 deg. C.),respectively. 2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 75 and 450,respectively. C. Glass Fiber Loose Fill Insulation: Glass fibers processed to comply with ASTM C764 for Type (method of application)indicated below;maximum flame spread and smoke developed values of 5 and 5,respectively, and as follows: -- 1. Type 1 for pneumatic application. 2. Type 2 for poured application. 2.03 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D4397, 6.0 mils thick,with a maximum permeance rating of 0.13 perms. B. Tape for Vapor Retarder: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.04 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation or mechanical anchors securely to substrates indicated without damaging or corroding either insulation, anchors or substrates. B. Mechanical Anchors: Type and size indicated or, if not indicated,as recommended by insulation manufacturer for type of application and condition of substrate. C. Mastic Sealer: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for bonding edge joints between units and filling voids in work. D. Eave Ventilation Troughs: Preformed rigid fiberboard or plastic sheets designed and sized to fit between roof framing members and to provide cross ventilation between insulated attic spaces and vented eaves. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions with Installer present, for compliance with requirements of the Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and to determine if other conditions affecting performance of insulation are satisfactory. Do not proceed with installation of insulation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 07210-3 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders,including removal of projections that might puncture vapor retarders. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's instructions applicable to products and application indicated. If printed instructions are not available or do not apply to project conditions, consult manufacturer's technical representative for specific recommendations before proceeding with installation of insulation. B. Extend insulation full thickness as indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement. C. Apply a single layer of insulation of required thickness,unless otherwise shown or required,to make up total thickness. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrate by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's recommendations. If no specific method is indicated,bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Seal joints between closed-cell(non-breathing) insulation units by applying adhesive,mastic or sealant to edges of each unit to form a tight seal as units are shoved into place. Fill voids in completed installation with adhesive,mastic or sealant as recommended by insulation manufacturer. C. Place glass fiber loose fill insulation into spaces and onto surfaces as shown, either by pouring or my machine-blowing. Level horizontal applications to uniform thickness as indicated, lightly settle to uniform density,but do not excessively compact. D. Stuff glass fiber loose fill insulation into miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where shown. Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume(to a density of approximately 2.5 pcf). 3.05 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS A. General: Extend vapor retarder to extremities of areas to be protected from vapor transmission. Secure in place with adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarder to cover miscellaneous voids in insulated substrate, including those filled with loose fiber insulation. B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping not less than 2 wall studs. Fasten vapor retarders to framing at top, end and bottom edges, at perimeter of wall openings, and at lap joints; space fasteners 16 inches o.c. C. Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with adhesives or tape per vapor retarder manufacturer's printed directions. Seal butt joints and faster penetrations with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates. — 07210-4 D. Firmly attach vapor retarders to substrates with mechanical fasteners or adhesives as recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer. E. Seal joints caused by pipes,conduits, electrical boxes and similar items penetrating vapor retarders with tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and vapor retarder. F. Repair any tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work. Cover with tape or another layer of vapor retarder. 3.06 PROTECTION A. General: Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,physical abuse and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation will be subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 07210 07210-5 SECTION 07311 ASPHALT SHINGLES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes asphalt shingles for steep roofs. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for underlayment and wood framing. 2. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for flashing, gutters and other sheet metal work. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data for each type of product specified,including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,profiles,textures and colors. 2. Samples for initial selection purposed in form of manufacturer's sample finishes showing full range of colors and profiles available. 3. Samples for verification purposes in form of two full-size units of each type of shingles required. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products that are identical to those tested for the specified fire performance characteristics by UL or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to design designations in UL"Fire Resistance Directory". 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's unopened bundles or containers with labels intact. B. Handle and store materials at Project site to prevent water damage, staining or other physical -- damage. Store roll goods on end. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for job site storage,handling and protection. 07311-1 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Conditions: Proceed with Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions will permit Work to be installed in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and when substrate is completely dry. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below,packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels clearly describing contents. 1. Furnish quantity of full-size asphalt shingles equal to 2 percent of amount installed. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by manufacturer,agreeing to -� repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include,but are not limited to, deformation or deterioration of shingles beyond normal weathering. This warranty shall be in addition to, and not a limitation of, other rights the Owner may have against the Contractor under the Contract Documents. 1. Warranty period is 25 years after date of Substantial Completion. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering asphalt shingles which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Celotex Corporation 2. CertainTeed Corporation 3. Elk Corporation 4. GAF Building Materials Corporation 5. Georgia Pacific 6. Manville Roofing Systems Division 7. Owens Corning Fiberglas Corporation 2.02 ASPHALT SHINGLES A. Square-Tab Strip Shingles,UL Class"A",Heavy Weight: Mineral-surfaced, self-sealing, three-tab asphalt fiberglass strip shingles complying with ASTM D3018 Type I and ASTM D3462. Provide shingles bearing UL Class"A"external fire exposure label and UL "Wind Resistant"label. 1. CertainTeed Corp -Horizon Shingle 07311-2 B. Hip and Ridge Shingles: Job-fabricated units cut from actual shingles used. C. Colors,Blends and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated,provide asphalt shingles with the following requirements: — 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors, textures and patterns for asphalt shingles of type indicated. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Felt Underlayment: No. 15;un-perforated organic felt complying with ASTM D226,Type I; 36 inches wide. B. Perimeter Underlayment: Polyethylene-sheet-backed rubberized asphalt membrane,40 mils thick. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be — incorporated in the Work include the following: a. "Bituthene Ice&Water Shield",W.R. Grace&Co. C. Smooth-Surface Roll Roofing: Smooth-surface asphalt roll roofing, 36 inches wide, complying with ASTM D224,Type II. — D. Asphalt Plastic Cement: Non-asbestos fibrated asphalt cement complying with ASTM D4586, designed for trowel application. — E. Nails: Aluminum or hot-dip galvanized steel, 11-or 12-gage, sharp-pointed,conventional roofing nails with barbed shanks,minimum 3/8 inch diameter head and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into solid decking or to penetrate through plywood sheathing. Material of nails in contact with flashing shall match materials selected for flashing to prevent galvanic action. F. Staples: Minimum 16-gage, zinc-coated steel roofing staples with minimum crown width of — 15/16 inch, and of sufficient length to penetrate 3/4 inch into deck lumber or through plywood deck. Pneumatically apply staples without damaging shingle. G. Metal Drip Edge: Minimum 0.024-inch mill finish aluminum sheet,brake-formed to provide 3-inch roof deck flange with 3/8 inch drip at lower edge. Furnish in lengths of 8 or 10 feet. H. Metal Flashing: 0.024-inch mill finish sheet aluminum,job-cut to sizes and configurations required. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION — A. Examine substrate for compliance with requirements for substrates,installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 07311-3 — 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. Cover knotholes or other minor voids in substrate with sheet metal flashing secured with non-corrosive roofmg nails. B. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining work to ensure proper sequencing. Do not install roofing materials until all vent stacks and other penetrations through roof sheathing have been installed and are securely fastened against movement. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations,but not less than recommended by"The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual". B. Felt Underlayment: Apply one layer of felt underlayment horizontally over entire surface to receive asphalt shingles, lapping succeeding courses a minimum of 4 inches, end laps a minimum of 4 inches, and hips and valleys a minimum of 6 inches. Fasten felt with sufficient number of roofmg nails or non-corrosive staples to hold underlayment in place until asphalt shingle application. 1. Omit felt underlayment at areas of perimeter underlayment. Lap felt underlayment over perimeter underlayment as recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 6 inches. C. Perimeter Underlayment: Apply minimum two 36"wide layers of perimeter underlayment at eaves. Extend perimeter underlayment at eaves a minimum of 36 inches inside exterior wall line. 1. In addition to eaves,apply perimeter underlayment at entire perimeter of surfaces to receive asphalt shingles,including ridges. D. Install asphalt shingles beginning at lower end with a starter strip of roll roofing or inverted shingles with tabs removed. Fasten shingles in pattern, with weather exposure,and using number of fasteners per shingle as recommended by manufacturer. Use vertical and horizontal chalk lines or pre-marked underlayment to ensure straight coursing. 1. Cut and fit asphalt shingles at ridges and edges to provide maximum weather protection. Provide same weather exposure at ridges as specified for roof Lap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. Fasteners at ridges shall be of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing as specified. E. Flashing: Install metal flashing as indicated and in accordance with details and recommendations of the"Asphalt Roofing"section of"The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual". 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Replace any damaged materials installed under this Section with new materials meeting specified requirements. END OF SECTION 07311 07311-4 SECTION 07600 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gutters and downspouts (rain drainage). 2. Exposed metal trim/fascia units. 3. Miscellaneous sheet metal accessories. B. Integral masonry flashings are specified as masonry work in sections of Division 4. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data,Flashing, Sheet Metal and Accessories: Manufacturer's technical product data, instructions and general recommendations for each specified sheet material and fabricated product. 2. Samples of the following flashing, sheet metal and accessory items: a. 8-inch-square samples of specified sheet materials to be exposed as finished surfaces. 3. Shop drawings showing layout,profiles,methods of joining and anchorage details, including major counter-flashings,trim/fascia units, gutters, downspouts, scuppers and expansion joint systems. Provide layouts at 1/4-inch scale and details at 3-inch scale. 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Coordinate work of this section with interfacing and adjoining work for proper sequencing of each installation. Ensure best possible weather resistance and durability of work and protection of materials and finishes. 07600-1 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM MATERIALS A. Zinc-coated Steel: Commercial quality with 0.20 percent copper,ASTM A526 except ASTM A527 for lock-forming, G90 hot-dip galvanized(mill phosphatized for painting),24 gauge, extra smooth finished one side with Kynar 500 (Fluoropolymer based coating) 1.0±0.1 mil total dry film thickness. 1. A wash coat of.3-.4 mil dry film thickness shall be applied to the reverse side. 2. The pre-finished side shall be provided with a factory applied strippable vinyl film for protection of finish during shipping and handling(this material must be removed immediately after installation). 3. Color shall be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. ColorKlad by Vincent Metals 2. PacClad by Peterson Aluminum Corp. 3. UnaClad by Copper Sales,Inc. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Solder: For use with steel or copper,provide 50 -50 tin/lead solder(ASTM B32),with rosin flux. B. Fasteners: Same metal as flashing/sheet metal or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by sheet manufacturer. Match finish of exposed heads with material being fastened. C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene;non-hardening,non-skinning, non-drying,non-migrating sealant. D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by manufacturer of metal and fabricator of components being sealed and complying with requirements for joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealers". E. Epoxy Seam Sealer: 2-part non-corrosive metal seam cementing compound, recommended by metal manufacturer for exterior/interior non-moving joints, including riveted joints. F. Adhesives: Type recommended by flashing sheet manufacturer for waterproof/weather-resistant seaming and adhesive application of flashing sheet. G. Paper Slip Sheet: 5-lb.rosin-sized building paper. H. Polyethylene Underlayment: Minimum 6-mil carbonated polyethylene film resistant to decay when tested in accordance with ASTM E154. 07600-2 I. Metal Accessories: Provide sheet metal clips, straps, anchoring devices and similar accessory units as required for installation of work,matching or compatible with material being installed, non-corrosive, size and gage required for performance. J. Elastic Flashing Filler: Closed-cell polyethylene or other soft closed-cell material recommended by elastic flashing manufacturer as filler under flashing loops to ensure movement with minimum stress on flashing sheet. K. Roofing Cement: ASTM D2822, asphaltic. 2.03 FABRICATED UNITS A. General Metal Fabrication: Shop-fabricate work to greatest extent possible. Comply with details shown and with applicable requirements of SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual"and other recognized industry practices. Fabricate for waterproof and weather-resistant performance, with expansion provisions for running work, sufficient to permanently prevent leakage, damage or deterioration of the work. Form work to fit substrates. Comply with material manufacturer instructions and recommendations for forming material. Form exposed sheet metal work without excessive oil-canning,buckling and tool marks,true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems.B. Seams: Fabricate non-moving seams in sheet metal with flat-lock seams. For metal other than aluminum,tin edges to be seamed, form seams and solder. Form aluminum seams with epoxy seam sealer; rivet joints for additional strength where required. C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in work cannot be _ used or would not be sufficiently water/weatherproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges,not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant(concealed within joints). D. Sealant Joints: Where movable,non-expansion type joints are indicated or required for proper performance of work, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant, in • compliance with SMACNA standards. E. Separations: Provide for separation of metal from non-compatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces at locations of contact,with bituminous coating or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer/fabricator. -- PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations and with SMACNA"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual". Anchor units of work securely in place by methods indicated,providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. B. Underlayment: Where stainless steel or aluminum is to be installed directly on Cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. C. Bed flanges of work in a thick coat of bituminous roofmg cement where required for waterproof performance. '- 07600-3 D. Install elastic flashing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where required, provide for movement at joints by forming loops or bellows in width of flashing. Locate cover or filler strips at joints to facilitate complete drainage of water from flashing. Seam adjacent flashing sheets with adhesive, seal and anchor edges in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Nail flanges of expansion joint units to curb nailers, at maximum spacing of 6 inches o.c. Fabricate seams at joints between units with minimum 3-inch overlap,to form a continuous, waterproof system. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces,removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. B. Protection: Advise Contractor of required procedures for surveillance and protection of flashings and sheet metal work during construction to ensure that work will be without damage or deterioration other than natural weathering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 07600 07600-4 SECTION 07720 — ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS _ A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ridge Vents B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for roof deck and nailers. -- 2. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for metal flashing,valleys, gutters and downspouts. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: l. Product data for each type of product specified. Submit manufacturer's detailed technical product data,installation instructions and recommendations,including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components,profiles and finishes. 2. Samples for initial selection purposes in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing full range of colors,textures, shapes and sizes available for each type of roof accessory -- indicated. 3. Samples for verification purposes in full-size units or representative section of each type of roof accessory indicated for each color,texture, shape and sizes specified. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Ridge Vents a. Alcoa Building Products b. Ampcor,Div. of the Solar Group 07720-1 c. Mid-America Building Products Corp. 2.02 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Aluminum Sheets: ASTM B209 for Alclad Alloy 3005H25 or alloy and temper required to suit forming operations with mill finish,unless indicated otherwise. B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber,pressure treated with water-borne preservative for —' above-ground use, complying with AWPA C2;not less than 1-1/2 inch thick. C. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened or non-magnetic stainless steel or other non-corrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match fmish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. — D. Elastomeric Sealant: Generic type recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C920,Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, and Uses NT, G and A. E. Roofmg Cement: ASTM D4586,non-asbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofmg system. 2.03 FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM"Metal Finishes Manual"for recommendations on applying and designating finishes. amlft B. Organic Coating: Thermosetting-modified acrylic enamel primer and topcoat system complying with AAMA 603.8, except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils,medium gloss. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. -� 2.04 RIDGE VENTS A. General: Fabricate of sheet aluminum with baffles to prevent snow and rain entering and weep holes to allow water to drain to roof. Provide splice plates and end caps required. 1. Mid-America Building Products,Inc.: Ridgemaster — PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Coordinate with installation of roof deck and other substrates to receive accessory units,vapor barriers,roof insulation,roofmg and flashing, as required,to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weather tight. Anchor units securely to supporting structural substrates,adequate to withstand lateral and thermal stresses,as well as inward and outward loading pressures. 1. Except as otherwise indicated, install roof accessory items according to construction — details of NRCA"Roofmg and Waterproofing Manual". 07720-2 B. Isolation: Where metal surfaces of units are to be installed in contact with incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or provide other permanent separation. C. Flange Seals: Unless otherwise indicated, set flanges of accessory units in a thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal. 3.02 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal and plastic surfaces according to manufacturer's instructions. Touch-up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION 07720 07720-3 SECTION 07901 JOINT SEALERS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY — A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following locations: 1. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces as indicated below: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. _ b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames or doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated. 2. Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces as indicated below: a. Control, expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated. 3. Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal non-traffic surfaces as indicated below: _- a. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames. b. Perimeter joints of toilet fixtures. c. Other joints as indicated. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 7 Section"Flashing and Sheet Metal"for sealing joints related to flashing and sheet metal for roofing. 2. Division 8 Section"Glass and Glazing"for sealants used in glazing. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide joint sealants that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain airtight continuous seals that are water resistant and cause no staining or deterioration of joint substrates. 07901-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1. Product data from manufacturers for each joint sealant product required. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE —' A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for Project that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealant Materials: Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. C. Product Testing: Provide comprehensive test data for each type of joint sealant based on tests conducted by a qualified independent testing laboratory on current product formulations within a 24-month period preceding date of Contractor's submittal of test results to Architect. 1. Test elastomeric sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C920. Include test results for hardness, stain resistance, adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement(per ASTM C719), low-temperature flexibility,modulus of _ elasticity at 100 percent strain, effects of heat aging and effects of accelerated weathering. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original, unopened container or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer,product name and designation, color, expiration period for use,pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multi-component materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture,high or low temperatures, contaminants or other causes. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg.F. (4.4 deg. C.). 2. When joint substrates are wet. B. Joint Width Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants where joint widths are — less than allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for application indicated. C. Joint Substrate Conditions: Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until contaminants capable of interfering with their adhesion are removed from joint substrates. 07901-2 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Sequence installation of joint sealants to occur not less than 21,nor more than 30, days after completion of waterproofing,unless otherwise indicated. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants,joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Colors: Provide color of exposed joint sealants to comply with the following: 1. Provide selections made by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors for products of type indicated. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Sealant Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing elastomeric sealants that comply with ASTM C920 and other requirements indicated,including those requirements referencing ASTM C920 classifications for Type, Grade, Class and Uses. B. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25,Uses NT,G A and 0, as applicable to non-porous joint substrates indicated, formulated with fungicide,intended for sealing interior joints with non-porous substrates and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes. C. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, and complying with the following requirements for uses: 1. Uses NT,M,A and 0, as applicable to joint substrates indicated. D. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25,and complying with the following requirements for uses: 1. Uses T,M,A and 0,as applicable to joint substrates indicated. E. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. One-Part Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: Dow-Coming 786;Dow Corning Corp. SCS 1702 Sanitary; General Electric Co. 863 #345 White; Pecora Corp. Rhodosil 6B White; Rhone-Poulenc,Inc. Proglaze White;Tremco Corp. OmniPlus; Sonneborn Building Products Div.,Rexnord Chemical Products,Inc. 07901-3 2. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use NT: -- Chem-Calk 500; Bostik Construction Products Div. Vulkem 227; Mameco International,Inc. Vulkem 922;Mameco International,Inc. Dualthane; W.R.Meadows Dynatrol II; Pecora Corp. Permapol RC-2; Products Research&Chemical Corp. Sikaflex-2c NS; Sika Corp. Sonolastic NP 2; Sonnebom Building Products Div.,Rexnord Chemical Products,Inc. Dymeric;Tremco, Inc. 3. Multi-Part Non-sag Urethane Sealant for Use T: Chem-Calk 500; Bostik Construction Products Div. Vulkem 227;Mameco International,Inc. Dynatred; Pecora Corp. PRC 280;Products Research&Chemical Corp. Sikaflex-2c NS; Sika Corp. THC-901; Tremco,Inc. 2.03 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are non-staining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants,primers and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Plastic Foam Joint Fillers: Preformed, compressible,resilient,non-staining,non-waxing, non-extruding strips of flexible plastic foam of material indicated below and of size, shape and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant — performance: 1. Proprietary,reticulated,closed-cell polymeric foam,non-out gassing,with a -- density of 2.5 pcf and tensile strength of 35 psi per ASTM D1623, and with water absorption less than 0.02 gms/cc per ASTM C1083. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Non-porous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or -- harming in any way joint substrates and adjacent non-porous surfaces,and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Non-staining,non-absorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. 07901-4 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants,with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances and other conditions affecting joint sealant performance. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with recommendations of joint sealant manufacturer and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust,paints(except for permanent,protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants,oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents,water, surface dirt and frost. 2. Clean concrete,masonry,unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile and similar porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing,grinding,blast cleaning,mechanical abrading or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining from above cleaning operations by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. 3. Remove laitance and form release agents from concrete. 4. Clean metal, glass,porcelain enamel, glazed surfaces of ceramic tile and other non-porous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,harm substrates or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer based on preconstruction joint sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's recommendations. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's printed installation instructions applicable of products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications and conditions indicated. C. Installation of Sealant Backings: Install sealant backings to comply with the following requirements: 1. Install joint fillers of type indicated to provide support of sealants during application and at position required to produce the cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint width that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 07901-5 a. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint fillers. b. Do not stretch,twist,puncture or tear joint fillers. c. Remove absorbent joint fillers that have become wet prior to sealant application and replace with dry material. 2. Install bond breaker tape between sealants where backer rods are not used between sealants and joint fillers or back of joints. D. Installation of Sealants: Install sealants by proven techniques that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint substrates, completely filling recesses provided for each joint configuration, and providing uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. Install sealants at the same time sealant backings are installed. E. Tooling of Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time skinning or curing begins,tool sealants to form smooth,uniform beads of configuration indicated,to eliminate air pockets, and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer. 1. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C1193,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide flush joint configuration,per Figure 5B in ASTM C1193,where indicated. _ a. Use masking tape to protect adjacent surfaces of recessed tooled joints. 3. Provide recessed joint configuration,per Figure 5C in ASTM C1193, of recess depth and at locations indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.05 PROTECTION _ A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so that any installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07901 07901-6 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS -- Section 08111 Standard Steel Doors and Frames Section 08710 Hardware SECTION 08111 STANDARD STEEL DOORS &FRAMES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS _ A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. _ 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following products manufactured in accordance with SDI Recommended Standards: 1. Doors: Flush,hollow or composite construction standard steel doors for interior and exterior locations. 2. Frames: Pressed steel frames for doors, sidelights,mullions and other exterior openings -- of following type: a. Welded unit type. _ 3. Assemblies: Provide standard steel door and frame assemblies as required for the following: a. Thermal rated(insulated). 4. Provide factory primed doors and frames to be field painted.B. Painting primed doors and frames is specified in Division 9 Section"Painting". C. Door hardware is specified in another Division 8 Section. D. Glass and Glazing are specified in another Division 8 Section. E. Building in of anchors and grouting of frames in masonry construction is specified in Division 4. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions,hardware preparation, core, label compliance, sound ratings, profiles and finishes. 2. Shop drawings showing fabrication and installation of standard steel doors and frames. Include details of each frame type, elevations of door design types, conditions at openings, details of construction, location and installation requirements or door and frame hardware and reinforcements, and details of joints and connections. Show — anchorage and accessory items. 08111-1 a. Provide schedule of doors and frames using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on contract drawings. b. Indicate coordinate of glazing frames and stops with glass and glazing requirements. B. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-rated and exceeding limitation of labeled assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification that each door and frame assembly has been constructed to conform to design,materials and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide doors and frames complying with Steel Door Institute"Recommended Specification Standard Steel Doors and Frames"ANSI/SDI-100 and as herein specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Architect; otherwise, remove and replace damaged items as directed. C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high, wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters which could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet,remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering standard steel doors and frames which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames a. Amweld Building Products, Inc. b. Ceco Corp. c. Curries Company d. Republic Building Products e. Steelcraft Manufacturing Co. 08111-2 2.02 MATERIALS A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial quality carbon steel,pickled and oiled, complying with ASTM A569 and ASTM A568. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Commercial quality carbon steel, complying with ASTM A366 and ASTM A568. — C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A526 or drawing quality,ASTM A642,hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A525,with A60 or G60 coating designation,mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricate of not less than 18-gage sheet steel; galvanized where used with galvanized frames. E. Inserts,Bolts and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls,hot-dip galvanize in compliance with ASTM A153, Class C or D as applicable. F. Shop Applied Paint: Apply after fabrication. 1. Primer: Rust-inhibitive enamel or paint,either air-drying or baking, suitable as a base for specified finish paints complying with ANSI A224.1, "Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames". — 2.03 DOORS A. Provide metal doors of SDI grades and models specified below or as indicated on drawings or schedules: 1. Interior Doors: ANSFSDI-100, Grade II,heavy-duty,Model 3 or 4,minimum 16-gage, cold-rolled sheet steel faces or as required for fire rating. 2. Exterior Doors: ANSI/SDI-100, Grade III, extra heavy-duty,Model 4,minimum 16-gage galvanized steel faces. 2.04 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, sidelights and other openings, of types and styles as shown on drawings and schedules. Conceal fastenings,unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate frames of — minimum 16-gage, cold-rolled steel. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered, coped or welded corners. 2. Form exterior frames from 16-gage, galvanized steel. B. Plaster Guards: Provide minimum 26-gage steel plaster guards or mortar boxes at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation and to close off interior of openings. _ C. Door Silencers: Except on weather stripped frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. — 08111-3 —' 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance and free from defects,warp or buckle. Wherever practicable, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory-assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at project site. Comply with ANSUSDI-100 requirements. 1. Internal Construction: Manufacturer's standard honeycomb,polyurethane,polystyrene, unitized steel grid, vertical steel stiffeners, or rigid mineral fiber core with internal sound deadener on inside of face sheets where appropriate in accordance with SDI standards. 2. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads except between non-fire-rated pairs of doors,not more than 1/4 inch. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom. B. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels,including stiles and rails of non-flush units, from only cold-rolled steel. C. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117"Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames". D. Fabricate frames, concealed stiffeners,reinforcement, edge channels, louvers and moldings from either cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel. E. Fabricate exterior doors,panels and frames from galvanized sheet steel in accordance with SDI-112. Close top and bottom edges of exterior doors as integral part of door construction or by addition of minimum 16-gage inverted steel channels. F. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated,provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. — G. Thermal-Rated(Insulating)Assemblies: At exterior locations and elsewhere as shown or scheduled,provide doors fabricated as thermal insulating door and frame assemblies and tested in accordance with ASTM C236 or ASTM C976 on fully operable door assemblies. 1. Unless otherwise indicated,provide thermal-rated assemblies with U factor of 0.41 Btu (hr x sq. ft. x def. F.)or better. H. Hardware Preparation: Prepare frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware in accordance with final Door Hardware Schedule and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI A115 Series Specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. I. Reinforce frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at project site. J. Locate hardware as indicated on final shop drawings or, if not indicated, in accordance with -' "Recommended Locations for Builder's Hardware on Standard Steel Doors and Frames". published by Door and Hardware Institute. -- K. Shop Painting: Clean,treat and paint exposed surfaces of steel door and frame units,including galvanized surfaces. 1. Clean steel surfaces of mill scale,rust, oil, grease, dirt and other foreign materials before application of paint. 08111-4 2. Apply shop coat of prime paint of even consistency to provide a uniformly finished surface ready to receive finish paint. L. Glazing Stops: Minimum 20-gage steel or .040-inch thick aluminum. 1. Provide non-removable stops on outside of exterior doors and on secure side of interior doors for glass,louvers and other panels in doors. — 2. Provide screw applied removable glazing beads on inside of glass, louvers and other panels in doors. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install standard steel doors, frames and accessories in accordance with final shop — drawings,manufacturer's data and as herein specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI-105 "Recommended Erection Instructions For Steel Frames",unless otherwise indicated. 1. In masonry construction,locate three wall anchors per jamb adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Acceptable anchors include -- masonry wire anchors and masonry Tee anchors. C. Door Installation: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames,within clearances specified in ANSI/SDI-100. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN — A. Prime Coat Touch-up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer. B. Protection Removal: Immediately prior to final inspection,remove protective plastic wrappings from pre-finished doors. C. Final Adjustments: Check and re-adjust operating hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. END OF SECTION 08111 08111-5 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hinges — 2. Lock sets 3. Closers 4. Weather-stripping for exterior doors. 5. Thresholds B. Related Sections: The following Section contains requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section"Standard Steel Doors and Frames"for silencers integral with hollow metal doors. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections: 1. Product data including manufacturer's technical product data for each item of door hardware,installation instructions,maintenance of operating parts and finish and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. _ 2. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors, frames and related work to ensure proper size,thickness,hand function and finish of door hardware. a. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated, organize schedule into"hardware sets"indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information. — 1) Type, style, function, size and finish of each hardware item. 2) Name and manufacturer of each item. 3) Fastenings and other pertinent information. 08710-1 4) Location of each hardware set cross referenced to indications on Drawings both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. 5) Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule. 6) Mounting locations for hardware. — 7) Door and frame sizes and materials. 8) Keying information. 2. Submittal Sequence: Submit final schedule at earliest possible date particularly where acceptance _ of hardware schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include with schedule the product data, samples, shop drawings of other work affected by door hardware and other information essential to the coordinated review of schedule. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware(latch and lock sets,hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer. B. Supplier Qualifications: A recognized architectural door hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities in the Project's vicinity,that has a record of successful in-service performance for supplying door hardware similar in quantity,type and quality to that indicated for this Project and _ that employs an experienced architectural hardware consultant(AHC)who is available to Owner, Architect and Contractor, at reasonable times during the course of the Work, for consultation. 1. Require supplier to meet with Owner to finalize keying requirements and to obtain final instructions in writing. C. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA — Standard No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed and are identical to products tested by UL,Warnock Hersey,FM, or other testing and inspecting organizations acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to final hardware schedule, and _ include basic installation instructions with each item or package. B. Deliver individually packaged door hardware items promptly to place of installation(shop or Project site). 08710-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Butts and Hinges: a. Bommer Industries,Inc. b. McKenney Products Co. c. Stanley Hardware,Div. Stanley Works 2. Overhead Closers: a. LCN,Div. Ingersoll-Rand Door Hardware Group b. Sargent Manufacturing Company 3. Door Stripping and Seals: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. c. Zero International,Inc. 4. Thresholds: a. Pemko Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. Reese Enterprises, Inc. c. Zero International,Inc. 2.02 SCHEDULED HARDWARE _ A. Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size and other distinctive qualities of each type of finish hardware are indicated in the"Hardware Schedule"on the drawings. 2.03 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Name Plate: Do not use manufacturer's products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in visible location(omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated,using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition,temper and hardness,but in no case of lesser (commercially recognized)quality than specified for applicable hardware units by applicable ANSI/BHMA A156 series standards for each type of hardware item and with ANSI/BHMA A156.18 for finish designations indicated. Do not furnish"optional"materials or forming methods for those indicated, except as otherwise specified. 08710-3 C. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates,generally prepared for machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws, except as specifically indicated. 1. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips flat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition) screws to match hardware finish or, if exposed in surfaces of other work,to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including"prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. 2. Provide concealed fasteners for hardware units that are exposed when door is closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified are available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Where thru-bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work,provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use hex screw fasteners. 2.04 HINGES,BUTTS AND PIVOTS A. Templates: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely(both leaves)into wood doors and frames,provide only template-produced units. B. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1. For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. 2. For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3. For fire-rated wood doors install#12 x 1-1/4-inch,threaded-to-the-head steel wood screws. 4. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges or pivots. B. Hinge Pins: Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: 1. Out-Swing Exterior Doors: Non-removable pins. 2. Interior Doors: Non-rising pins. 3. Tips: Flat button and matching plug, finished to match leaves, except where hospital tip (HT) indicated. C. Number of Hinges: Provide number of hinges indicated but not less than 3 hinges per door leaf for doors 90 inches or less in height and one additional hinge for each 30 inches of additional height. 2.05 LOCK CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required either new or integrated with Owner's existing system. 08710-4 B. Metals: Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze, stainless steel or nickel silver. 1. Comply with Owner's instructions for master-keying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. C. Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. D. Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock,key to existing master system. 2.06 LOCKS,LATCHES AND BOLTS A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 CLOSERS AND DOOR CONTROL DEVICES A. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated, comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door,exposure to weather and anticipated frequency of use. 2.08 WEATHER-STRIPPING AND SEALS A. General: Provide continuous weather-stripping on exterior doors and smoke seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide non-corrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated. B. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. C. Weather-stripping at Jambs and Heads: Provide bumper-type resilient insert and metal retainer strips, surface applied unless shown as mortised or semi-mortised,and of following metal, finish and resilient bumper material: 1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's standard color range, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. 2. Solid neoprene conforming to MTh R 6855, Class II,Grade 40. a. Flexible,hollow bulb or loop insert. D. Weather-stripping at Door Bottoms: Provide threshold consisting of contact-type resilient insert and metal housing of design and size shown and of following metal, finish and resilient seal strip: 1. Extruded aluminum with color anodized finish as selected from manufacturer's standard color range, 0.062-inch minimum thickness of main walls and flanges. 2. Solid neoprene wiper or sweep seal complying with MIL R 6855,Class II, Grade 40. -- 2.09 THRESHOLDS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated,provide standard metal threshold unit of type, size and profile as shown or scheduled. 08710-5 2.10 HARDWARE FINISHES A. Match items to the manufacturer's standard color and texture finish for the latch and lock sets(or push-pull units if no latch or lock sets). — B. Provide finishes that match those established by BHMA. C. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating(if any), composition,hardness and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards,but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware. D. Provide protective lacquer coating on all exposed hardware finishes of brass,bronze and aluminum, except as otherwise indicated. The suffix"-NL"is used with standard finish designations to indicate"no lacquer". — E. The designations used in schedules and elsewhere to indicate hardware finishes are the industry- recognized standard commercial finishes, except as otherwise noted. — PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. 1. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames" by the Door and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard I.S.1.7, "Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors". 3. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes -- have been completed on the substrates involved. 4. Set units level,plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. 5. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. B. Weather-stripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 08710-6 B. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section"Door Hardware",hardware set numbers indicated in door schedule located on drawings. END OF SECTION 08710 08710-7 DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies Section 09800 Special Coatings Section 09900 Painting ._ SECTION 09255 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Gypsum board assemblies attached to steel framing. 2. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing and furring members. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for the following: — a. Wood framing and furring. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms related to gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.04' QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-rated gypsum board assemblies are indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire Resistance Ratings: As indicated by reference to GA File Numbers in GA-600"Fire Resistance Design Manual"or design designations in UL"Fire Resistance Directory"or in the listing of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single-Source Responsibility for Steel Framing: Obtain steel framing members for gypsum board assemblies from a single manufacturer. C. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other panel products from a single manufacturer. D. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 09255-1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING — A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. — B. Store materials inside,under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination,corrosion, construction traffic and other causes. — Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. C. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions,General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. — B. Room Temperatures: For non-adhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,maintain not less than 40 deg.F. (4 deg.C.). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg.F. (10 deg. C.) for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after,until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg. F. (35 deg. C.)when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required,for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring a. Consolidated Systems, Inc. — b. Dietrich Industries, Inc. c. Gold Bond Building Products Div.,National Gypsum Co. d. Unimast,Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. Gold Bond Building Products Div.,National Gypsum Co. c. United States Gypsum Co. 09255-2 _. 2.02 STEEL FRAMING FOR WALLS AND PARTITIONS A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C645,with flanged edges of studs bent back 90 deg. and doubled over to form 3/16"minimum lip (return) and complying with the following requirements for minimum thickness of base(uncoated)metal and for depth: 1. Thickness: 0.179 inch,unless otherwise indicated 2. Depth: 3-5/8 inch,unless otherwise indicated B. Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type,materials, size, corrosion resistance,holding power and other properties required to fasten steel framing and furring members securely to substrates involved, complying with the recommendations of gypsum drywall manufacturers for applications indicated. 2.03 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints. 1. Thickness: Provide gypsum board in thicknesses indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, 5/8 inch thickness to comply with ASTM C840 for application system and support spacing indicated. B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C36 and as follows: 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Type: SAG-resistant type for ceiling surfaces. 3. Edges: Tapered. 4. Thickness: 5/8 inch,unless otherwise indicated. C. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the work where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Firestop Type C, Georgia-Pacific Corp. 2. Fire-Shield G,Gold Bond Building Products Div.,National Gypsum Co. 3. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels,FIRECODE C Core,United States Gypsum Co. 4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels,ULTRACODE Core,Unites States Gypsum Co. 09255-3 2.04 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Accessories for Interior Installation: Corner beads, edge trim and control joints complying with ASTM C 1047 and requirements indicated below: _. 1. Material: Formed metal,plastic or metal combined with paper, with metal complying with the following requirement: — a. Sheet steel zinc-coated by hot-dip process. 2. Shapes indicated below by reference to Fig. 1 designations in ASTM C1047: a. Corner bead on outside corners,unless otherwise indicated. b. LC-bead with both face and back flanges; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use LC-beads for edge trim unless otherwise indicated. c. L-bead with face flange only; face flange formed to receive joint compound. Use L-bead where indicated. d. One-piece control joint formed with V-shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening. 2.05 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Provide joint treatment materials complying with ASTM C475 and the recommendations of both the manufacturers of sheet products and of joint treatment materials for each application indicated. B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape,unless otherwise indicated. C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged,job-mixed, chemical- hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only,use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. 2. For pre-filling gypsum board joints,use formulation recommended by gypsum board — manufacturer for this purpose. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds for Gypsum Board: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. 1. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and face flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill(second)and finish(third) coats. c. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds. 09255-4 — 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials for gypsum board construction that comply with referenced standards and recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Spot Grout: ASTM C475,setting-type joint compound recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C1002 for the following applications: 1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members. 2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members. D. Polyethylene Vapor Retarder: ASTM D4397,thickness and maximum permeance rating as follows: — 1. 6.0 mils,0.13 perms. E. Vapor Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor retarder manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder. 2.07 TEXTURE FINISH PRODUCTS A. Aggregate Finish for Walls: Factory-packaged proprietary drying-type powder product formulated with aggregate for mixing with water at Project site for spray application to produce texture indicated below: 1. Light-spatter finish. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Aggregate Finish a. USG Spray Texture(12)Finish,United States Gypsum Co. C. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: Factory-packaged proprietary powder product formulated with polystyrene aggregates for mixing with water at Project site to produce the texture indicated below by spray application,with flame-spread and smoke-developed ratings of not more than 25,per ASTM E84. 1. Fine textured finish. D. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Polystyrene Aggregated Finish for Ceilings: a. Gyproc Ceiling Texture Spray,Domtar Gypsum b. G-P Ceiling Texture-Polystyrene,Georgia-Pacific Corp. 09255-5 c. Perfect Spray Medium, Gold Bond Building Products Div., National Gypsum Co. —" d. IMPERIAL QT Spray Texture Finish(F-Fine),United States Gypsum Co. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION _ A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, installed hollow metal frames, cast-in-anchors, and structural framing with Installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and fmish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C840 and GA-216. 1. Install wall/partition board panels to minimize the number of abutting end joints or avoid them entirely. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. 2. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels' not less than one framing member. 3. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. 4. Locate both edge or end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Position adjoining panels so that tapered edges abut tapered edges, and field-cut edges abut field-cut edges and ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints at corners of framed openings where possible. 5. Attach gypsum panels to steel furring so that the leading edge or end of each panel is — attached to open(unsupported)edges of stud flanges first. 6. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. 7. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber including floor joists and headers. Instead,float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. 8. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid core wood doors, hollow metal doors and doors over 32 inches wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. 9. Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated and as detailed, with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels, as well as supporting framing behind gypsum panels. 09255-6 3.03 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: — 1. On steel framing members,apply gypsum panels vertically(parallel to framing)with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. 2. On ceiling, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated. B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: 1. Fasten with screws. 3.04 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges, fasten to framing with the same fasteners used to fasten gypsum board. Otherwise, fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type,length and spacing of fasteners. 1. Install corner beads at external corners. 2. Install edge trip where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed or semi- exposed. Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound except where other types are indicated. a. Install LC-bead where gypsum panels are tightly abutted to other construction and back flange can be attached to framing or supporting substrate. b. Install L-bead where edge trims can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed. 3. Install control joints at locations indicated, and where not indicated, according to ASTM C840,and in locations approved by Architect for visual effect. 3.05 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Apply joint treatment at gypsum board joints (both directions); flanges of corner bead, edge trim and control joints; penetrations; fastener heads, surface defects and elsewhere, as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration and levels of gypsum board finish indicated. _ 1. Pre-fill open joints,rounded or beveled edges and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. 2. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints except those with trim accessories having concealed face flanges not requiring taping to prevent cracks from developing in joint treatment at flange edges. B. Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: Provide the following levels of gypsum board finish per GA-214. 1. Level 4 for gypsum board surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 09255-7 C. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints,angles,fastener heads and accessories. Touch-up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of visual defects and ready for decoration. Use one of the following joint compound combinations: l. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. 2. Fill(Second)Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. 3. Finish(Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. _ 3.06 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation: Prepare gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes according to texture finish manufacturer's instructions. Surfaces to be clean, dry and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish to gypsum panels and other surfaces indicated — to receive texture finish according to texture finish manufacturer's directions. Using powered spray equipment, acceptable to texture finish manufacturer,produce a uniform texture matching approved field samples and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture -- finish by covering them with masking agents,polyethylene film or other means. If, despite these precautions,texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray as recommended by texture finish manufacturer to prevent damage. — 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. • Provide fmal protection and maintain conditions, in a manner suitable to Installer,that ensures gypsum board assemblies remain without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09255 09255-8 SECTION 09800 — SPECIAL COATINGS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY — A. Section includes: 1. Special coatings for interior/exterior use: a. 2-part pigmented acrylic polyurethane fmish. — b. 2-component high performance polyamidoamine epoxy coating. c. 2-component high performance polyamide epoxy. d. 1-component modified-acrylic. e. 1-component modified-epoxy finish. 2. The work required under this section consists of all special coating work and related items necessary to complete the work indicated on drawings,described in the specifications and listed in the Schedule included herein. 3. This work includes the application of special coating systems to items and surfaces as scheduled, including surface preparation, priming and topcoats. 4. List of items included: Without restricting the volume or generality of the above under "Extent",the work to be performed under this section shall include,but is not limited to, the following: a. Special coating system for exposed ductile iron pipe,pumps, fiberglass duct, and mechanical equipment. b. Special coating system for interior concrete walls and ceilings. c. Special coating system for lintels and doors. d. Special coating system for submerged steel surfaces in water. 5. Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, apply special coatings to these the same as adjacent similar materials or areas. B. Section does not include: 1. Primers and fmish coats specified to be factory or shop applied as work of other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction, General Special Provisions and Division 1 Sections apply to the work of — this Section. 2. Shop priming of ferrous metal: Division 5. — 09800-1 1.02 REFERENCES — A. Good Painting Practice(Steel Structures Painting Manual,Vol. I); Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC); 1982. B. Systems and Specifications(Steel Structures Painting Manual,Vol. 2); Steel Structures Painting Council(SSPC); 1982 (with 1985 Supplement). C. ASTM D16-84 - Standard Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint,Varnish,Lacquer and Related Products; 1984. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Special Coating Systems: Materials and methods of application requiring more than normal skills and techniques for mixing,handling and application and including applied materials used in prime, intermediate and finish coats. B. "Exposed Surfaces"is defined to include areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers,covers for finned tube radiation grilles, etc., are in place in areas scheduled to be coated. However, extend special coatings in these areas as required to maintain the coating system integrity and provide the desired protections. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including,but not limited to: basic materials analysis, coating profile,performance criteria and application instructions for each coating material specified. Products that are of other generic type,will not be considered. 1. All products and colors shall be certified by the manufacturer to be"lead and chromate free". — 2. All products shall have a VOC (volatile organic compound)content of less than 3.50 lbs. per gallon(thinned). 3. Coatings for potable water applications must be tested and certified by NSF International ANSI/NSF Std 61, Section 5,Protective(Barrier)Materials. 4. List each material and cross-reference to the specific coating and finish system and application. 5. Identify each material by the manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 6. Color selected by A/E. B. Samples: 1. Prior to beginning work, submit samples for the architect's review of color and texture only. Label and identify each material application and location for each coat of each finish sample. a. Provide samples of each color and material to be applied,with texture to simulate the actual conditions, on representative samples of the actual substrate. 09800-2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat material produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Use only thinners recommended by the manufacturer;use only within recommended limits. 1. Use only the approved products of the coating manufacturers listed in Part 2 of this Section or approved under provisions for substitutions specified in Division 1. B. Applicator: Firm with not less than 3 years of successful experience in work similar in scope of the work of this project. C. Coordination of Work: Ensure compatibility of the total coating systems for various substrates. Upon request, furnish information on the characteristics of specified finish materials to ensure that compatible prime coats are used. 1. Notify the architect in writing of any anticipated problems involved in using the coating systems as specified. D. Field Samples: On actual surfaces,as directed by architect,provide full-coat finish samples until required sheen,color and texture is obtained; simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1. Final acceptance of colors will be from field samples. 2. Accepted sample may remain as part of the work. E. Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications to ensure compatibility of total coatings systems for substrate. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,new,unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Name or title of material. 2. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 3. Manufacturer's name. 4. Contents by volume for major pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. Handling instructions and precautions. B. Storage and Handling: Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F.and in a well-ventilated area. 09800-3 1. Maintain containers used for storage of coatings in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Protect from freezing where necessary. 3. Keep storage area neat and orderly. 4. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 5. Take all necessary precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and health hazards. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply coatings only when the temperature of surfaces to be coated and surrounding air — temperatures are above 45 degrees F. B. Do not apply coatings in snow,rain, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Allow wet surfaces to dry thoroughly and attain the temperature and conditions specified before proceeding with or continuing with the coating operation. C. Provide lighting level of not less than 80 footcandles measured mid-height at substrate surface. D. Provide continuous ventilation and heating to prevent accumulation of hazardous fumes, and maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F. for 24 hours before, during and for 48 hours after application of finishes. -- PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide products complying with requirements of contract documents and made by one of the _ following: 1. Sherwin Williams Company(SWC). 2. Tnemec Company, Inc. (TCI). 3. Ameron Protective Coatings 2.02 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCTS- A. For each type of coating,provide one of the products listed. B. Material Quality: 1. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard,best-grade product will not be acceptable. _ C. Colors, Surface Treatment and Finishes: 1. As indicated in the schedule. 09800-4 D. Color Pigments: 1. Pure,non-fading types applicable to substrates and service indicated. 2.03 EXTERIOR COATING MATERIALS A. Primer: 1. Metal primer recommended for use over ferrous and non-ferrous metal or aluminum under 2-part pigmented polyurethane coatings. a. Tnemec Series 69-Hi Build Epoxy II. b. SWC: Per manufacturer's published recommendations. B. Finish Coats: 1. 2-part pigmented acrylic polyurethane coating recommended over primed ferrous and non-ferrous metal aluminum. a. Tnemec Series 75 Endurashield IV (Semi-Gloss) 74 Endurashield IV(Gloss) 2. 1-component self priming Modified-Epoxy recommended for concrete. a. Tnemec Series 55 Tneme Crete 3. Polyurethane as a finish coat should be proceeded by a coat of epoxy. 2.04 INTERIOR COATING MATERIALS A. Primers: 1. Metal primer recommended for use over ferrous and non-ferrous metal or aluminum under 2-component high performance polyamidoamine epoxy. a. Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 2. Metal primer(tie coat)recommended for use over factory finished equipment under 2-part pigmented polyurethane and/or epoxy coatings. a. Tnemec Series 27 Typoxy -- B. Finish Coat: 1. 2-component high performance polyamidoamine epoxy coating recommended over ferrous and non-ferrous metal, aluminum, concrete and concrete floors. a. Tnemec Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II (1) SWC: B50W3 Galvite Paint White(for galvanized metal). (2) SWC: (No primer required for aluminum). 09800-5 2. 1-component self priming Acrylic Emulsion recommended for concrete. — a. Tnemec Series 6 Tneme Cryl 3. Do not use epoxy as a topcoat on galvanized metal,use acrylic. C. Finish Coats: 1. High performance polyamide epoxy coating(HIPAC): High gloss polyamide epoxy coating recommended for use over concrete, concrete masonry units,wood, ferrous metal, galvanized metal or aluminum. a. SWC: B67W30/B60V3 Tileclad II Coating(not recommended for wood). b. TCI: Series 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline(not recommended for wood). 2.05 INTERIOR/EXTERIOR COATING MATERIALS A. Finish Coats: 1. High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): High gloss polyamide epoxy coating recommended for use on concrete floors. a. SWC: TCII Epoxy — PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready for work as instructed by the product manufacturer. — B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. 1. Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Contractor. 2. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the.applicator. 3. Starting of coating work will be construed as acceptance of surfaces within any particular area. Do not paint over any code required labels, equipment identification,performance rating,name or nomenclature plates. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Clean surfaces to be coated before applying coatings or surface treatments. Schedule cleaning and coating application so that dust and other contaminates will not fall on wet, newly coated surfaces. 1. If necessary for complete coating of the items or adjacent surfaces, remove hardware, _ hardware accessories,machined surfaces,plates, lighting fixtures and similar items which are not be coated, or provide surface applied protection prior to surface preparation and coating operations. a. Following completion of coating operations in each space or area,reinstall the items removed using workmen skilled in the trades involved. 09800-6 B. All shop primed metals subject to immersion service that have been exposed to the sunlight for 60 days or longer shall be scarified by brush blasting before field coat application. C. Allow new concrete to cure a minimum 28 days. D. Perform preparation procedures for each substrate in strict accordance with paint manufacturer's written instructions and as outlined in the following schedule: 1. Cl: SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning. a. The removal of all visible oil, grease, soil,drawing and cutting compounds and other soluble contaminants from surfaces with solvents or commercial cleaners using various methods of cleaning such as wiping,dipping, steam cleaning or vapor degreasing. 2. C2: SSPC-SP2 Hand Tool Cleaning-Not Used. 3. C3: SSPC-SP3 Power Tool Cleaning-Not Used. 4. C4: Pressure Wash a. The entire surface shall be high pressure washed at a minimum 1500 psi, removing all loose paint, dirt or foreign matter. Upon completion of pressure washing procedure,rinse all areas with potable water and allow to dry. Dryness of surface shall be verified by use of polyethylene moisture test or a reading of 17%or less utilizing a moisture meter. 5. C5: Concrete/Gypsum a. Prepare Cementitious surfaces of concrete,concrete block, cement plaster and mineral fiber board to be painted by removing all efflorescence,chalk, dust, laitance,release agents, curing compounds, dirt, grease, oils and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Scrape and grind fins and protrusions flush with surface. Rake mortar joints clean. 6. C6: SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning-Not Used. 7. C7: SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4 Brush-Off Blast Cleaning-Not Used. 8. C8: High Pressure Wash a. The entire surface shall be high pressure(minimum 2500 psi)washed with a biodegradable,phosphate and residue free additive. A stiff bristle brush shall be used to assist in the removal of all dirt,mildew, dust and other foreign matter. 9. C9: Acid Etching a. Remove residual dust and dirt with water using a high pressure hose. Remove excess water and allow concrete to dry until the surface is damp. Uniformly apply a solution of 1 part Muriatic Acid and 2 -4 parts fresh water,utilizing low pressure spray equipment or sprinkling cans. When bubbling begins to subside, immediately rinse with clean water while scrubbing with a stiff bristle broom. Test with pH paper and continue the rinsing operation until a pH of 7 or higher is obtained. Allow floor to dry thoroughly before coating. 09800-7 10. C10: SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2 Near-White Metal Blast Cleaning — a. The removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust,mill scale rust,paint, oxides, corrosion products and other foreign matter by compressed air nozzle blasting, _ centrifugal wheels or other specified method. Discoloration caused by certain stains shall be limited to no more than 5%of each square inch of surface area. A blast profile of 1.5 -2.0 mils shall be achieved. 11. Cl l: Wood-Not Used. 12. C12: Concrete(Severe Exposure, including immersion) a. Abrasive blast all surfaces to remove all laitance and solid contaminants. Blasting shall be performed sufficiently close to the surface so as to open up surface voids,bugholes, air pockets and other subsurface irregularities. 13. C13: SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal -Not Used. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Coatings listed are based on products manufactured by Tnemec Company. Names and numbers shown on the following schedule are for the convenience identifying specific coating and are not intended to preclude the use of any other manufacturer's product or procedures. They are given for the purpose of establishing a type and grade of material required and the quality of — construction and workmanship. Equivalent materials may be submitted providing they meet or exceed the following ASTM testing requirements. 1. Abrasion: Method ASTM D4060 2. Adhesion: Method ASTM D4541 _ 3. Humidity: Method ASTM D4585 4. Salt Spray Fog: Method ASTM B 117 5. Fresh Water Immersion B. "Mils"indicated shall be minimum dry film thicknesses(DFT). C. Refer to Article 3.02 for detailed procedures of surface preparation. D. Material Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare materials in compliance with the coating manufacturer's directions. 1. Do not mix materials produced by different manufacturers,unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's instructions. E. Protect his work at all times,and shall protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of his work. Upon completion of the work,he shall remove all coating spots from floors,glass and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others and shall leave his part of the work in a clean, orderly and acceptable condition. F. Remove and protect name plates,hardware,accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, factory finished work and similar items, or provide ample in-place protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items. — 09800-8 G. Remove electrical panel box covers and doors before painting walls. Coat separately and reinstall after all coating is dry. H. All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly applied and flowed-on smoothly to avoid runs, sags,holidays and air bubbles. I. Coverage and hide shall be complete. When color, stain, dirt or undercoats show through final coat,the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the coating film is of uniform finish, �- color, appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to the Owner. J. All coats shall be dry to manufacturer's recommendations before applying succeeding coats. K. All suction spots or"hot spots"in cement after the application of the first coat shall be touched up before applying the second coat. 1. SC-1: Steel Surfaces(Non-Submerged)Copper, and ductile iron. Lintels and doors. a. Surface Preparation: C6: Shop Primer: 37H78 H.S. Chem Prime 2.5 mils Spot Prime after erection: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 mils Finish Coat (Interior): 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 5.0 mils (Exterior): 75 Endurashield IV 3.0 mils Total Minimum DFT (Interior): 7.0 mils (Exterior): 6.0 mils 2. SC-2: Steel Surfaces(Submerges,Non-Potable) a. Surface Preparation: C10 Shop Primer: 37H78 H.S. Chem Prime 2.5 mils Finish: First Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0-8.0 mils Second Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0-8.0 mils Total Minimum DFT 12.0-16.0 mils 3. SC-3: Not Used. 4. SC-4: Not Used. 5. SC-5: Not Used. 6. SC-6: Interior concrete(non-submerged) Surfaces of concrete walls,concrete ceilings. 09800-9 a. Surface Preparation: C5 b. Finish: First Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0 mils (Sprayed and Backrolled) Second Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 6.0 mils Total Minimum DFT 12.0 mils 7. SC-7: Not Used. 8. SC-8: Not Used. 9. SC-9: Factory finished equipment except switchgear shall be coated as follows: — a. Surface Preparation: Cl and C3 Primer: 27 Typoxy 2.0 mils b. Finish: (Interior): 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 4.0 mils (Exterior): 75 Endurashield IV 3.0 mils 10. SC-10: Not Used. 11. SC-11: PVC and Fiberglass Pipes and Ducts a. Surface Preparation: Sand to produce matte fmish. b. Finish: Cl Primer: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 mils Finish Coat: 69 Hi-Build Epoxoline II 3.0 mils Total Minimum DFT 6.0 mils 3.04 COLOR CODING A. Provide the color coating as selected by A/E and Owner. END OF SECTION 09800 09800-10 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. -- 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation,painting and finishing of exposed interior and exterior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation,priming and finish coats specified in this section are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections. B. Paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in schedules, except where a surface or material is specifically indicated not to be painted or is to remain natural. Where an item or surface is not specifically mentioned,paint the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If color or finish is not designated,the Architect will select from standard colors or finishes available. 1. Painting includes field-painting exposed base and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding),hangers, exposed steel and iron work and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Painting is not required on pre-finished items, finished metal surfaces,concealed surfaces, operating parts and labels. D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for shop-priming ferrous metal. 2. Division 8 Section"Standard Steel Doors and Frames"for shop-priming steel doors and frames. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Paint"includes coating system materials,primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.04. SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to those indicated for the Project that have resulted in a construction record of successful in-service performance. 09900-1 B. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide primers and undercoat paint produced by the same manufacturer as the finish coats. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in the manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg.F. (7 deg. C.). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean -` condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling,mixing and application. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 deg.F. (10 deg. C.) and 90 deg.F. (32 deg. C.). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 deg.F. (7 deg. C.) and 95 deg.F. (35 deg. C.). C. Do not apply paint in snow,rain, fog or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg.F. (3 deg. C.)above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by the manufacturer during _ application and drying periods. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Devoe and Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 09900-2 2. Diamond Vogel(D.Vogel). 3. Fuller O'Brien(Fuller). 4. The Glidden Company(Glidden). 5. Iowa Paint Mfg. Co.,Inc. (Iowa Paint). -- 6. Benjamin Moore and Co. (Moore). 7. PPG Industries,Pittsburgh Paints(PPG). 8. Pratt and Lambert(P&L). 9. The Sherwin-Williams Company(S-W). 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers,primers, finish coat materials and related materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide the manufacturer's best-quality trade sale paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish the manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Architect from the manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 2.03 MASONRY BLOCK FILLER A. High-Performance Block Filler: Heavy-duty block fillers used for filling open textured interior and exterior concrete masonry block before application of top coats: 1. Block filler under high performance 2-component polyamide epoxy coatings: a. Iowa Paint: 3005 Latex Block Filler b. Glidden: 5318 Ultra-Hide c. S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler,B42W46 d. Tnemec: 54-660 Epoxy Masonry Filler 2.04 PRIMERS A. Primers: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated primers that are compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. 09900-3 B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,prime coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Gypsum Drywall Primer a. Iowa Paint 515 One-O-Seal b. Tnemec Primer 66-1211 Epoxiline Primer 2. Concrete Block Primer a. Iowa Paint 3005 Latex Block Primer b. Tnemec Primer 66-1211 Epoxiline Primer 3. Ferrous Metal Primers: Alkyd-type primers used under high-gloss alkyd enamels. a. D.Vogel: P.N. 5521 -Rust Inhibitive Primer b. Iowa Paint: 1064 Rust Inhibitive Primer c. Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163 d. PPG: 6-612 Speedhide Inhibitive White Primer e. P&L: Effector Primer Red or White f. S-W: Kern Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W1 4. Galvanized Metal Primers: Primer used under gloss alkyd enamels, interior flat latex -- paints and odorless, semigloss or gloss alkyd enamels. a. D. Vogel: D.V.P10602 Galvanized Primer b. Iowa Paint: 1069 Galvanized Primer c. Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155 d. PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer e. P&L: P&L Interior Time Primer f. S-W: Galvite B50W3 2.05 EXTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated fmish-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, fmish coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant,high-gloss enamel,used on exterior ferrous metal for a high-gloss alkyd enamel fmish. 09900-4 a. Iowa Paint: 480 Alkyd/Urethane Enamel b. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel#133 c. PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel d. P &L: Effector Enamel e. S-W: B56 Silicone Alkyd Enamel 2. Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Weather-resistant,high-gloss enamel,used on galvanized metal for a high-gloss alkyd finish. a. Iowa Paint: 18835 Waterborne Industrial Enamel b. Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel#133 c. PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel d. P&L: Effecto Enamel e. S-W: Industrial Enamel B-54 Series 206. INTERIOR FINISH PAINT MATERIAL A. Finish Paint: Provide the manufacturer's recommended factory-formulated finish-coat materials that are compatible with the substrate and undercoats indicated. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, finish coat materials that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): Satin finish coating over drywall and concrete masonry units. a. Iowa Paint: 16470/16473 1PM Gloss Epoxy b. Glidden: Y-5240 Chemical-Resistant Epoxy c. P &L: Palguard Epoxy Coating d. S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series e. Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 2. Interior, Semigloss,Latex Enamel-Based Paint: Ready-mixed,latex-based paint for a semigloss finish used over ferrous metal and zinc-coated(galvanized)metal surfaces. a. Iowa Paint: 302 Series Semigloss Enamel b. PPG: 27 Line Wallhhide Semigloss Enamel c. P&L Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel d. S-W: D.M.200 Alkyd Semigloss 09900-5 PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. Surfaces receiving paint must be thoroughly dry before paint is applied. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates primed by other. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories,plates,machined surfaces,lighting fixtures and similar items already installed that are not to be painted, or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting. Remove these items, if necessary,to completely paint the items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting operations in each space or area,have items reinstalled by workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease prior to cleaning. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to the manufacturer's instructions for each particular substrate conditions and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and re-prime. Notify Architect in writing about anticipated problems using the specified finish-coat material with substrates primed by others. D. Ferrous Metals: Clean un-galvanized ferrous metal surfaces that have not been shop-coated; remove oil,grease, dirt,loose mill scale and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with recommendations of the Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 1. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat -- before painting. 2. Touch-up base areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, _ clean with solvents recommended by the paint manufacturer and touch-up with the same primer as the shop coat. E. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with non-petroleum-based solvents so that the surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. 09900-6 F. Materials Preparation: Carefully mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's directions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density; stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, — strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by the paint manufacturer and only within recommended — limits. G. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat where multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the fmish coat,but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. B. Do not paint over dirt,rust, scale,grease,moisture, scuffed surfaces or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments and fmishes are indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of the application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended by the manufacturer. Sand between applications where sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to the manufacturer's directions. 4. Apply additional coats if undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint until paint film is of uniform finish,color and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices,welds and exposed fasteners, receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 5. The term exposed surfaces includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers,covers for finned tube radiation, grilles and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required,to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 6. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final installation of equipment,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 7. Paint interior surfaces of ducts,where visible through registers or grilles,with a flat, nonspecular black paint. 8. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 9. Finish exterior doors on tops,bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces. 09900-7 10. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop-primed and touch-up painted. _ C. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. D. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush,roller, spray or other applicators according to the manufacturer's directions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the material applied. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet,velvet back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by _. the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. E. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials no thinner than the manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. F. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer,to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime-coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. G. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks or other surface imperfections. H. Pigmented(Opaque)Finishes: Completely cover to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting,holidays, laps,brush marks,runs, sags,ropiness or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not complying with specified requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean-up: At the end of each work day,remove empty cans, rags, rubbish and other discarded paint materials from the site. B. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not, against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to the Architect. 09900-8 B. Provide"Wet Paint"signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations. 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch-up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated: 1. Ferrous Metal: Primer is not required on shop-primed items. a. Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two finish coats over primer. (1) Primer: Synthetic rust-inhibitive primer. D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 1064 Rust Inhibitive Metal Primer Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163 PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer P&L: Effecto Rust-Inhibiting Primer S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2B50W1 (2) First and Second Coats: (Gloss alkyd enamel) D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 480 Alkyd Urethane Enamel Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel#133 PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel P&L: Effecto Enamel S-W: B56 Silicone Alkyd Enamel 2. Zinc-Coated Metal: a. High-Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Two Finish coats over primer. (1) Primer: Galvanized metal primer D.Vogel: P10 602 Galvanized Primer Iowa Paint: 1069 Waterborne Galvanized Primer Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155 PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer P&L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: Galvite B50W3 (2) First and Second Coats: Glass alkyd enamel D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 18835 Waterborne Industrial Enamel Moore: Impervo High-Gloss Enamel#133 PPG: 54 Line Quick-Dry Enamel P&L: Effecto Enamel S-W: Industrial Enamel B54 Series 09900-9 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated: 1. Interior Primer and Sealers: Provide factory formulated prime and seal coat materials compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. a. Sealer and Primer Over Drywall Iowa Paint: 515 One-O-Seal Tnemec Primer: 66-1211 Epoxiline Primer 2. Finish Coats: Provide factory formulated, finish coats compatible with the substrate and prime,base or intermediate coat indicated. a. High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): Satin finish coating over drywall and concrete masonry units. Iowa Paint: 16470/16473 1PM Gloss Epoxy P&L: Palguard Epoxy Coating S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 3. Concrete Masonry Units a. Interior Block Fillers: Provide factory formulated block filler materials for coarse and porous concrete masonry block surfaces,that are compatible with the substrate,primer and finish coating materials indicated. b. Block filler under high performance 2-component polyamide epoxy coatings: Iowa Paint: 3005 Latex Block Filler Glidden: 5318 Ultra-Hide _ S-W: Heavy-Duty Block Filler,B42W46 Tnemec: 54-660 Epoxy Masonry Filler c. Interior Primers and Sealers: Provide factory formulated prime and seal coat -' materials compatible with the substrate and finish coats indicated. d. Primer Over Block: Iowa Paint: 3005 Latex Block Primer Tnemec: 66-1211 Epoxoline Primer p— e. Finish Coats: Provide factory formulated, finish coats compatible with the substrate and prime,base or intermediate coat indicated. (1) High Performance Polyamide Epoxy Coating(HIPAC): Satin finish coating over drywall and concrete masonry units. Iowa Paint: 16470/16473 1PM Gloss Epoxy Glidden: Y-5240 Chemical-Resistant Epoxy P&L: Palguard Epoxy Coating S-W: Tile-Clad II Epoxy Enamel B62 Series Tnemec: Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline 09900-10 4. Ferrous Metal: a. Semigloss Enamel Finish: Two coats over primer with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. (1) Primer: Synthetic, quick-drying,rust-inhibiting primer. D. Vogel: P.V. 5521 Rust Inhibitive Primer — Iowa Paint: 1064 Rust Inhibitive Primer Moore: IronClad Retardo Rust-Inhibitive Paint#163 PPG: 6-208 Red Inhibitive Metal Primer P&L: Effecto Rust-Inhibitive Primer S-W: Kem Kromik Metal Primer B50N2/B50W1 (2) Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat D.Vogel: C.V. 1401 Iowa Paint: 301 Enamel Undercoat Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217 PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater P&L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200 (3) Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss,odorless,alkyd enamel D.Vogel: C.S. 1302 Semigloss Alkyd Iowa Paint: 302 Series Semigloss Enamel Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel#235 PPG: 27 Line Wallhide Semigloss Enamel P&L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel S-W: D.M. 200 Alkyd Semigloss 5. Zinc-Coated Metal: a. Semigloss Finish: Two coats over primer,with total dry film thickness not less than 2.5 mils. (1) Primer: Galvanized Metal Primer D. Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 1069 Acrylic Galvanized Primer Moore: IronClad Galvanized Metal Latex Primer#155 PPG: 6-215/216 Speedhide Galvanized Steel Primer P&L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: Galvite B50W3 (2) Undercoat: Interior enamel undercoat D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 501 Alkyd Enamel Undercoat Moore: Moore's Alkyd Enamel Underbody#217 PPG: 6-6 Speedhide Quick-Dry Enamel Undercoater P&L: Interior Trim Primer S-W: ProMar 200 Alkyd Enamel Undercoater B49W200 09900-11 (3) Finish Coat: Interior, semigloss, odorless, alkyd enamel D.Vogel: No recommendation Iowa Paint: 302 Series Semigloss Enamel Moore: Moore's Satin Impervo Enamel#235 PPG: 27 Line Walllude Semigloss Enamel P&L: Cellu-Tone Alkyd Satin Enamel S-W: D.M. 200 Alkyd Semigloss END OF SECTION 09900 09900-12 SECTION 11200 PROCESS EQUIPMENT-GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions,and Special Provisions Sections apply to the work of this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. The work under this Division and following sections of the specifications consist of all labor, material,tools and skills necessary for the installation,testing and adjustment of the various items of process equipment required under this contract. Each item shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. B. The following equipment is included under this Division and is to be provided by Others under a separate Contract No. 750. See the Special Provisions and Construction Plans for a further identification of what is to be provided under this Contract No. 720 and what is to be provided and delivered by Others under a separate Contract No. 750. 1. Section 11216-Non-clog Submersible Pumps and Accessories. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All furnished equipment and systems shall conform fully in every respect to the requirements of ' the respective parts and sections of the drawings and specifications. Equipment which is a "standard product"with the manufacturer,unless noted otherwise, shall be modified,redesigned from the standard mode if necessary, or shall be furnished with special features,accessories, materials or finishes as may be necessary to conform to the requirements of the specifications. B. All steel design and fabrication shall be in accordance with the prevailing practices of the American Institute of Steel Construction(AISC). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings for all items of mechanical equipment specified hereunder and related accessory items shall be provided by Others under Contract No.750 for approval as specified in the General Conditions of this specification. Shop drawings shall be specific to this particular project and shall be so noted and referenced to the particular piece of equipment and respective process system. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS -- A. The Contract Documents(drawings)indicate the required size and general arrangement of all piping and equipment. The final exact dimensions and configuration will have to be determined by the exact equipment furnished. 11200-1 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for taking and/or verifying any dimensions of the in-place existing or new structure and piping or equipment required for the proper fabrication and installation of all new equipment and the necessary connections. C. The Contractor shall deteinilne and be responsible for the proper locations and character of all anchor bolts,inserts,hangers, chases, sleeves and other openings. D. The drawings and specifications are complementary and what is called for in either one shall be as binding as if called for in both. 1.06 GUARANTEE A. All equipment installation shall be guaranteed as specified under the General and Supplementary _ Conditions as specified herein. Guarantee on all equipment shall start after formal acceptance of the project by the City. PART 2: PRODUCTS 2.01 ANCHOR BOLTS A. The Contract 750 Pump and Control Equipment Provider shall furnish all anchor bolts of ample size and strength required to securely anchor the pump discharge elbows, guide rails and access covers.This Contract No. 720 contractor shall supply all other anchor bolts. Bolts,washers and hex nuts shall be 304 stainless steel unless noted otherwise. Expansion-type anchors will not be acceptable. Anchor bolts shall be set by template and protected from misalignment by the Contractor. Equipment shall be placed on the foundations, leveled, shimmed,bolted down and — grouted with a non-shrinking grout. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 FACTORY TESTS A. Process equipment shall be subject to factory testing by Others under Contract No. 750 in accordance with requirements specified for the particular equipment. 3.02 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect all material or equipment as it is received to determine damage and/or missing parts. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider,under Contract No. 750 shall be responsible to replace damaged and missing items that he provides under Contract No. 750. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Each item shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations,instructions and directions. All installed equipment shall be properly protected during subsequent construction operation. B. Oil and grease necessary for initial operation of pump and controls shall be provided by Others under Contract No. 750 in quantities and grades recommended by the manufacturer. C. All material shall be new,undamaged and conform to the latest standards listed. 11200-2 ._ D. The Contractor shall provide all scaffolding required for the proper installation of this work in conformance with the standards of any local and state safety codes applying to scaffolding. E. Cooperate with other trades to avoid interferences in the installation of this work. Install all equipment and systems so as not to delay progress of construction and correlate with other trades to avoid delay. Should differences of opinion develop,the A/E's decision will be final. F. The Contractor shall keep premises clean and orderly during installation of this work,remove rubbish periodically and as may be directed by the A/E. Upon completion of this part of the project,remove all dirt, debris,tools, scaffolding, etc.,used or resulting from this work. 3.04 TESTING AND OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT A. It is anticipated that portions of facilities will be in operation before final acceptance of the completed facilities,therefore,the following procedure shall be followed on all major equipment. Also,refer to specific equipment section. B. All process,mechanical and electrical equipment,including related control systems, shall be subjected to preliminary operation and testing by the Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 in conjunction with this Contract No. 720 Contractor before the individual facilities and systems are put into operation. Tests shall be made to determine whether the equipment has been properly assembled, aligned,adjusted, wired or connected. Any changes, adjustments or replacements of equipment which are due to errors or omissions on the part of the _ Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 or this Contract No. 720 Contractor, or which may be otherwise necessary to comply with the requirements of this Contract, shall be done without additional cost to the Owner. Upon completion of the checking and adjustment,the Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 in conjunction with this Contract No. 720 Contractor shall demonstrate that each separate piece of equipment in each system of related items of mechanical equipment and the related instrumentation and control equipment operate in accordance with the requirements of the contract specifications. Where no specific performance requirements are stated in the specifications,the test shall show that the equipment operates in accordance with normal application practice of the equipment. The demonstration test shall show that the equipment operates smoothly and without excessive noise or vibration,that the equipment is responsive to manual and automatic controls,that control -- and protective devices are properly set,that the equipment will run on a controlled or intermittent basis when such operation is intended. The demonstration test for each piece of equipment shall include checkout from each remote control point. All alarm systems and safety lockout systems shall also be demonstrated for proper function along with all process instrumentation and controls. — C. The demonstration test shall be arranged by the Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 in conjunction with this Contract No. 720 Contractor; however, the scheduling shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 in conjunction with this Contract No. 720 Contractor shall provide personnel from the various trades involved to operate and demonstrate the equipment. D. During the testing of equipment,the Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 in conjunction with this Contract No. 720 Contractor shall arrange for the presence of qualified representatives of the manufacturers of all the various pieces of equipment and instrumentation. 11200-3 E. After the equipment has been tested, adjusted and finally accepted,but before final acceptance of entire project,the Owner may place portions of the project into operation. In this instance,the guarantee period will start from the date of written notice of acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. At this acceptance time,the Owner will assume the operation and maintenance of the equipment. 3.05 INSPECTION START-UP AND ADJUSTMENT A. The Contractor shall place the various items of equipment into operation, along with the related control piping systems. B. Schedule for such start-up of the equipment and pumping systems will occur during the duration of the contract period and prior to final completion and acceptance of the overall project. After _ satisfactory start-up of these individual systems, including all of the related equipment,they will remain in continuous or intermittent operation as required by the Owner. C. All equipment and accessories shall be adjusted and calibrated prior to any start-up. Any equipment placed into temporary operation prior to final completion of the total project shall be re-adjusted and/or calibrated. D. During the period thus provided,the Owner will arrange to have a full-time operating personnel available, and these operators will be paid by the Owner. E. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 shall inspect the completed pump and control installation,make all necessary adjustments, corrections or modifications prior to start-up. -- 1. Verify that adequate clearance is available to permit maintenance and repair. 2. Assure that discharge tube channels and equipment is clean of debris which might clog equipment. 3. Check all overhead and leak detection sensors. 4. Check for sufficient lubrication. 5. Check for correct rotation. 6. Check for correct operation of flap valves. 7. Instruct Owner's personnel in proper operation and maintenance. F. After start-up is authorized by the A/E,the Pump and Control Equipment Provider under Contract No. 750 shall supervise start-up procedures. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider shall make all final adjustments necessary for the intended use of the equipment and certify in writing that the equipment has been properly installed and adjusted and is operating satisfactorily. 1. Check for excessive noise and vibration. 2. Check for high bearing temperature. 3. Check temperature of packing glands or mechanical seals. 11200-4 4. Check for motor overloading,take ampere readings. 5. Check out safety devices,limit switches and timers. 6. Select and optimize operating variables. 7. Give initial instruction to Owner's personnel in operation of the equipment. END OF SECTION 11200 11200-5 SECTION 11216 — NON-CLOG SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1: GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. General Specifications for Construction and Supplemental General Specifications for Construction,General Special Provisions, and Special Provisions apply to the work of this Section. B. For electric control center, electrical equipment, and related items, see Division 16. C. The General Provisions as listed in Section 11200 apply to work in this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. This Contract No. 720 Contractor shall install and place in satisfactory operating condition submersible waste water pumps and controls,complete with sealing discharge connections, guide bars,and all accessories as hereinafter specified,and as shown on the drawings and described below. Said pumps and controls are to be provided by Others under a separate Contract No. 750. '- a. The following describes what equipment is to be provided by Others under Contract No. 750 and installed by this Contract No. 720 Contractor included in the Base Bid and Alternate Bids 1 and 2. 1. Base Bid. The Base Bid includes all access doors and covers for all four(4) pumps, all discharge elbows for all four(4)pumps and all liquid level _ sensing and signaling equipment for all four(4)pumps.The Base Bid also includes one(1) small pump (Pump No. 1 in the Plans)and one(1)large pump(Pump No. 2 in the Plans)and the complete operating system for these pumps,including the adjustable frequency drive(AFD)for Pump No. 2 and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete,properly functioning pumping system for pumps 1 and 2. 2. Alternate No. 1 Bid. The Alternate No. 1 Bid includes one(1) additional large pump (pump No. 3 in the Plans) and the necessary additions to the operating system to operate this pump with Pumps 1 and 2, including one(1) — additional adjustable frequency(AFD) and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete,properly functioning pumping system for pumps 1,2 and 3. 3. Alternate No. 2 Bid. The Alternate No.2 Bid includes two (2)additional large pumps (Pumps 3 and 4 in the Plans)and the necessary additions to the operating system to operate Pumps 1,2, 3 and 4,including two (2) additional adjustable frequency drives(AFD's)and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete,properly functioning pumping system for pumps 1, 2, 3 and 4. B. The installation of all equipment and systems shall conform fully in every respect to the requirements of the respective parts and sections of the plans and specifications. Equipment — which is a"standard product"with the manufacturer shall be modified,redesigned from the standard mode, if necessary, or shall be furnished with special features, accessories,materials, or finished as may be necessary to conform to the requirements of the specifications. 11216-1 1.03 OPERATING CONDITIONS -- A. Small Simplex Pump-Provided by Others under separate Contract No. 750 and installed by this Contract No. 720 Contractor. The pump shall be capable of pumping 6,000 gpm at 41.6 feet TDH(32.6 feet static)and shall be a"KSB"or"Flygt" 14"heavy duty submersible non-clog pump."Flygt"and"KSB"are named, Basis of Bid manufacturers for this Contract. B. Large Submersible Pumps-Provided by Others under separate Contract No. 750 and installed by this Contract No. 720 Contractor. a. The pump station has been designed to include three(3) submersible,non-clog pumps of identical size,type, flow and TDH that will be capable of pumping a combined stormwater flow of 63,000 gpm when all three(3)pumps are pumping at the same time (excluding the one(1)-6,000 gpm pump). Said three(3)large pumps shall also be capable of operating satisfactorily singularly and as duplex pumps within their respective and combined published pump curves for the static and total heads to be experienced with the valving and piping shown on the plans from the pumps through the force main to the outlet.The calculated flow and head requirements for these pumps are as follows: Pumps"On" Total Flow Individual Static TDH Together gpm Pump Flow Head Gpm Ft FT 1 27,000 27,000 30 58 2 48,000 24,000 30 67 3 63,000 21,000 30 76 b. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider shall provide these large submersible pumps as described for the Base Bid and Alternate Bid items.These pumps shall be"Flygt"or "KSB"24"heavy duty submersible non-clog pumps and shall be installed by this -- Contract No. 720 Contractor. C. Each pump shall be designed as a completely submersible unit capable of pumping storm water, fibrous material,and spherical solids no smaller than 4 inches in diameter. D. The design shall be such that pumping units will be automatically connected to the discharge piping when lowered into place on the discharge connection. The pumps shall be easily removable by one operator with a crane for inspections or service,requiring no bolts,nuts or other fastenings to be removed for this purpose,and no need for personnel to enter pump wet well. 1.04 PUMP TEST-AT MANUFACTURER'S FACILITY-BY OTHERS A. Each pump shall be fully tested on clear water at the manufacturer's plant before shipment. Tests shall consist of checking the unit at its rated speed,head, capacity, efficiency and brake horsepower,and at such other conditions of head and capacity to properly establish the performance curve. Minimum hydrostatic test pressure shall be 1.5 times the shutoff head at maximum design pump speed. The Standards of the Hydraulic Institute shall govern the procedure and calculations for these tests. 11216-2 PART 2: PRODUCTS — 2.01 PUMPS-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. The stator casing, oil casing and impeller shall be of grey iron construction with all parts coming into contact with the storm water protected by a coat of rubber-asphalt paint. All external bolts and nuts shall be of stainless steel. The impeller shall be protected by a wear ring. The impeller — shall be of a single or multi-vane,non-clog design, capable of passing solids, fibrous material, and heavy sludge,and constructed with long through-way with no acute turns. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced. B. Shafts shall be stainless steel and supported by two heavy-duty bearings for reduced vibration and wear. C. Each pump shall be provided with a tandem double mechanical seal running in an oil reservoir, composed of two separate lapped face seals,the lower seal unit shall consist of one stationary and one rotating tungsten-carbide or silicone carbide ring. The upper seal unit shall be as supplied as — manufacture standard. The compression spring shall be protected against exposure to the pumped liquid. The pumped liquid shall be sealed from the oil reservoir by one face seal and the oil reservoir from the motor chamber by the other. The seals shall require neither maintenance nor — adjustment, and shall be easily replaced. Conventional double mechanical seals with a single spring adjustment,and shall be easily replaced. Conventional double mechanical seals with a single spring between the rotating faces,requiring constant differential pressure to effect sealing -- and subject to opening and penetration by pumping forces shall not be considered equal to the tandem seal specified and required. Pumps with only a single seal will not be acceptable. D. Each pump shall have a leakage sensor mounted in the stator housing. The sensor shall be connected via submersible cable to the control panel to alarm a seal failure when liquid is sensed. 2.02 SEALING DISCHARGE CONNECTION-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Sealing of the pumping unit to the discharge connection shall be accomplished by a simple linear downward motion of the pump with the entire weight of the pumping unit guided to and wedging tightly against the angled discharge connection;no portion of the pump shall bear directly on the — floor of the sump and no rotary motion of the pump shall be required for sealing. B. The upper or sliding guide bracket shall be an integral part of the pumping unit and the pump — casing shall have a connection with yoke to connect with the cast iron discharge connection. 2.03 MOTORS-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Pump motor shall be housed in an air filled watertight casing and shall have Class F insulated windings which shall be moisture resistant. Pump motors shall have cooling characteristics suitable to permit continuous operation,in a totally,partially or non-submerged condition. The pump shall be capable of running dry in a totally dry condition under full load without damage, for extended periods. Each unit shall be provided with an adequately designed cooling system. Pump motors shall be submersible type. Thermal sensors shall be used to monitor stator temperatures. The stator shall be equipped with thermal switches, embedded in the end coils of the stator winding(one switch in each stator phase). These shall be used in conjunction with and supplemental to external motor overload protection and wired to the control panel. — B. Operating Voltage-460 VAC,three-phase. Motors shall be capable of satisfactory operation under incoming power voltages ranging from 456-504 volts. — 11216-3 C. The combined service factor shall be a minimum of 1.10. D. Required thermal sensor relays and seal failure sensors shall be supplied for each submersible pump. Relays shall have single pole,double throw(SPDT) output contacts. Coordinate all requirements with the control supplier. 2.04 PROTECTIVE DEVICES-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Furnish temperature sensor relay and seal failure electrode relay for each alarm circuit for each pump. The equipment shall be furnished to the Control System supplier for installation in the control panel. B. The relays furnished under this Section shall provide a contact output for each alarm condition. Contacts shall be rated 5 Amps at 120 VAC,minimum. C. Coordinate all requirements and scheduling with the Control System supplier. Provide complete technical data and wiring information. D. The protective circuitry and equipment shown on the Drawings are based on the specified"Flygt" or"KSB"equipment. Pump and Control Equipment Provider shall revise the circuitry and equipment for alternate manufacturers, if approved. 2.05 PUMP LIFTING CHAINS-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Each pump provided under Base Bid and Alternate Bids shall be fitted with stainless steel lifting chains of adequate strength and length to permit raising the pump accessories for inspection and removal. 2.06. POWER CABLES-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Each pump provided under Base Bid and Alternate Bids shall be equipped with the necessary length of motor and control cable suitable for submersible pump applications. Wire braid sleeve cable supports shall be provided for attachment to the underside of the access frame. For additional requirements, see Division 16. 2.07 PUMP GUIDE BARS/CABLES-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. The Pump and Control Equipment Provider shall furnish and install guide bars for each pump of the size as required by the equipment manufacturer to permit raising and lowering the pump. Guide bars shall be standard weight 316 stainless steel pipe extending from the lower guide holders on the pump discharge connections to the upper guide holders mounted on the access frame with a minimum of one intermediate stainless steel guide bar holder 2.08 ACCESS COVERS-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. Furnish and install access covers at the pump station as shown on the drawings. The covers shall be constructed of diamond pattern plate aluminum capable of supporting live loads of at least 300 pounds per square foot. All hardware shall be stainless steel,including hinges, a hasp, safety chains across opening,hold-open arms,lift handle, and other necessary hardware. Door shall include compression stainless spring assist for easy operation and an automatic hold-open arm with release handle. The frame at the pump station shall include upper pump guide holder, cable 11216-4 holder, chain hooks, and both shall be self-draining pump stations. The exterior of the frames -' shall be bituminous coated. PART 3: EXECUTION 3.01 PAINTING-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. All submersible non-clog discharge piping and valves inside the pump station shall be coated with two coats of bitumastic paint. 3.02 PUMP WARRANTY-FOR INFORMATION ONLY-TO BE PROVIDED BY OTHERS A. The pump manufacturer shall warrant the pumps being supplied to the Owner against defects in workmanship and materials for a period of five(5)years from the date of complete satisfactory delivery. The warranty shall be in published form and apply to all similar units. A warranty offered by a representative will not be acceptable in lieu of the manufacturer's warranty. 3.03 SERVICE AND START-UP A. The pump manufacturer shall furnish the services of a field engineer to supervise the installation of pumps, and controls and appurtenant items and to check the installation and supervise start-up of all pumps under the separate Equipment Contract No. 750. This Contract No. 720 Contractor shall coordinate and provide other personnel as necessary to complete this work. -- END OF SECTION 11216 11216-5 ELECTRICAL DIVISION 26 TABLE OF CONTENTS GD-DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 5 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 3 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL 7 SYSTEMS 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL 2 SYSTEMS 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 6 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 2 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 3 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE 2 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES 2 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES 4 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING 4 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING 3 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS 11 Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA Elect Table of Contents SECTION 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS _ PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Basic Electrical Requirements specifically applicable to Electrical Division Sections, in addition to Architectural Division-General Requirements and items shown on elevations on Architectural Drawings. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. This contractor shall give proper authorities all requisite notices relating to work in his charge, obtain official permits, licenses for temporary construction and pay proper fees for it. B. This contractor is to be solely answerable for and shall promptly make good all damage, injury or delay to other contractors, to neighboring premises or to persons or property of the public by himself, by his employees or through any operation under his charge,whether in the contract or extra work. C. No attempt has been made to reproduce in these specifications any of the rules or regulations contained in city, state or federal ordinances and codes pertaining to the work covered by these specifications that the contractor be thoroughly familiar with all such ordinances and codes. D. The fact that said various rules,regulations and ordinances are not repeated in this specification does not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of making the entire installation in accordance with the requirement of those authorities having jurisdiction. E. All work shall comply with the applicable recommendations of: 1. The National Board of Fire Underwriters 2. The ANSI-NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 3. The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 4. The Occupations Safety and Health Act (OSHA) 5. IBC Building Code(current) and any current applicable city building and or electrical codes. 6. Fire Protection: Conform to UFC and NFPA. 7. ANSI/NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. F. Obtain permits and request inspections from authority having jurisdiction. G. Conform to latest approved versions of codes. 1.03 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Install work in locations shown on drawings unless prevented by project conditions. B. Prepare drawings showing proposed rearrangement of work to meet project conditions, including changes to work specified in other sections. Obtain permission of owner and architect/engineer before proceeding. C. This contractor, before submitting his bid, shall visit the site of the project to familiarize himself with locations and conditions affecting his work. D. It is the intent of this specification that the contractor furnish all labor and material required to complete the installation as outlined in the drawings and specifications. No additions to the contract price will be allowed due to the failure of this contractor to properly evaluate the effect of existing conditions on the work to be done under this contract. E. Whenever renovation or remodeling or relocation of existing equipment is included in the contract, it is imperative that all locations of existing wiring conduits, electrical panels, Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - 1 equipment, services and grades be noted on the job site before bid is submitted and that all elevations and grades be verified before roughing in new work. F. This contractor shall provide hole, as necessary,for the installation of his work and in -- accordance with materials other than the structure. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. This contractor shall arrange his work in order that it progresses along with the general construction of the building. B. This contractor shall be kept informed as to the work of other trades engaged in the project and — shall execute his work in such a manner so as not to delay or interfere with progress of other contractors. C. Where space for mechanical and electrical lines and piping is limited, it is imperative that all such trades coordinate their work so as to insure concealment in space provided. Where conflict exists, the engineer shall decide priority of space. If work is not properly coordinated, the engineer may require removal and relocation of work without additional compensation. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. This contractor shall guarantee all of the apparatus, materials, equipment furnished, and labor installed under this contract for a period of one year after date of final acceptance, unless a -- longer period is specified. B. Neither final certificate of payment nor any provisions in the contract documents nor partial or complete occupancy of premises by owner shall constitute an acceptance for work not done in — accordance with contract documents or relieve the contractor of liability in respect to any express warranties or responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship. C. Should any defects arise as the result of defective workmanship or material within the guarantee period set forth,this contractor shall make the necessary correction at his own expense. 1,.06 SUBSTITUTE PRODUCTS A. When the engineer, at the request of the interested parties, including the contractor, supplier and manufacturer, approves substitute products for this project, such products are approved on the assumption that they will equal or exceed the performance of the products specified. B. If such products do not do so after being installed on this project,this contractor shall replace or modify the particular product as necessary to equal the performance of the products specified at no expense to the owner,architect or engineer. C. Request for substitute products shall be received by the architect/engineer before the last addendum has been issued. Requests for substitutions received after this date will not be considered. Substitution requests shall clearly state which products are being considered for substitution. Substitution requests shall include all pertinent product information needed to ' evaluate the substitution as an"equal". 1.07 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching necessary for the installation of his work in all existing and new buildings unless otherwise noted. B. In areas where the integrity of new or existing fire separation assembly/wall is compromised by the work,this contractor shall be responsible to patch and/or seal openings as necessary to maintain and/or return fire separation to rating as required by applicable codes. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -2 C. This contractor shall do all cutting and patching required for his work beyond the remodeled areas unless otherwise noted. All finish work shall include patching to match existing adjacent surfaces. Painting shall be by others. 1.08 CLEANING AND RUBBISH A. This contractor, upon completion of his work,shall remove all rubbish and debris resulting from his operation and shall remove it from site at his own expense. B. As far as his work is concerned, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition. C. This contractor shall maintain the work area each day to prevent hazardous accumulation of waste from his work. 1.09 SEALING AND PENETRATION A. Clearance around the conduit, cable trays, and all other devices or assemblies passing through fire or smoke rated construction shall be sealed to maintain the rated integrity of the construction (1 hr., 2 hrs, etc.). For one-hour rated assemblies, single side patching is permitted. For two-hour rated assemblies, patch both sides of assembly. B. This contractor shall verify rating and location of all such construction with the architectural drawings and seal all penetrations. C. Manufacturer offering products to comply with the requirements include the following: 1. Dow Coming"Silicone RTV Foam" 2. 3-M Corporation"Fire Barrier Caulk and Putty" 3. Thomas&Betts"Flame Safe Fire Stop System" D. Installation of these products are to be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. E. This contractor shall submit shop drawings showing approved sealing assemblies to be utilized on this project. 1.10 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. This contractor shall wire all magnetic starters, thermal protective switches, and speed changing switches furnished under the mechanical contract for all motor driven equipment and install such starters and switches and wire them to their respective motors as a part of the electrical contract. 1.11 ASBESTOS A. At no time shall any product containing asbestos be incorporated into the work. B. If asbestos materials are encountered, report to the owner. The owner will be responsible for asbestos removal. 1.12 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS A. If the contractor stores any hazardous solvents or other materials on the site, he shall obtain copies of the safety data sheets for the materials and post them at the site. He shall inform the owner and all employed of any potential exposure to this material. 1.13 ALTERNATES A. Refer to description of alternate bids under Architectural Specification Sections. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -3 1.14 REVIEW OF MATERIALS A. This contractor shall submit to the engineer for review ten (10) brochure copies giving a complete list of materials,fixtures, devices and panels he proposes to furnish. The brochure — shall contain complete information as to the make of equipment, type, size,capacities, dimensions, and illustration. One of the returned copies shall be kept on the job at all times. B. Checking of submittal drawings by the engineer does not relieve the contractor of the "— responsibility for the accuracy of such drawings and for their conformity to drawings and specifications unless he notifies engineer, in writing, of such deviation at time such drawings are furnished. C. All submittals shall have the date marked on them when the contractor receives them from the supplier. Submittals shall be submitted through the contractor and shall not come direct from the supplier to the architect or engineer.D. This contractor shall mark the date and sign each set. This indicates that each of them have been checked in their entirety before submitting to the engineer. Submittals that are not dated and signed by the contractor will not be accepted or checked and will be marked "resubmit"and _ sent back to the contractor. 1.15 TEST OF SYSTEMS A. This contractor shall, before concealed,test all systems installed under this contract as called for in these specifications and as required by local codes. Tests shall be made in the presence of the engineer, local authorities or their duly authorized representative. Any defects discovered in testing shall be corrected and the tests repeated until all defects are eliminated.B. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damage resulting from defects in the system. C. Each individual feeder circuit shall be tested at the panel and in testing for insulation resistance — to ground;the power equipment shall be connected for proper operation. In no case shall the insulation resistance to ground be less than that required by the National Electrical Code(NEC). 1:16 SCOPE OF WORK — A. This contractor shall furnish all the labor and material necessary to install a complete electrical system for the new building. The system shall include all items of work as outlined in these specifications and on the drawings. — B. All work shall be performed by a well-qualified, licensed electrician with a thorough knowledge of the various systems involved in this building. It shall be this contractor's responsibility to see that his employees are familiar with all the various codes and tests applicable to this work. — C. All equipment shall be new and of the type specified by the engineer unless otherwise noted in these specifications or on the drawings to remain and or be reused. D. The intent of the specifications and drawings is for complete installation of the systems outlined in the specifications and drawings so that at the conclusion of construction the system will be turned over to the owner complete and ready for safe and efficient operation. The specifications and drawings cannot deal individually with the many minute items that may be eventually -- required by the nature of the systems. E. This contractor is required to furnish and install all such items normally included on systems of this type,which,while not mentioned directly herein or on the drawings are obviously essential — to the installation and operation of the system and which are normally furnished on quality installation of this type. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS -4 F. This contractor, before proceeding with any work,shall review the architectural drawings. Any conflict between the electrical and architectural drawings shall be reported to the engineer for clarification. G. If there is a discrepancy between the drawings and the specifications or within either document,the more stringent requirement shall be estimated unless brought to the engineer's attention and an addendum is issued for clarification. — 1.17 DAILY HOUSEKEEPING AND CLEANING A. At the end of each workday,the contractor shall remove all of his debris, rubbish, tools, and surplus materials from the project work area. The work area shall be broom cleaned and left in a neat and orderly condition. The contractor shall not use the owner's waste disposal facility for the removal of debris from the project. B. At end of construction, all equipment shall be cleaned and the premises left in first class condition as far as this contractor's work is concerned. 1.18 UTILITY COMPANY A. Any fees by the utility company are to be a part of the base bid. 1.19 WALL CONTINUITY(1 HR.) A. All items mounted in 1 hr. rated walls requiring an opening larger than a 4"square(16 sq. -' inches) require the 1 hr. rating not be degraded. B. Any branch panel in a 1 hr.wall will require the exterior of the recessed panel be covered with 5/8"fire rated gypsum board. This is true for any device requiring more than a 16 sq. inch opening. 1.20 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. Each contractor is responsible for their own individual trenching and backfilling unless otherwise noted in the drawings or addendum. B. All underground utilities, telephone conduit, parking lot lighting,tunnels, etc shall be exactly located prior to digging. This contractor shall be held responsible for all damages caused by failure to do so. C. Any backfill shall be tamped and compacted to prevent future settling. The backfill shall be -- installed to a smooth and level grade and installed in accordance with local codes. D. All excess dirt shall be cleared from the area and disposed of as directed by the owner. E. Refer to architectural specification sections for additional information. 1.21 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE INSTALLATION A. This contractor is to install conduit serving low voltage cables in conduit PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION NOT USED END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0050 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - 5 SECTION 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Building wire. B. Wiring connectors. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS-Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems(International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. D. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. E. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use ' stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS _ A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1:05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. B. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. Include wire and cable lengths within 10'of length shown. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Okanite 2. Bell/Hubbell#BICC 3. American Insulated Wire 4. General Cable Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES - 1 5. Southwire 6. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. E. Insulation: NFPA 70, type#THHN/THWN-2. All cable installation procedures or sizing shall be based on 75 deg C temperature rating. 2.02 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Burndy 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Thomas&Betts 2. Engineer approved equal. C. Compression Connectors: 1. Burndy 2. Thomas&Betts 3. Engineer approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway over 2"in size or buried below grade before installing wire. _ 3.03 WIRING METHODS A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire,type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway. F. Underground Installations: Use only building wire,type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway. G. Interior Installations: Use only building wire, type#THHN/THWN-2 insulation, in raceway. H. Use wiring methods indicated. Commercial Street Pump Station -- Waterloo, IA 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES -2 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Route wire and cable as required meeting project conditions. B. Install cable in accordance with the NECA"Standard of Installation." C. Use stranded conductors for feeders and branch circuits larger than 10 AWG. D. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power lighting circuits. E. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for control circuits. F. Use#10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet.G. Use#10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere,208/240 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. H. Use#10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere,277 volt branch circuits longer than 300 feet. I. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. J. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire#4 AWG and larger. — K. Protect exposed cable from damage. L. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. M. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment and panel boards. N. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. O. Make splices,taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. P. Use suitable reducing connectors or mechanical connector adaptors for connecting aluminum conductors to copper conductors. Q. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, #6 AWG and larger. Tape • non-insulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150% of insulation rating of — conductor. R. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, #8 AWG and smaller. S. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, #10 AWG and smaller. T. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Specification Section 26 0553- — Identification for Electrical Systems. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. U. Do not multi wire branch circuits. No sharing of neutral. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection and testing.B. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection. C. Measure tightness of bolted connections and compare torque measurements with manufacturer's recommended values. D. Verify continuity of each branch circuit conductor. END OF SECTION — Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0519 ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES -3 SECTION 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Rod electrode and conductors. B. Mechanical connectors. C. Wire. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to properly install a grounding system conductor in all new branch wiring and feeder installations,which shall be in full compliance with all applicable codes as accepted by the authorities having jurisdiction. The secondary distribution system shall include a grounding conductor in all raceways in addition to the return path of the metallic conduit. B. In general,all electrical equipment(metallic conduit, motor frames, panelboards, etc.)shall be bonded together with a green insulated or bare copper system grounding conductor in accordance with specific rules of Article 250 of the NEC and local codes. The bonding -- conductor through the raceway system shall be continuous from main switch ground bus to panel ground bar of each panelboard, and from panel grounding bar of each panelboard to branch circuit equipment and devices. C. All raceways shall have an insulated copper system ground conductor throughout the entire length of circuit installed within conduit in strict accordance with NEC. The grounding conductor shall be included in total conduit fill determining conduit sizes, even though not included or shown on drawings. All grounding conductors that run with feeders in PVC conduit outside of building shall be bare only. D. Provide and install all grounding and bonding as required by the National Electrical Code(NEC) including but not limited to Article 800 of the NEC. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit record documents to accurately record actual locations of grounding electrodes. B. Submit test results of each ground rod. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS -- A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROD ELECTRODE AND CONDUCTORS A. Material: Copper-clad steel. B. Diameter: 5/8 inch. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 C. Length: 10 feet(min). Increase number and/or lengths of ground rod electrodes as required to meet and achieve specified resistance. D. Maintain separation of not less than 8' and not more than 20' between ground rod electrodes. _ 2.02 MECHANICALCONNECTORS A. All grounding connectors shall be in accordance with UL 467 and UL listed for use with rods, conductors, reinforcing bars, etc., as appropriate. B. Connectors and devices used in the grounding systems shall be fabricated of copper or bronze materials, and properly applied for their intended use. All connectors and devices shall be compatible with the surfaces being bonded and shall not cause galvanic corrosion by dissimilar metals. C. Lugs: Substantial construction,of cast copper or bronze, with "ground"(micro-flat) surfaces, twin clamp, and two-hole tongue equal to Bumdy QQA Series. D. Grounding and Bonding Bushings: Malleable iron. 1. Manufacturers: _ a. Thomas&Betts b. Engineer approved equal. E. Piping Clamps: Bumdy GAR-TC Series with a two-hole compression terminal. F. Grounding Screw and Pigtail: Raco#983. G. Building Structural Steel: Thompson#701 Series heavy duty bronze"C"clamp with two-bolt vise-grip cable clamp or equal. H. Mechanical lugs or wire terminals shall be used to bond ground wires together or to junction boxes and panel cabinets. 2.03 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements as a minimum. Increase size if called for on drawings or in these specifications. C. Insulated THWN (or bare as noted elsewhere). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install grounding electrodes conductor, bonding conductors, ground rods, etc. with all required accessories. C. Grounding shall meet(or exceed as required to meet these specifications) all the requirements of the N.E.C., the NFPA, and applicable standards of IEEE. D. Where there is a conflict between these specifications and the above applicable codes/standards or between this section of these specifications and other sections, then the most stringent or excessive requirement shall govern. Where there is an omission of a code/standard requirement in these specifications then the current code/standard requirements shall comply. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 E. Requirement in these specifications to comply with a specific code/standard article, etc. is not to be construed as deleting of requirements of other applicable codes/standards and their articles, etc. 3.02 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. All connections shall be exothermic welded unless otherwise noted herein. All connections above grade and in accessible locations may be by exothermic clamping with devices UI listed as suitable for use except in locations where exothermic welding is specifically specified in these specifications or called for on drawings. B. Each rod shall be die stamped with identification of manufacturer and rod length. C. Install rod electrodes at locations indicated and/or as called for in these specifications. D. Ground Resistance: 1. Main Electrical Service: a. Grounding resistance measured at each main service electrode system. b. Other Locations: 1) Resistance to ground of all non-current carrying metal parts shall not exceed 5 ohms measured at motors, panels, busses, cabinets, equipment racks, light poles,transformers, and other equipment. 2) Resistance called for above shall be maximum resistance of each ground electrode prior to connection to grounding electrode conductor. Where ground electrode system being measured consists of two or more ground rod electrodes then the resistance specified above shall be the maximum resistance with two or more rods connected together but not connected to the grounding electrode conductor. E. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground (specified ground resistance is for each ground rod location prior to connection to ground electrode conductor). 1. Provide grounding well with cover at each rod location. Install grounding well top flush with finished grade. 2. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3. Install ground rods not less than 1'below grade level and not less than 2' from structure foundation. 3.03 GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR A. Conductor shall be sized to meet or exceed the requirements of NEC 250 to meet these specifications and/or drawings. 3.04 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding conductors shall be provided with every circuit to meet(or exceed as required to meet these specifications and/or drawings)the requirements of NEC 250. B. At every voltage level, new portions of the electrical power distribution system shall be grounded with a dedicated copper conductor,which extends from termination back to power source in supply panelboard. C. Provide separate, insulated (bare if with feeder in PVC conduit outside of building) conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug. D. Except as otherwise indicated, each feeder raceway on the load side of the service entrance shall contain a ground conductor sized as indicated and where not shown shall be sized to meet (or exceed as required)these specifications and/or drawings the requirements of NEC 250. The Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -3 conductor shall be connected to the equipment grounding bus in switchboards and panelboards, to the grounding bus in all motor control centers, and as specified to lighting fixtures, motors, and other types of equipment and outlets. The ground shall be in addition to the metallic raceway and shall be properly connected thereto, using a lug device located within each item enclosure at the point of electric power connections to permit convenient inspection. E. Provide green insulated ground wire for all receptacles and for equipment of all voltages. In addition to grounding strap connection to metallic outlet boxes, a supplemental grounding wire and screw equal to Raco No. 983 shall be provided to connect receptacle ground terminal to the box. F. Where integral grounding conductor is specified elsewhere in bus duct construction, provide equivalent capacity conductor from supply switchboard or panelboard grounding bus to the bus duct grounding conductor. Bond integral conductor to bus duct enclosure at each tap and each termination. G. All motors, all heating coil assemblies,and all building equipment requiring flexible connections shall have a green grounding conductor properly connected to the frames and extending continuously inside conduit with circuit conductors to the supply source bus with accepted connectors regardless of conduit size or type. 3.05 MAIN ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Complete installation shall meet and exceed the requirements of the NEC 250. B. Artificial electrodes shall be provided for the main service in sufficient number and configuration to secure resistance specified. — C. Bond To All Of The Following When Available On Site: 1. Ground Rods. 2. Metal Water Pipe (Interior and Exterior to Building) — 3. Building Metal Frame, Structural Steel and/or Reinforced Structural Concrete 4. All Piping Entering or Leaving All Buildings. 5. A main ground, bare copper conductor,sized per applicable table in NEC 250, but in no case less than#2/0, shall be run in conduit from the main switchgear of each building to the building steel in respective building. This ground conductor shall also be run individually from the main switchgear and be bonded to the main water service ahead of any union in pipe and must be metal pipe of length as acceptable by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide properly sized bonding shunt around water meter and/or dielectric unions in the water pipe. D. Ground/bond neutral per NEC 250. — E. Provide and install ground bus bar on wall near main service disconnect/switchboard. Connect to ground bar in disconnect/switchboard bonded to switchboard/disconnect enclosure/neutral with copper grounding conductor sized per applicable table in NEC 250. 3.06 TRANSFORMER GROUNDING A. Ground all transformers and enclosures of 120/208V and 277/480V"separately derived — systems"as specified herein. 1. Ground per NEC 250 and these specifications. 2. Bond neutral to transformer frame/enclosure and the equipment grounding conductors of the derived system with copper ground conductor sized per applicable table in NEC 250. 3. Connect transformer neutral/ground to grounding electrode per NEC 250 with grounding electrode conductor sized per applicable table in NEC 250. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -4 4. Where neither building steel nor water pipe grounding electrodes are available (i.e.exterior locations with no available water pipe electrode)provide two ground connections: each to two or more 10'ground rod electrodes at no less than 30'spacing, driven vertical to a minimum depth of 10'plus 1'below grade. 5. Ground to water system service pipe as required by NEC 250. B. Provide additional ground electrodes as required to achieve specified ground resistance. C. Where two or more ground electrodes are used at any one required ground location,they shall be bonded together with a copper ground conductor,sized to meet applicable table in NEC 250, but in no case less than#2/0. D. Complete installation shall exceed the minimum requirements of NEC 250. E. Equipment ground conductors shall be provided in addition to above grounding. See 'EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTOR'. 3.07 LIGHT FIXTURES A. All new fixtures in building interior, and exterior fixtures shall be provided with green grounding conductor, solidly connected to unit. Individual fixture grounds shall be with lug to fixture body, generally located at point of electrical connection to the fixture unit. B. All suspended fixtures and those supplied through flexible metallic conduit shall have green _ ground conductor from outlet box to fixture. Cord connected fixtures shall contain a separate green ground conductor. C. Grounding Electrodes: _ 1. Two or more 10'ground rods at no less than 10'spacing shall be driven vertically to a minimum depth of 10'plus 1'below grade. 2. Bond the two or more ground rod electrodes together with a Class I or Class II lightning protection main copper conductor. 3. Provide additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified ground resistance. 4. The two or more grounding rod electrodes shall be installed at each light pole. D. Installation shall exceed minimum requirements of NFPA 780. 3.08 MISCELLANEOUS GROUNDING CONNECTIONS A. Provide bonding to meet regulatory requirements. B. Required connections to building steel shall be with UL accepted non-reversible crimp type ground lugs exothermically welded to bus bar that is either exothermically welded or bolted to steel in locations where weld will affect the structural properties of the steel. Required connections to existing building structural steel purlinsfi beams shall be with heavy duty bronze "C"clamp with two bolt vise-grip cable clamp. C. Grounding conductors shall be so installed as to permit shortest and most direct path from _ equipment to ground; be installed in conduit; be bonded to conduit at both ends when conduit is metal; have connections accessible for inspection; and made with accepted solderless connectors brazed or bolted to the equipment or to be grounded; in NO case be a current carrying conductor; have a green jacket unless it is bare copper; be run in conduit with power and branch circuit conductors. The main grounding electrode conductor shall be exothermically welded to ground rods, water pipe, and building steel. D. All surfaces to which grounding connections are made shall be thoroughly cleaned to maximum conductive condition immediately before connections are made thereto. Metal rust proofing shall be removed at grounding contact surfaces, for 0 ohms by digital Vm. Exposed bare metal at the termination point shall be painted. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -5 E. All ground connections that are buried or in otherwise inaccessible locations, shall be welded exothermically. The weld shall provide a connection which shall not corrode or loosen and which shall be equal or larger in size than the conductors joined together. The connection shall have the same current carrying capacity as the largest conductor.F. Install ground bushings on all metal conduits entering enclosures where the continuity of grounding is broken between the conduit and enclosure(i.e.metal conduit stub-up into a motor control center enclosure or at ground bus bar). Provide an appropriately sized bond jumper from the ground bushing to the respective equipment ground bus or ground bus bar. G. Install ground bushings on all metal conduits where the continuity of grounding is broken _ between the conduit and the electrical distribution system (i.e. metal conduit stub-up from wall outlet box to ceiling space. Provide an appropriately sized bond jumper from the ground bushing to the respective equipment ground bus or ground bus bar. H. Each feeder metallic conduit shall be bonded at all discontinuities, including at switchboards and all sub distribution and branch circuit panels with conductors in accordance with applicable table in NEC 250 for parallel return with respective interior grounding conductor. I. Grounding provisions shall include double locknuts on all heavy wall conduits. J. Bond all metal parts of pole light fixtures to ground rod at base. K. Install grounding bus in all existing panelboards of remodeled areas, for connection of new grounding conductors, connected to an accepted ground point. L. Bond together reinforcing steel and metal accessories in pool and fountain structures. M. Where reinforced concrete is utilized for building grounding system, proper reinforced bonding shall be provided to secure low resistance to earth with "thermite"type devices, and#10AWG wire ties shall be provided to not less than ten full length rebars that contact the connected rebar (by Division 26 Electrical Contractor). 3.09 TESTING AND REPORTS A. Raceway Continuity: Metallic raceway system as a component of the facilities ground system shall be tested for electrical continuity. Resistance to ground throughout the system shall not exceed specified limits. B. Ground resistance measurements shall be made on each system utilized in the project. The ground resistance measurements shall include building structural steel, driven grounding system,water pipe grounding system and other accepted systems as may be applicable. Ground resistance measurements shall be made in normally dry weather, not less than 24 hours after rainfall, and with the ground under test isolated from other grounds and equipment. Resistances measured shall not exceed specified limits. C. Upon completion of testing, the testing conditions and results shall be certified by the electrical contractor and submitted to the engineer. 3.10 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Interface with communications system installed under other specification sections. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect grounding and bonding system conductors and connections for tightness and proper -- installation. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -6 B. Use suitable test instrument with current certificate of calibration to measure resistance to ground of system. Perform testing in accordance with test instrument manufacturer's recommendations using the fall-of-potential method. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0526 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -7 SECTION 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Product requirements. B. Formed steel channel. C. Indoor housekeeping pads. D. Outdoor housekeeping pads. • 1.02 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog data for fastening systems. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of products. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: 1. Corrosion resistant. 2. Select materials, sizes, and types of anchors,fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit,including weight of wire in conduit. B. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps and welded fasteners. ,. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self-drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry, Plaster, and Gypsum Board Partitions: Use toggle bolts and hollow wall fasteners. 5. Solid Masonry Walls: Use expansion anchors and preset inserts. 6. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 7. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. 2.02 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Manufacturers: 1. Globe Strut 2. Uni-Strut 3. Kindorf Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 4. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Galvanized steel. C. Provide aluminum supports and hangers in pool area. 2.03 INDOOR HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. This contractor shall provide and install 4"high concrete housekeeping pads under all floor-mounted equipment he has supplied and/or installed. The housekeeping pads shall extend a minimum of 6"beyond the largest dimensions of the equipment mounted on the pad. The housekeeping pads shall have wire mesh embedded in the pad to reinforce the structure. All edges shall be rounded with a 1/2"radius. 2.04 OUTDOOR HOUSEKEEPING PADS A. This contractor shall provide and install concrete pads under all electrical equipment installed outdoors. The pads shall be as detailed on the drawings unless indicated otherwise. This contractor shall install pads under all utility company supplied and installed transformers. The pad dimensions shall be detailed on the drawings unless indicated otherwise. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and utility company regulations where applicable. B. Provide anchors,fasteners and supports in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation". 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes,ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not use spring steel clips and clamps. 3. Do not use powder-actuated anchors. 4. Do not drill or cut structural members. C. Fabricate supports from structural steel or formed steel members or steel channel. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. D. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. E. Use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1"off wall in all wet and damp locations. F. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. G. Reinforce outdoor concrete pads with 1/2"steel reinforcing bars on 12"centers or as shown on the drawings. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 SECTION 26 0533 RACEWAYAND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit requirements. B. Conduit types. C. Box types. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated.B. ANSI C80.3- Electrical Metallic Tubing,Zinc Coated. C. ANSI C80.5-Rigid Aluminum Conduit. _ D. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 -Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. E. ANSI/NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. F. NECA"Standard of Installation." G. NEMA 250-Enclosures for Electric Equipment. — H. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device Configurations. I. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit. J. NECA(National Electrical Contractor's Association)Standard of Installation. K. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Device Configurations. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0543-Underfloor Ducts and Raceways for Electrical Systems 1.04 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, knockout sizes and locations, materials,fabrication details, finishes, and accessories. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.08 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to the site. B. Accept products on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect products from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough in. C. Conduit routing is shown on the drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required completing the wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 1/2" for power wiring and 3/4"for low voltage wiring unless noted otherwise. B. Size conduit per ANSI/NFPA 70. C. Underground Installations: 1. Within 5'from Foundation Wall Including Below Building Slab: Use rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic conduit. 2. More Than 5'from Foundation Wall: Use rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic conduit. Schedule 80. 3. Provide rigid steel turn-ups to above grade. 4. Minimum size is to be one inch. 5. Provide warning tape. D. Above Grade Outdoor Locations: 1. Use rigid steel and aluminum conduit. Aluminum conduit shall not contact concrete mortar or block. E. Above Grade In or Under Slab: 1. Use rigid steel conduit or thick wall nonmetallic conduit. 2. Maximum Size Conduit in Slab:Total of 50% of pour depth. 3. Minimum Size: 1 inch. 4. Provide rigid steel turn-ups above slab. F. Wet and Damp Locations: 1. Use rigid steel conduit and intermediate metal conduit. G. Dry Locations: 1. Concealed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2. Exposed: Use rigid steel conduit, intermediate metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing. 2.02 CONDUIT TYPES A. Metal Conduit: 1. Rigid Steel Conduit:ANSI C80.1. 2. Rigid Aluminum Conduit:ANSI C80.5. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 3. Intermediate Metal Conduit(IMC): Rigid steel. 4. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:ANSI/NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. B. Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction. 2. Fittings:ANSI/NEMA FB 1. C. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings:ANSI/NEMA FB 1. D. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT): — 1. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. 2. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel compression type with steel lock nut,and ring or steel setscrew fittings. Install compression type fittings in all wet and damp _. areas. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: 1. NEMA TC 3 — 2. Install offsets at surface boxes. 2.03 BOX TYPES A. Outlet Boxes: 1. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. a. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported. Include 1/2"male fixture studs where required. — b. Concrete Ceiling Boxes: Concrete Type. 2. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, type#FD, cast alloy. Provide gasket cover by box manufacturer. B. Floor Boxes: 1. ANSI/NEMA OS 1, semi-adjustable. 2. Material: Formed steel. 3. Shape: Rectangular. 4. Conform to regulatory requirements to concrete tight floor boxes. C. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Sheet Metal Boxes: NRMA OS 1 galvanized steel. 2. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250,type#4 and#6, flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: a. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 3. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket and stainless steel cover screws. 4. Fiberglass Hand Holes: a. Die molded fiberglass hand holes. b. Cable Entrance: Precut 6"x 6"cable entrance at center bottom of each side. c. Cover: Fiberglass weatherproof cover with nonskid finish and light traffic rating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. C. Support conduit using coated steel, malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. — Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -3 — D. Group related conduit support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel and provide space on each for 25% additional conduits. E. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces. F. Do not support conduit with perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. G. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. H. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. I. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. J. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings, parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route the conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. L. Do not cross conduits in slab. M. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. N. Maintain 12" clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 deg F. O. Cut conduit square using saw or pipe cutter; de-burr cut ends. P. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. Q. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to cast boxes. R. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (as around beams). Use hydraulic one-shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2"size. S. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. T. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses control and expansion joints. U. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. V. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. W. Ground and bond all conduits. X. Identify conduit. Y. Use flexible and liquidtight conduits where required by NEC. Z. Flexible conduit length shall be limited to 6'unless directed by the engineer. AA. Install insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves serving low voltage wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted. AB. Install grounded insulated bushings on all conduits and sleeves serving data wiring prior to pulling wire unless otherwise noted. AC. All low voltage conduits shall be sized to have less than 30%fill. Each penetration through a surface of any kind shall have a conduit sleeve with insulated bushings. AD. Junction boxes shall not be installed over 4'above accessible ceiling prior written approval by owner. 3.02 BOX INSTALLATION A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -4 B. Install electrical boxes in locations as shown on the drawings and as required for splices,taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights as indicated. — D. Electrical boxes are shown on the drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10'if required to accommodate intended purpose. Verify with architectural drawings and elevations for additional information. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring device orientation. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. — G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. Junction boxes shall not be installed over 4' above accessible ceilings. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6"from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Fire-stop boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. Boxes may be installed within a minimum of 24"separation with written approval prior to installation. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and back splashes. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on the drawings. If light fixture locations conflict with ceiling plans,the electrical contractor shall document discrepancies and send to the engineer for clarification. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches,thermostats, and similar devices. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in wall,provide minimum 6"separation.P. Provide minimum 24" separation in acoustic rated walls. Q. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. — T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. U. Support boxes independently of conduit. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. Y. Use cast iron floor boxes for installation in slab on-grade,formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations unless otherwise noted.Z. Set floor boxes level. AA. Large Pull Boxes: Use set screw enclosure in interior dry locations, surface-mounted cast metal box in other locations. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -5 AB. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. AC. Group devices associated with each other 8"on center(i.e. receptacle,data, voice outlet). AD. All floor mounted device locations shall have a dimensioned drawing from the Architect prior to installation. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit using materials and method to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements. B. Piping and Ductwork: Route conduits through roof openings or through suitable roof jack with — pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation specified. C. Coordinate installation of outlet and junction boxes for equipment connection. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust floor box flush with finish flooring material. B. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0533 RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -6 SECTION 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels.B. Wire markers. C. Underground warning tape.D. Identification. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.03 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. — PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS — A. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic white letters on black background. B. Locations: 1. All electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Communication cabinets. 3. Single mounted breaker. 4. Transformer.C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8"letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1/4"letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. _. 3. Use 1/4"letters for identifying communications cabinets,transfer switches and transformers. D. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape with 3/16"white letters on black background. Use only for — identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations, and communication outlets. 2.02 WIRE MARKERS A. Description:Tape feeders to indicate phases. B. Locations: Each conductor at panelboard gutters, pull boxes, outlet and junction boxes, and — each load connection. C. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated. 2. Control Circuits: Control wire number indicated on schematic and interconnection diagrams. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS - 1 2.03 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Seaton 2. Engineer approved equal. B. Description: Plastic 4"wide tape, detectable type, colored RED with suitable warning legend describing buried electrical lines and inscribed "CAUTION-ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW'. C. Location: Along length of each underground conduit. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify All Junction Boxes With Appropriate Marker As Follows: 1. 480 Volt System: Orange (circuit name and number) 2. 208 Volt System: Black(circuit name and number) B. Write the circuit number of each device inside the device box(not ON the device cover). C. Label all outlets and switch with an adhesive label identifying panel and circuit the device is energized by. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws. C. Secure nameplate to inside surface of door on panelboard that is recessed in finished locations. D. Identify underground conduits or wiring using one underground warning tape per trench at 3" below finished grade. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS -2 SECTION 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Light switches. B. Wall face plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0533-Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems B. Specification Section 26 2726-Wiring Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. — B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination, preparation, and installation of product.1.04 REFERENCES A. NECA-Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 -General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6- Dimensional Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors and — configurations. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS — A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment specified in this specification shall be manufactured by one of the below listed — companies unless specified elsewhere. Model numbers stated in this specification are for basis of design information only. 1. Light Switches: a. Pass &Seymour b. Hubbell c. Cooper d. Lutron — e. Engineer approved equals. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHT SWITCHES A. Toggle Style: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#PS20AC 2. Description: NEMA WD 1, heavy-duty,AC only general-use,toggle switch. 3. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 4. Provide 2, 3, or 4-way or lighted switch configurations as needed. Refer to drawings. 2.02 WALL FACE PLATES A. Cover Plate: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SL(Metal), to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide cover plate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. B. Jumbo Cover Plates: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SLO (Metal)to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide cover plate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. 3. Provide jumbo plates on masonry rough-in. Verify with architect prior to work being performed. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SAMPLES A. Upon request, electrical contractor is to provide a sample of any device specified in any available color. 3.02 COLOR A. All devices shall be gray. All faceplates shall be stainless steel. 3.03 EXAMINATION A. Verify that boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.04 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.05 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install switches with OFF position down. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install wall plates on switches in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES -2 3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Specification Section 26 0533-Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems to obtain mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Before — roughing in any floor devices the electrical contractor shall obtain a dimensioned drawing signed by the owner showing device locations. B. Install wall switch 48" on center above finished floor. — 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. 3.08 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.09 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 0923 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES -3 SECTION 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metering transformer cabinets. B. Meter bases. C. Concrete pad for utility transformer. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 1300-Distribution Switchgear 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation National Electrical Contractors Association. B. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. System Characteristics: 480Y/277 volts, three phase, four-wire,60 Hertz. B. Service Entrance:2,000 amps. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide ratings and dimensions of transformer cabinets and meter bases. B. Submit local utility company prepared drawings. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Utility Company: Mid American Energy B. Perform work in accordance with local utility company's written requirements. C. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.08 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING A. Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section. Review service entrance requirements and details with local utility company's representative. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on the utility company's drawings. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METERING TRANSFORMERCABINETS A. Description: Sheet metal cabinet with hinged door,conforming to utility company requirements with provisions for locking and sealing. B. Size:As required by the local utility company. 2.02 METER BASES A. The electrical contractor shall furnish meter base and meter socket with test switch in accordance to utility company requirements. 2.03 CONCRETE PAD FOR UTILITY TRANSFORMER A. Description: Cast in place concrete pad with cable pit sized in accordance to utility — requirements. Refer to transformer pad detail for additional information. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Arrange with utility company to obtain permanent electric service to the project. 3.02 UTILITY FEES A. All fees by the utility company are to be included in the base bid by the electrical contractor. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install transformer pad and meter base as required by utility company. Provide primary conductor conduit for utility company per their requirements. Verify with utility prior to bidding. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2701 UTILITY SERVICE ENTRANCE -2 SECTION 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outdoor Pad-mount Enclosures. B. Terminal blocks. C. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0529- Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems B. Specification Section 26 2726-Wiring Devices 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NEMA 250- Enclosures for Electrical Equipment(1000 Volts Maximum). C. NEMA ICS 4-Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems. D. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data for enclosures and cabinets. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish two of each key. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTDOOR PAD-MOUNT ENCLOSURES A. Model: Hoffman "WeatherPro Outdoor Pad-Mount Enclosure". B. Size box to accomodate wiring and devices as shown on drawings. C. Construction: 14 gauge galvanized steel. NEMA Type 3R. D. Covers: Hinged door with padlock provisions in handle. Provide padlock for each box, keyed alike. Provide 2 keys to owner. E. Provide interior plywood panel for mounting terminal blocks and electrical components. Finish with white enamel. F. Enclosure Finish: Manufacturer's standard. G. Provide outdoor housekeeping pad when mounted on grade. H. Provide wall mount rack when mounted on wall. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES - 1 2.02 TERMINAL BLOCKS A. Terminal Blocks: NEMA ICS 4. B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type with closed back and tubular pressure screw connectors rated 600 volts. C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, suitable for channel mounting with tubular pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts. D. Provide ground bus terminal block with each connector bonded to enclosure. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Plastic Raceway: Plastic channel with hinged or snaps on cover. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install enclosures and boxes plumb. Anchor securely to wall and structural supports at each corner. C. Install cabinet fronts plumb. 3.02 CLEANING • A. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and harmful materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean finishes and touch up damage. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2716 ELECTRICAL CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES -2 SECTION 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specification grade receptacles. B. Wall face plates. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Specification Section 26 0533-Raceway and Boxes for Electrical System B. Specification Section 26 0543- Underfloor Ducts and Raceways for Electrical System C. Specification Section 26 0923-Lighting Control Devices 1.03 REFERENCES A. NECA-Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Dimensional Requirements for Wiring Devices. D. NFPA 70-National Electrical Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels and markers. B. Samples: Submit two nameplates 4"x 4"in size illustrating materials and engraving quality. C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors and configurations. B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.07 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. All equipment specified in this specification shall be manufactured by one of the below listed companies unless specified elsewhere. Model numbers stated in this specification are for basis of design information only. 1. Pass &Seymour 2. Hubbell 3. Cooper Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES - 1 4. Engineer approved equals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPECIFICATION GRADE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Convenience Receptacle-Traditional Style: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#5362 2. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 3. Hard use specification grade with back and side wiring. B. GFCI Receptacle: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#2094 with LED indicator light. 2. Provide GFCI models where indicated. 3. Ratings: Match branch circuit and load characteristics. Default rating to be 20 amps. 4. Specification grade duplex GFCI. 5. Provide red devices where powered by a redundant power supply. 2.02 WALL FACE PLATES A. Cover Plate: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SL(Metal), to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide coverplate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. B. Jumbo Cover Plates: 1. Basis of Design: Pass &Seymour#SLO(Metal)to be confirmed by architect. 2. Provide coverplate for all devices and provide multiple gang plates where required. 3. Provide jumbo plates on masonry rough-in. Verify with architect prior to work being performed. C. Weatherproof Coverplates: 1. NEMA 3R"While-In-Use"weatherproof box and cover. Must meet NEC 2002 requirements for wet location covers. Provide with plate kits as required. Provide multi-gang or deep cover configurations as required for application. PART3 EXECUTION 3.01 SAMPLES A. Upon request, electrical contractor is to provide a sample of any device specified in any available color. 3.02 COLOR A. Devices shall be gray. B. Faceplates shall be stainless steel. 3.03 ROUGH-IN A. All floor device locations shall be located from a scaled drawing provided by the Architect during construction. Locations shown on electrical drawings shall be used for bidding purposes only. 3.04 EXAMINATION A. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. B. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. C. Verify that floor boxes are adjusted properly. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed,tested, and ready for connection to — wiring devices. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES -2 E. Verify that openings in access floor are in proper locations. 3.05 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from.outlet boxes. 3.06 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA"Standard of Installation." B. Install devices plumb and level. C. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. D. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. E. Install wall plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. G. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. Provide stainless steel cover plate in finished areas. I. Install protective rings and split nozzles on active flush cover service fittings. J. The electrical contractor shall verify floor finish and location before ordering floor devices. r,. 3.07 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS • A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Specification Section 26 0537-Boxes to obtain mounting heights indicated on the drawings. Before roughing in any floor devices the electrical contractor shall obtain a dimensioned drawing signed by the owner showing device locations. B. Install convenience receptacle 18"on center above finished floor. C. install convenience receptacle 8"on center above counter. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity.Test with ground loop impedance tester. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. 3.09 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.10 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES -3 3.11 ELECTRICAL DEVICE SELECTION A. The electrical contractor shall provide five receptacles including wiring, back box,conduit, labor, and all other accessories required to energized each receptacle requested. Receptacle(s) may be added to scope at any time during construction at the architect/owner discretion. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 2726 WIRING DEVICES -4 SECTION 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Ballasts. B. Lamps. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379-American National Standard for Electric Lamps--Reflector Lamps-- Classification of Beam Patterns; 1994(R 2003). B. ANSI C82.1 -.American National Standard for Lamp Ballast-Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast;2004. C. ANSI C82.4-American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps(Multiple-Supply Type);2002. D. NECA/IESNA 500- Recommended Practice for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1998. E. NECA/IESNA 502- Recommended Practice for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors Association; 1999. F. NEMA WD 6-Wiring Devices-Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002. G. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2005. H. NFPA 101 -Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; National Fire Protection Association;2003. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide cut sheet indicating dimensions and components for each luminaire. B. Provide ballast schedule for all ballasts used. Include manufacturer's data sheet for each type of ballast. C. Provide lamp schedule for all lamps used. Include manufacturer's data sheet for each type of lamp. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection,examination,preparation,and installation of product. E. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING - 1 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS • A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and 101 B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BALLASTS A. T8 Fluorescent Ballast: 1. Manufacturers: a. Advance Optanium b. Osram/Sylvania c. Universal Lighting Technologies d. General Electric e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Ballast shall be"instant start 3. "Instant start" ballast shall provide Independent Lamp Operation (ILO)for allowing remaining lamp(s)to maintain full light output when one or more lamp fails. 4. Ballast shall contain auto re-start circuitry in order to re-start lamps without re-setting power. 5. Ballast shall operate from 50/60 Hz input source of 120V through 277V with sustained variations of+/-10% (voltage and frequency)with no damage to the ballast. 6. Ballast shall be high frequency electronic type and operate at a frequency above 42 kHz through 52 kHz to minimize interference with infrared control systems and eliminate visible flicker. 7. Ballast shall have a power factor greater than 0.98 for primary lamp. 8. Ballast shall have a minimum ballast factor for primary lamp application as follows: a. 0.770.71 for low watt. b. 0.87 or 0.88 for normal light output. • c. 1.18 for high light. 9. Ballast shall provide for a lamp current crest factor of 1.7 or less in accordance with lamp — manufacturer recommendations. 10. Ballast input current shall have Total Harmonic Distortion(THD) of less than 10%when operated at nominal line voltage with primary lamp. 11. Ballast shall have a Class A sound rating for all 4'lamps and smaller. 12. Ballast shall have a minimum starting temperature of-20 deg F or 0 deg F for standard T8 lamps and 60 deg F for energy-savings T8 lamps. 13. Ballast shall tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without • damage. 14. Ballast shall contain an anti-striations circuitry to prevent striations on energy-savings lamps. 15. The electronic ballast shall carry a five-year warranty from the date of manufacture against defects in material or workmanship,including replacement for operation at a maximum case temperature of 70 deg C. Ballasts with a 90 deg C designation in their catalog number shall also carry a three-year warranty at a maximum case temperature of 90 deg C. 2.02 LAMPS A. High Intensity Discharge (HID)Lamps: 1. Mogul and Medium Base Lamps: a. Manufacturers: 1) Venture Uni-Form 2) General Electric 3) Philips Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING -2 4) Osram/Sylvania 5) Ushio 6) Engineer approved equal. b. Refer to fixture schedule on the drawings for details. c. Lamps shall be of"clear"type unless stated otherwise on fixture schedule. d. Coordinate lamp and ballast compatibility during submittal process. e. Lamps shall have a color rendering index of 65. f. Lamps shall have protective shroud for open rating for UV protection. g. Lamps shall maintain a color of+/- 100 deg Kelvin throughout lifetime. h. Maximum warm-up time shall be 2-3 minutes. i. Maximum re-strike time shall be 5-8 minutes. j. Lamps over 300W shall have 20,000 hour lamp life. k. Lamps less than 300W shall have 15,000 hour lamp life in vertical position, and 12,000 hour lamp life in horizontal position. �.. B. T8 Linear Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Manufacturers: a. Philips Alto b. General Electric c. Osram/Sylvania d. Ushio e. Engineer approved equal. 2. Lamps shall have a rated average life of 20,000 hours(based on 3-hour starts). 3. Lamps shall have a color rendering index of 85. 4. Lamps are to be TCLP compliant—low mercury level. 5. All fluorescent lamps shall be by same manufacturer. 6. Lamp color shall be 4100K PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Furnish products as specified in schedule on the drawings. C. Install ballasts, lamps, and specified accessories at factory. D. Install suspended luminaires and exit signs using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required suspending luminaire at indicated height. E. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling drawing and electrical lighting drawings. F. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. G. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. H. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and fire stopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. I. Install clips to secure recessed grid-supported luminaires in place. J. Install recessed can luminaires to fit in ceiling. Provide all necessary trim ring extenders or other accessories for proper installation of luminaire in ceiling. K. Install wall mounted luminaires,emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as scheduled. L. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING -3 M. Connect all luminaires,emergency lighting units, and exit signs using fixture whips. N. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. O. Bond products and metal accessories to the branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. P. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. B. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean all electrical parts to remove all of the conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.05 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK ., A. Re-lamp all failed lamp luminaires that have failed lamps within 6 months after the substantial complete date. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. See the drawings. END OF SECTION • Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5100 INTERIOR LIGHTING -4 SECTION 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART I GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Luminaries and accessories. B. Fluorescent ballasts. C. Lamps. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ANSI C78.379 -Electric Lamps- Incandescent and High-Intensity Discharge Reflector Lamps- Classification of Beam Patterns. B. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps-Specifications. C. ANSI C82.4- Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type). D. ANSI 05.1 -Specifications and Dimensions for Wood Poles. E. IES RP-8-Recommended Practice for Roadway Lighting. F. IES RP-20- Lighting for Parking Facilities. G. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. B. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings,and performance data. ..� C. Test Reports: Indicate measured illumination levels. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling,protection,examination,preparation, installation, and starting of product. E. Provide maintenance data for each luminaire. 1.04 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three-years experience. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories,Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING - 1 1.06 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store and handle solid wood poles in accordance with ANSI 05.1. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Furnish bolt templates and pole mounting accessories to installer of pole foundations. 1.08 EXTRA PRODUCTS A. Furnish two of each type and wattage lamp installed. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES A. See schedule on drawings. 2.02 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electromagnetic ballast. B. Provide low-temperature ballast suitable for lamps specified. C. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. D. Source Quality Control: Certify ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. 2.03 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE(HID)BALLAST A. See Specification Section 26 5100 Interior Lighting. 2.04 LAMPS A. See Specification Section 26 5100 Interior Lighting PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Bond luminaires metal accessories and metal poles to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for improper connections and operation. B. Measure illumination levels to verify conformance with performance requirements. C. Take measurements during night sky without moon or with heavy overcast clouds effectively obscuring moon. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean all electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. B. Remove dirt and debris from enclosure. C. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. D. Clean finishes and touch up damage. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING -2 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Re-lamp all luminaires that have failed lamps. This inventory shall take place within 6 months of substantial completion. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 5600 EXTERIOR LIGHTING -3 SECTION 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS PART 1GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical controls and instruments. B. Pump control panels. C. Backup control system. D. Cellular alarm monitoring system. E. High ambient adjustable frequency drive system. F. Pump protection devices. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. The pump supplier shall be responsible for providing the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives, sensors, and pump controls. B. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for wiring all power and control cables provided by the pump supplier. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for all building wire associated with the pump supplier's equipment. D. The pump supplier shall be responsible for the startup and commissioning of the pumps, pump controls, and sensors. 1.03 GUARANTEE A. The manufacturer of the control panel shall furnish a limited warranty for 18 months from the date of shipment or 12 months from start-up (whichever occurs first), that all equipment shall be free from defects in design, materials and workmanship.The manufacturer shall furnish replacement parts for any component proven defective,whether of his or other manufacturer during the warranty period,excepting only those items which are normally consumed in service, such as(but not limited to), light bulbs, oil,grease, packing, etc. 1.04 WORKMANSHIPAND EXPERIENCE A. All workmanship and materials throughout shall be of the highest quality.The controls shall be the product of a supplier who has been actively engaged in research, development and has supplied proven field installations of complete sewage pumping systems for not less than five (5) years.A list of ten (10) separate sewage pumping systems shall be provided on request. 1.05 CALIBRATION,ADJUSTMENT AND TESTING A. Devices requiring field calibration shall be calibrated in presence of Owner's representative and documented. 1.06 INSTALLATION AND START-UP A. Supplier shall provide skilled programmer/instrumentation engineer or technician who shall complete troubleshooting and start-up to place entire system into satisfactory operation; engineer or technician shall make necessary inspection of completed installation, make necessary final field adjustments and make program revisions as required for start-up. Demonstrate proper operation of all system features and functions to Owner and Engineer. Coordinate installation and start-up scheduling with Owner and Engineer. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION A. In accordance with the plans and specifications, provide a complete working control system — including all required equipment, accessories, wiring and adjusting as indicated in the project specifications, on the project plan, and installed in accordance with applicable National, State and Local Codes. B. All electrical controls including adjustable frequency drives and pump control panel shall be furnished by the pump supplier to provide a single source of responsibility C. All materials used and work performed under this section shall comply with rules and regulations of the latest edition of the State Electrical Code and local ordinances. D. As specified elsewhere within this Division and in accord with the Contract Documents, shop drawings and materials lists shall be submitted for equipment listed under this section. E. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to protect and maintain all materials and work furnished and installed under this section until acceptance. F. The base bid pump controls manufacturer shall be Starnet Technologies, Inc. or pre-approved equal. Alternate manufacturers desiring pre-approval shall submit complete drawings and data showing compliance with all specification requirements at least three weeks prior to bid date. Manufacturers pre-approved as equal will be listed by addendum prior to bid date. 2.02 PUMP CONTROL PANEL(PCP) A. Furnish and install a completely prewired automatic control panel for pump control and alarming. The new panel shall be provided as an integral section to the motor control center with all MCC unit interconnections factory wired and tested. PCP shall be UL listed for use with circuits from Class 1, Division 1 hazardous locations. PCP shall be labeled per latest NEC and UL requirements regarding SCCR. Supplier shall provide short-circuit calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer proving that the SSCR rating provided is adequate for the intended purpose. B. Devices included in the PCP shall include but not be limited to: 1. New primary control PLC. This PLC shall consist of an Allen-Bradley Compact Logix PLC including base unit, processor, real-time clock, I/O cards, expansion I/O cables adequate for all connected I/O plus 10% minimum spares for each I/O type. 2. Separate circuit breakers for primary and backup controls. 3. TVSS surge protection 4. Phoenix-Contact miniature relays for isolation of all discrete inputs and outputs. 5. Phoenix-Contact isolators for all analog inputs and outputs. 6. Labeled interconnection and field wiring terminal strips. 7. ISR relays and IS isolators for all float and transducer connections. 8. Backup Pump Controller PLC,Separate and independent of primary PLC with LCD/Display, Keypad, and Time Clock with expansion I/O cards as required. 9. DC UPS system wired to backup primary controller and wet well level transducer, and related devices. 10. Omni-Site Cellular Alarm Dialer C. Front of PCP shall include but not be limited to: Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -2 1. New primary control touchscreen. This touchscreen shall consist of an Allen-Bradley Panelview Plus 12"TFT with 64K Ram and 64K Flash Memory or C-H Panelmate equivalent. Touchscreen shall include Windows CE or Embedded XP operating system to allow viewing of security camera video on touchscreen in addition to PLC interface functions. 2. On/Off/Auto switch for each pump. • 3. Reset Pushbutton for each pump. 4. Run and Fail Indicators for each pump. 5. Elapsed time meter for each pump. 6. Level Alarm Reset pushbutton 7. Backup Mode On/Off/Auto selector switch 8. Backup Active Indicator 9. Backup Mode Reset Pushbutton 10. High Alarm Indicator for wet well 11. Low Alarm Indicator for wet well D. The PCP/MCC shall be factory tested together and these tests shall be witnessed by the owner prior to shipment.E. Field Devices to be connected to the new control system shall include but not be limited to: 1. Submersible Transducer 2. Suspended 10-point liquid level probe 3. All other floats,transducers, limit switches, beacons, horns, entry alarm switches and other devices as shown on the plans. F. The pump level control/alarm system shall be connected to the level sensors through intrinsically safe module or relays. G. Control panel terminal blocks shall be provided and labeled to interface with audible alarm, external visual alarm, flasher for visual alarm, power monitor,pump monitors, and pump motor starters. • H. All legend plates/name plates and equipment designations shall be engraved type. I. All terminal blocks shall be identified by both number and graphic symbols,which clearly indicate the purpose of each terminal block. J. The control system shall provide total automatic control for the three storm water pumps and — one jockey pump. K. Programming and Sequence of Operations: The pumps shall be controlled as described below: 1. The wet well shall be monitored by a submersible transducer installed in a stilling pipe, and -- a cable suspended 10-position level probe. 2. Each pump shall have a hand-off-auto selector switch. 3. A means shall be provided to simulate activation of the control points and alarms at the pump control panel. 4. The pump controller shall provide fully automated pump control despite failure in an individual pump, or manual selection of an OFF status. Alternation shall continue in the programmed sequence with the next pump in sequence replacing the failed or off pump.5. After power failure, delay shall precede the sequential start of the pump cycle with no two (2)pumps starting within 30 seconds of each other. 6. Jockey pump shall operate as the first stage,for low flow rates.This pump shall operate variable speed on a proportional control band at the lower range of useable wet well level. The jockey pump shall shut down when any of the storm water pumps run. The jockey pump shall also be equipped with a 3-contactor full-voltage bypass function. 7. When flow rates exceed capacity of the jockey pump, the three storm water pumps shall Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -3 operate in a first-on first-off triplex alternation mode. The touchscreen interface shall allow operator to over-ride alternation and select a preferred pump selection sequence. The large pumps shall operate variable speed on a proportional control band at the mid to upper range of useable wet well level. 8. Pump Alternation Capability: The control system shall have the ability to automatically alternate pump outputs or select a fixed lead-lag pattern to accommodate user requirements. The system shall be field programmable to allocate pumps into separate groups and thereby select alternation patterns between groups of pumps. Any group of pumps can be set to alternate automatically or operate in a fixed lead arrangement. The control system shall be capable of alternating some or all of the pumps. 9. Time Delay Functions: The control system shall provide the following time delay functions for pump activation and deactivation: 10. Pump Start and Stop: The control system shall provide programmable activation and deactivation delays that are selectable from the touchscren. These delay settings can be used for pump starting and stopping in a user selected arrangement. 11. Interpump Delays: A programmable interpump delay shall be provided for non-coincidental starting or stopping of pumps which will allow for a smooth transition of pump activation and deactivation without harmful cycling. 12. Maximum Pump Off Time: The control system shall be capable of automatically activating a pump if a programmable maximum pump off time is reached. This function will allow a pump to be exercised for maintenance or other reasons. If a pump is activated using maximum off time,the pump will run as long as there is sufficient liquid level to allow for pump activation. When the liquid level reaches the off point,the pump will be deactivated. 13. Maximum Pump On Time: The control unit shall be capable of turning a pump off when it is running and thereby force the running cycle to sequence between other pumps if desired. This function is useful in applications where there is not sufficient level change to cycle multiple pumps properly. L. Touchscreen Functions: A user friendly graphical interface shall be provided on the touchscreen allowing changing of setpoints,viewing all statuses and alarms, event logs, and trends. Touchscreen indicators shall include but not be limited to: 1. Pump running 2. Pump is in the HAND position. 3. Pump is in the OFF position. 4. Pump is in the AUTOMATIC position 5. Pump is available to run 6. Pump fault(Auto Reset) 7. Pump lockout(Manual Reset) 8. Motor overtemp (thermal)fault 9. Motor seal failure fault 10. Pump alternation active indicator 11. Alternation sequence indicator 12. Miscellaneous programming indicators 13. Status Event Log 14. Alarm Event Log 15. Level Trends 16. Pump Run Trends 17. Pump Start/Stop Setpoints: The pump activation and deactivation points for each pump shall be user selectable from the touchscreen. 18. Pump Alternation: All lead select and pump alternation settings shall be programmable from the touchscreen. 19. Security Functions: The control system shall provide security access to setpoint and control functions. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -4 20. Pump Monitoring Functions: The PLC system shall communicate with pump MAS units via isolate RS485 Modbus RTU protocol. The system shall monitor and display the following signals from each Storm Water Pump MAS Unit: a. Three (3)thermal switches embedded in the stator windings b. One(1)RTD sensor in the stator windings c. One (1)RTD sensor on the pump main bearing d. One(1)moisture leakage sensor in pump stator housing e. One (1)moisture leakage sensor in pump connection housing f. One (1)temperature sensor in pump connection housing g. Monitoring of pump current in one(1)phase 2.03 BACKUP CONTROL SYSTEM A. Furnish and install a completely automatic backup control system. The backup control system shall be provided integral section to the PCP with all interconnections factory wired and tested. Backup system shall be UL listed for use with circuits from Class 1, Division 1 hazardous locations. B. Devices included in the backup system shall include but not be limited to: 1. Backup controller. 2. Liquid level probe. 3. Intrinsic safe barrier. 4. Level indicator. 5. Primary/Backup/Auto selector switch. 6. Power on indicator. 7. Output indicators. 8. High level alarm indicator. C. The backup controller shall consist of a microPLC wired independently of the main level control system. The controller shall include: 1. Alternation. 2. Lag pump time delays. 3. Variable speed control based on multiple discrete level inputs. D. The Liquid Level Probe shall be a Conductive Level Sensing Device(Probe)designed to detect conductive liquid level in tanks or sumps and interface with an electronic pump controller for control and management in multiple pump applications. Prove shall include the following features: 1. The level sensing probe shall be constructed from uPVC 32mm tubing with molded sensor units at regular intervals along the length of the probe. Each sensor unit assembly will contain two Avesta SMO254 stainless steel sensors mounted opposite to each other within the sensor unit assembly. Each Avesta sensor will be 24mm long and 2mm wide. Each sensor unit assembly will be PVC injected to seal the unit and prevent any moisture from entering the sensor assembly. Each sensor unit assembly shall have a metallic electrical connection tab protruding out from the sealed sensor unit to allow for conductor connections. 2. Each sensor unit shall be individually connected to a numbered,PVC insulated .75mm conductor which is part of a multi-conductor cable entering the level sensing probe. Each sensor unit containing two Avesta sensors on a multi-sensor probe will be rotated 90 degrees horizontally from the previous sensor along the probe length to eliminate tracking between sensors. The level sensing probe shall be pressure injected with an epoxy resin �- at final assembly to encapsulate all internal components and connections,thereby creating a rigid, sealed, homogeneous unit. 3. The flexible cable used for the Level Sensing Probe shall be comprised of PVC/PVC multi-conductor construction with a common over-sheath that is water and oil resistant. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -5 The multi-conductor cable will be identified with numbering and text along the entire length of the outer sheath at required intervals. Individual conductors of the multi-conductor cable shall be numbered and colored light blue for easy identification and connection to the pump controls. The cable shall be secured to the top of the probe body by a synthetic rubber compression fitting for strain relief. The flexible cable shall be rated to physically support the combined weight of the level sensing probe and any suspended cable connected to the probe. 4. The probe shall be located in either a turbulent(preferred)or non-turbulent area of a tank or sump, suspended on it's own cable and connected to a 6mm stainless steel hook. The stainless steel hook(provided as part of a mounting kit)would hang from a 30mm stainless steel angle bracket assembly. The angle bracket assembly shall be mounted at the —' entrance to the tank or sump with and approved anchoring method.The angle bracket assembly shall contain a polyurethane squeegee pad that has a 30mm hole and slot for the purpose of cleaning the level sensing probe at desired maintenance intervals. E. The Intrinsic Safe Barrier(Multitrode MTISB-10)shall be designed for use with the Liquid Level Probe and shall include the following features: 1. The intrinsically safe barrier shall provide 10 channels. 2. The device shall be panel mounted and designed to protect a multi-sensored conductive probe. The barrier shall be certified intrinsically safe for use with Multitrode equipment in installations up to and including Class 1 Zone O.The intrinsically safe barrier shall have screw terminals for wire connections. 3. The intrinsically safe barrier shall be protected and current limited according to the requirements of UL Class I (Groups A, B, C &D), Class II (Groups E, F, &G) and Class III certification.The intrinsically safe barrier shall allow for a maximum short circuit current of 10 ma. F. The Level Indicator(Multitrode MTIC) shall be designed for use with the Liquid Level Probe and shall include the following features: 1. Ten-segment level indication. 2. 10 programmable N/O or N/C outputs. 3. Visual indication of set points. 4. Four sensitivities. 5. Four activation delays. 6. 4-20mA and 0-10V DC outputs. 7. Panel mounted. 8. Power On indication. G. The backup system shall provide back up as required when primary level control Malfunctions. H. The backup level controller shall be locked in until manually re-set. An alarm contact shall also be provided indicating back-up system is in operation. I. The backup controller shall use the ten discrete sensor levels to provide variable speed operation with multiple fixed preset speeds. 2.04 CELLULARALARM MONITORING SYSTEM A. Provide a cellular alarm monitoring system integral to the PCP for storm water station monitoring and analysis.The complete system provides the following standard calculations, presented in a user-friendly graphical format,to be overlayed onto the client's existing, private web-pages.The bid package price will include two years of prepaid cellular service in the bid price that includes the following storm water station daily reports and alarm notifications. B. Features of the alarm system shall include: 1. indication of Cellular signal strength 2. Alarm notification using e-mail,pager,or voice call Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -6 3. Historical log showing all alarm history 4. Web-based graphs of historical data that can also be exported to Microsoft Word or Excel programs 5. Crew on-site notification intelligent key reader -- 6. Can be completely,programmed,setup viewed, monitored, adjusted from anywhere in the world using a web browser and appropriate password. 7. Upon Alarm condition:facilitates the compilation and transmission of alarm information to commercially available voice pagers. 8. Upon Alarm condition:facilitate the compilation and transmission of alarm information over standard telephone lines to residential or commercial sites, or cellular phones, provide for verbalization of alarm information and allow for the password secured remote acknowledgment of such alarms. 9. Allows for Voice Dial-in Connection via telephone line to facilitate the Acknowledgment of active alarms. 10. Allows for Voice Dial-in Connection via telephone line to facilitate the inquiry of and the alteration of values of digital tags. 11. Both Voice Dial-in and Voice Dial-out access modes shall be protected by mandatory redundant password entry system. 12. Supplies the ability of text-to-speech conversion of typed-in alarm messages so that sound files do not have to be manually recorded.This saves much time and programming complexity.Systems that do not employ advanced text-to-speech conversion will not be considered. 13. Allows for the configuration and maintenance of a set of"global"voice data files used in the construction of voice output messages. 14. Allows for the creation and maintenance of a"phone book"of destinations for alarm transmissions. The quantity of eligibility entries in the phone book shall be unlimited. 15. Allows for selection of recipient list for alarm transmissions along with recipient priority determination. 16. Allows for creation of user configurable delays prior to commencement of alarm transmissions. 17. Allows for user selection of"single pass" or"continuous loop"modes through recipient list until alarms are acknowledged. -` 18. Allows for user enable/disable of: data logging to disk file, automatic acknowledgment upon return to normal of alarm condition, mandatory user acknowledgment of alarms. 19. Provides Digital Alarm handling and allows a textual description field and voice verbalization files for each Digital Alarm. Standard alarm acknowledgment requires personal involvement. Each alarm can be selected to "acknowledge upon return to normal state", or allow for automatic acknowledgment of any alarm generated 20. Capable of displaying on screen, current alarm status and alarm history status of a minimum of 65,000 simultaneous alarm tags. 21. Allows for manual transmission of user entered alphanumeric or numeric pages by selection of destination from the phone book and message entry. -- 22. Shall be capable of maintaining a group by group activity log which may capture:Any alarms that may occur(along with user configurable time and date stamp), any return to normal transactions, any alphanumeric or numeric pages, any voice dial-outs,and any voice-dial-ins(including who has accessed the system and who has acknowledged alarms). C. The following I/O shall be pre-wired and configured: 1. Power Failure, Power Restore 2. Low battery alarm 3. Wet Well HWL Alarm Transducer 4. Wet Well HWL Float Switch 5. Building Intrusion alarm — 6. Pump#1 Warning Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -7 7. Pump#2 Warning 8. Pump#3 Warning 9. Pump#1 Alarm 10. Pump#2 Alarm -- 11. Pump#3 Alarm 12. Pump#1 Run 13. Pump#2 Run 14. Pump#3 Run 15. Jockey Pump-Seal Failure 16. Jockey Pump-Over Temp 17. Jockey Pump-Run 18. Backup Control Mode ACTIVE D. The controller shall accept universal DI configurable to monitor dry contacts or any voltage range between 12VDCNAC to 120 VACNDC or to act as pulse counters, rain gauge input,and crew on-site intelligent key reader input in its base form. It shall have Phoenix type removable terminal blocks. E. The alarm unit shall include the following devices: 1. Gell Cell Battery: On-board 12VDC, 800mAH gell cell battery provides backup for up to 24 hours in the event of power loss. Battery is automatically recharged using temperature compensated floating battery charging circuit. 2. LCD display:(16 character X 2 line) Liquid Crystal display is viewable in very bright sunlight or total darkness or very high or low temperatures. This high visibility operator display is used to configure and monitor variables and eliminates the need for programming devices such as laptop computers. Includes built-in screen saver that continuously scrolls values of all inputs and calculations for easy viewing 3. SD Memory card slot: Trend log data from connected variables can be stored on the memory stick for later retrieval. Memory stick used for updates to the RTU operating system eliminating the need for field laptop computers to repair operating program errors. 4. Intelligent key reader: Intelligent key reader identifies operator on site and logs who visited site, took equipment out of service, etc. Keys can be reprogrammed by the RTU key reader on site, eliminating the need to contact the factory for key re-programming.One RTU key included with each RTU. F. A regulated 12 VDC power supply shall be provided for the radios and other monitoring system components as required. The power supply shall include a terminal block for incoming AC, output DC and ground connections. The power supply shall be powered from a 120 VAC and include tapered charge type battery charging circuitry to maximize battery life. The power supply shall be rated at minimum of 2.0A @ 12 VDC. G. The power supply system shall include (1) 12 Volt battery sized to allow for 24 hours continued system operation during a power outage. H. The Systems supplier shall be responsible for installation, set-up,adjustment and tuning of the antenna to provide optimal communications for the system. I. The antenna installation shall be external to the enclosure and shall be outdoors. J. The systems supplier shall utilize the built-in Radio Frequency signal meter during antenna installation to ensure that the antenna is installed for optimum signal reception. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -8 2.05 HIGH AMBIENT ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS(AFDS) A. For each pump provide a completely prewired adjustable frequency drive system designed to operate in an ambient room temperature of 45 Degree C (113 Degree Fahrenheit). All of the internal components within each AFDS enclosure shall be designed for operation up to 50 Deg C. and the enclosure ventilation shall be adequate to assure that ambient within the enclosure does not rise more than 5 Deg C above ambient room temperature under full load conditions. Each AFD System shall be UL508A listed. Each AFDS shall be labeled per latest NEC and UL requirements regarding SCCR. Supplier shall provide short-circuit calculations stamped by a licensed Professional Engineer proving that the SSCR rating is adequate for the intended purpose. B. Minimum Specification for the (4)AFDS's shall be: 1. Voltage:480 Volt 3-Phase 2. Output Current:Pump FLA Continuous 3. Ambient Temperature Rating:45 Deg C Minimum-NOTE THAT 40 DEG C RATED ENCLOSED DRIVE SYSTEMS WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED. Manufacturer must provide engineering data and calculations demonstrating that the internal cabinet temperature will not rise more than 5 Deg C above room temperature. 4. Harmonics:5% Maximum Current Harmonics. AFDS manufacturer shall provide calculations demonstrating that the drives will meet this requirement. Additionally,supplier must test and demonstrate that this requirement is met at startup by use of a calibrated digital oscilloscope equipped for harmonic analysis. 5. Ventilation: Forced air ventilation fans shall be top mounted on the AFDS cabinets so as to direct heat upward and minimize arc-flash hazard. C. Devices included in each AFDS shall include but not be limited to: 1. Harmonic Filter-Passive type including thermally protected reactors and contactor staged capacitors controlled to prevent leading power factor when AFDS is operating at reduced speed. Filter must be rated 50 Degree C at full load conditions. 2. Chassis mounted High Ambient Adjustable Frequency Drive suitable for 50 Degree C • operation at full load. 3. Load Reactor-5%for motor dV/dT protection, sized properly to allow operation at 50 Deg C temperature. 4. MAS Unit with power supply and RS485 Isolator 5. Top mounted ventilation fans 6. Labeled interconnection and field wiring terminal strips. D. Front of each AFDS shall include but not be limited to: 1. AFD Keypad -- 2. Power On Indicator 3. MAS Unit Keypad 4. System Ready Indicator E. Chassis Mounted Drive used in AFDS shall comply with the following: 1. IEEE 519-1992: Guide for harmonic content and control 2. Underwriters Laboratories(UL508C: Power Conversion Equipment) 3. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 4. ICS 7.0: Industrial Controls&Systems for AFD. 5. IEC 61800-2 and-3. EN 50082-1 and-2 6. The AFD shall be rated for 480 VAC. The AFD shall provide microprocessor-based control for three-phase induction motors. The controller's full load output current rating shall be based on 50°C ambient and 2 kHz switching frequency. 7. The AFD shall be of the Pulse Width Modulated(PWM) design converting the utility input voltage and frequency to a variable voltage and frequency output via a two-step operation. Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS -9 Adjustable Current Source AFD are not acceptable. Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBT's) shall be used in the inverter section. Bipolar Junction Transistors, GTO's or SCR's are not acceptable.The AFD shall run at the above listed switching frequency. 8. The AFD shall have efficiency at full load and speed that exceeds 97%. 9. The AFD shall have an integral EMI/RFI filter as standard. 10. The system containing the AFD shall comply with the 5%level of total harmonic distortion of line voltage and the line current limits as defined in IEEE 519-1992. 11. Incoming Power: Three-phase, 480 Vac(+10%to-15%)and 50/60 Hz(+/-5 Hz)power to a fixed potential DC bus level. 12. Frequency stability of+/-0.05%for 24 hours with voltage regulation of+/-1%of maximum rated output voltage. 13. Speed regulation of+/-0.5%of base speed. 14. Insensitive to input line rotation. 15. Humidity: 0 to 95% (non-condensing and non-corrosive). 16. Altitude: 0 to 3,300 feet(1000 meters) above sea level. 17. Ambient Temperature: -10 to 50°C Storage 2.06 PUMP PROTECTION DEVICES A. For each pump provide a protective monitoring/status device as described below. Protective devices shall be a product of the pump manufacturer and shall be installed/wired integral to the AFDS for each pump. B. Jockey pump AFDS shall include a Flygt MiniCAS solid state device that provides a signal to the pump mounted moisture and thermal sensors shall measure the moisture and thermal characteristics of the motor and provide an indication of an out of tolerance condition. Upon an over-temperature condition the unit mounted LED and inner door mounted pilot light will illuminate and the motor shall shut down. When the temperature reaches an acceptable level the pump shall automatically re-start. Upon seal failure condition the pump will continue to run and the unit mounted LED and inner door mounted pilot light will illuminate. C. Each storm water pump AFDS shall include a MAS, (Monitoring and Status) module. The MAS shall be a two-piece product including the base module and an operator panel. MAS units shall comply with the following: 1. Protect the pump in case of failure, transmit warnings and alarms to operations personnel, and record pump operating data for historical recordkeeping. 2. The monitoring system shall consist of a base unit, operator interface and pump memory module. As an option, a power analyzer shall also be available. 3. The base unit shall contain a microprocessor and 2 Mbytes of memory storage for recording of pump historical data. The base unit shall contain embedded web pages accessible via Microsoft Internet Explorer and have capability to connect to operator computer directly or via modem, radio or LAN. The base unit shall also have provision to communicate to higher level control system via MODBUS RS-485 network. All sensors located in the pump shall connect to the base unit and shall include,as a minimum: a. Three (3)thermal switches embedded in the stator windings b. One (1)RTD sensor in the stator windings c. One(1)RTD sensor on the pump main bearing d. One (1)moisture leakage sensor in pump stator housing e. One (1)moisture leakage sensor in pump connection housing f. One (1)temperature sensor in pump connection housing g. Monitoring of pump current in one (1)phase 4. The base unit shall provide the ability to adjust trip points of each value sensed, and to designate specific alarm actions: either provides warning or shutdown pump. The base unit shall include three(3)relay contacts to provide annunciation of warning (NO/NC), annunciation of alarm (NO/NC),and to shutdown the pump(NC). Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS - 10 5. The operator interface shall include a two-line LCD backlit display,along with user friendly keypad and 2 LED display lights. Pump sensor data shall be viewable and parameters shall be adjustable via keypad and display. LED display lights shall indicate presence of warnings and/or alarms. A reset button shall also be included on the operator interface. 6. The pump memory module shall be located in the pump connection housing. The module shall be epoxy potted to provide proof against submergence. The memory module shall contain the pump data pate information as well as record pump starts and hours run. Pump sensor data shall be stored on memory module as histogram along with an operator-writable service history log. The pump memory module shall include onboard temperature measurement. 7. The pump monitoring system shall be capable of providing historical data of pump sensor information and present it in trend-chart format with minimum resolution of one(1)second. Operator shall be able to select individual or group of sensor inputs to view simultaneously. Sensor information shall be stored in memory as histogram data. Upon alarm condition, sensor data shall be preserved as an alarm log plot at one(1)second resolution, indicating pump conditions nine (9)minutes prior to, and one(1)minute following alarm event. Up to seven of the most recent alarm log plots shall be stored. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOTOR CONTROL A. The pump supplier shall be responsible for ordering the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives, sensors, and pump controls. B. The pump supplier shall coordinate the delivery of the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives with the electrical contractor. C. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the protection, installation, and wiring of the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives. ._ D. The electrical contractor shall install the sensors and control wiring at the direction of the pump supplier. E. The electrical contractor shall be responsible for the wiring of the motor control center, pump control panel, motor starters, variable frequency drives.The pump supplier shall furnish the watertight power and control cables for the pumps and sensors;the electrical contractor shall be responsible for terminating these cables. F. The pump supplier shall be responsible for the startup and commissioning of the pumps, pump controls, and sensors. END OF SECTION Commercial Street Pump Station Waterloo, IA 26 9000 PUMP STATION CONTROLS - 11 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS I. SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all operations, in connection with the F. Y. 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION; Contract No. 720, as shown on the contract drawings and in accordance with these specifications. The contract drawings which accompany and form a part of this contract and specifications are dated May __13 , 2008. They have the general title of F. Y. 2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST. EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION, AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION, Contract No. 720. — The drawings are numbered and separately entitled as follows: SHEET NO. DESCRIPTION 1 Title Sheet 2 General Notes 3 Typical Sections and Details 4 Summary of Quantities 5-6 Bid Reference Notes 7 Storm Sewer Tabulation 8 Misc. Tabulations 9 Site Plan 10 Geometry 11-13 Plan/Profile-West Commercial St. 14 Plan/Profile-West Jefferson St. and River Rd. 15 Plan/Profile-Deere Access Road 16 Plan/Profile-Force Main 17-20 Intersection Details 21 Signing and Pavement Markings 22 Construction Staging 23 Erosion Control Plan 24 Earthwork Tabulations 25-26 Removals 27 Deere Entrance Enhancement Plan and Details 28 Lighting Plan 29 Gatewell Modifications 30 Bar Screen-Plan, Sections and Details 31 Retaining Wall-Plan, Elevation and Section Pl-P4 Pump Station-Building Plans, Sections and Details S 1-S 12 Pump Station-Structural Plans, Sections and Details GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 1 of 5 E1-E5 Electrical Plan and Details-Pump Station Xl-X9 Cross-Sections The Iowa Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series 2001,plus General Supplemental Specifications, and Applicable Supplemental Specifications, Developmental Specifications, and Special Provisions, shall be considered as part of the contract documents. 2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents which conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 3. DUMPING AREAS Excess material resulting from construction operations that is soil or is soil- contaminated shall be disposed of on-site at a location designated by the Engineer. Other excess materials shall be hauled to the county landfill or other area secured by the contractor and approved by the Engineer. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. 4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the Contractor's responsibility. 5. REMOVED MATERIALS All materials removed as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City determines that the materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the -- Engineer as non-salvageable shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall be transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measurement or payment will be made for hauling or disposing -- of removed materials and it shall be considered incidental to applicable items. 6. OVERHAUL Overhaul will not be paid for "surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to the items to which it applies. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 2 of 5 7. MAILBOXES -- The Contractor shall notify the United States Postal Department of mailboxes which interfere with any part of the work before removing them, and the Contractor will relocate them as required by the Postmaster. The removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct payment,but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. 8. PAY ITEMS All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. 9. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contract,before the first estimate for payment is made, deliver to the Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. -' 10. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS,RAILROADS AND HIGHWAYS The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities,permission or permit which may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the price bid for the items in the proposal. 11. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING The Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The Engineer may change the schedule to accommodate changing construction conditions. The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractors performing work under other contracts which may be performed concurrently. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street and Engineering Depaitiuents of the closing and opening of streets. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 3 of 5 The Contractor shall commence work within ten(10) days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion. 12. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the Engineer to hold a pre- construction conference to discuss problems and schedules of contracts. 13. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility companies and the City electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of -- work. If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, the resolution of the additional costs incurred shall be made between the Contractor and the respective utility company. 14. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS The Contractor shall contact the City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have any street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when the work has been completed. 15. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order,provide, erect and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of Part VI of the"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices"and shall provide,keep and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the Engineer, to ensure the safety -- of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall determine,provide and obtain approval from the City Engineer on all detour locations for all street closings,barricades and posting prior to construction. These shall meet requirements of the City Police Traffic Department. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer's Office and the Police, Fire and Street Departments when the street is closed for construction. All barricading shall be in accordance with the _ latest edition of Part VI of the "Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices." Encapsulated lens sheeting is not required on this project. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 4 of 5 16. GRADES,LINES,LEVELS AND SURVEYS All necessary grades, lines, levels and surveys shall be established and maintained by the Contractor. The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as sown on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to the City Engineer before commencing work. 17. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life and health of all persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident -- prevention practices. All such protection shall be furnished to employees without cost. No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection, but shall be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work area. 18. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, the _ Contractor shall confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Waterloo Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2008 due to holidays: Labor Day, September 1, Veteran's Day, November 11, Thanksgiving Day,November 27, Day After Thanksgiving,November 28, Christmas Day, December 25, and the Day After Christmas, December 26. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2009 due to holidays: New Year's Day, January 1, Martin Luther King Jr. Day, January 19, Memorial Day, May 25, and Independence Day, July 3. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 5 of 5 SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONCRETE AND ASPHALT PAVEMENTS; DRIVEWAYS 1. PAVEMENT MATERIAL A. CONCRETE MIXES: 1. Pavement, Curb &Gutter, Driveways and Sidewalk: Air-entrained pavement Mix No. C-4 or M-4 with Class II Aggregate. (Class C)Fly ash, in accordance with IDOT 2301.04, Paragraph E, is permitted. Ground granulated blast furnace slag,in accordance with IDOT 2301.04 Paragraph F is permitted. 2. Structural: Air-entrained Mix No. C-4 or M-4. (Class C) Fly Ash and ground granulated blast furnace slag, in accordance with IDOT 2403.03, Paragraph D is permitted. The Contractor shall provide job mix designs for asphalt mixes for the Engineer's review and approval. The job mix designs shall be determined from the actual aggregates and bitumen to be used for the work. The job mix designs shall be submitted within fourteen (14) calendar days of the signing of the contract. 2. PCC PAVING The Contractor shall note the jointing configurations as shown on Concrete Pavement _ Details sheet and on the Intersection Details plan sheets. If the Contractor desires to revise the joint detail plans, any revisions must be approved by the Engineer prior to the saw cuts being made. The C-4 or M-4 concrete shall be at least 72 hours old from the completion of the pour before joints are sealed. Any light equipment(such as joint sealing equipment) shall not be allowed on the new paving until the C-4 concrete is 3 days old, or M-4 concrete is 36 hours old from the completion of the pour. The time for opening pavement for use will be based on the age and/or flexural strength or compressive strength of the concrete as determined from beam or cylinder specimens made during the progress of the work. Pavement may be opened to the Contractor's forces for the purpose of removing coverings and building shoulders after the minimum age period or strength in the following table: SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 1 of 15 Min. Min. Flexural Comp. Class of Type of Minimum Age Strength Strength Concrete Cement (psi) (psi) A Type I or II 14 days (1) 500 4,000 A Type III 7 days 500 4,000 C Type I or II 7 days (2) 500 4,000 C Type III 48 hours 500 4,000 M Type I or II 48 hours 500 4,000 NOTES: (1) 10 days for concrete 8 inches or more in thickness. (2) 5 days for concrete 9 inches or more in thickness. General traffic may be routed over pavement when the concrete has attained the age and/or strength requirements specified. At the contractor's option, the time for opening pavement may be determined through the use of the maturity method as described in IDOT materials I.M. 383. If the contractor uses the maturity method, saw cutting may be done using early sawing procedures for transverse saw cuts. For all early saw cutting,backer rod will not be required. Hot pour material shall be used to fill the joints after the joints have been blown clean. All longitudinal joint bars shall be properly positioned by the use of an approved procedure or method. This approval shall be made well in advance of the first concrete pour. If mechanical dowel bar inserting equipment is used but is not performing acceptably, as deteiniined by the Engineer, this procedure shall not be used for the remainder of the project. The Contractor shall not be allowed to cut in expansion ("E")joints after paving. When thirty(30)minutes or more has elapsed since the paver has moved, a construction header shall be placed behind the stagnant location of the paving machine. All concrete in advance of this header shall be removed. The City will have the option to core the paving at its own expense to determine compliance with specified paving thicknesses. IDOT specification 2301.34 and 2301.35 and current revisions shall apply with the following exceptions: 1. A minimum of three(3) cores shall be taken for each street. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 2 of 15 2. If additional coring is required due to deficient thickness, it shall be at the Contractor's expense, with the cores being given to the City for — measurements and evaluation. 3. Payment shall not be greater than 100 percent(100%) of the contract unit — price. 3. COLD WEATHER PROTECTION FOR CONCRETE PAVING,AND BIKEWAY — PAVING Cold weather protection will be completed by the Contractor, as required by the -- specifications,but will be considered incidental to applicable paving items. 4. CURING COMPOUND APPLICATION The bid item unit price for the construction of the item shall be reduced 25 percent for areas receiving less than specified coverage or late application of curing compound. This applies to all PCC items. 5. LINSEED OIL SURFACE TREATMENT OF PCC PAVING/CURB AND GUTTER This item shall consist of extending the curing of concrete and protecting the entire finished concrete surface of the pavement and curbs from the de-icing agents used during cold weather by applying a linseed oil solution. The linseed oil solution application is required only on paving placed after August 31. A curing compound/linseed oil combination product shall be used. Material shall conform to ASTM-C-309, Type 2, Class B, white curing compound and anti-spalling compound _ made from boiled linseed oil. Linseed oil treatment shall be considered incidental to the paving items and no separate payment will be made. 6. HOT-WEATHER CONCRETING If water is added at the job site to compensate for loss of slump or workability during hot weather, a plant ticket will be required for each load. This plant ticket shall indicate the _ maximum amount of water that can be added per the maximum w/c ratio in accordance with Iowa Depaitment of Transportation Standard Specifications. 7. MANHOLE BOXOUTS Manhole boxouts shall be constructed with PCC with specified reinforcing. Payment for this work shall be made under the bid item PCC Pavement. All structures in paving shall be referenced for location prior to placement of paving material. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 3 of 15 SUBGRADE AND SUBBASE 8. SPECIAL BACKFILL Unless adjusted in the field by the Engineer,the thickness of Special Backfill shall be placed as shown on the typical cross section with a tolerance of zero feet less than specified thickness and 0.05 feet greater. Special Backfill shall be placed in uniform lifts of not more than 6 inches in thickness. Equipment used shall conform with IDOT Article 2001.05,Paragraphs B, C, D, or F except rollers shall have a minimum compactive effort of 300 pounds per inch(5.25 kg/mm) width. No crushed concrete or composite pavement -- shall be allowed in the top 6 inches. Special Backfill material shall be paid for per square yard of material placed. If the Contractor places additional width from that specified in the typical section or additional material than that approved by the Engineer in the field, it shall be at his/her own cost. All Special Backfill shall be compacted with a minimum of six roller passes. While using the Granular subbase as a work platform, the Contractor shall keep the Special Backfill material at the specified minimum thickness and cross section. EARTHWORK AND EXCAVATION 9. EXCAVATION Work under this item shall consist of excavation to accommodate the proposed paving section, Special Backfill and template grading as shown on the typical sections and cross- sections and described in the Bid Reference Notes. It also includes additional excavation, commonly referred to as Subgrade Repair, which is determined to be necessary based on field conditions and at the direction of the Engineer. Excavation, which is required behind the curb, shall be considered incidental to applicable items. Estimated quantities (C.Y.) based on calculations by the Engineer are included in the quantity breakdown. 10. TOP SOIL PLACEMENT Six (6") inches of topsoil shall be placed at locations disturbed by excavation or grading operations as directed in the field by the Engineer. The Contractor may use existing topsoil to restore the parking area. The topsoil shall be free of deleterious materials such as rocks, bricks, stones, roots, or other debris. The topsoil shall be compacted, shaped and raked to provide a suitable seed bed as directed by the Engineer. All topsoil material must be approved by the Engineer prior to its placement. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 4 of 15 SEWER AND STRUCTURES 11. MECHANICALLY COMPACTED BACKFILL All ditches in street right of way shall be mechanically compacted to ninety-five percent -- (95%)of Standard Proctor Density. Payment for this work shall be incidental to the contract and no separate payment shall be made for compaction of backfill. 12. STORM SEWER STRUCTURES Unit bid prices for these structures shall include excavation, furnishing all labor and materials,backfilling and all other work necessary to complete the structure as detailed on the plans or in the specifications. The Contractor shall be responsible for replacement and for the cost of any casting which is damaged due to his operations or handling. Contractor shall also construct a P.C.C.boxout/special shaping at each structure, which are considered incidental to the structure bid price. Structure may be backfilled four days after being poured with C-4 mix and after two (2) days with M-4 mix. The forms may be removed after 12 hours. QUALITY CONTROL 13. SMOOTHNESS REQUIREMENTS Any areas where the smoothness is less than desirable, as determined by the Engineer, shall be checked by the City with a bump cart. Areas with bumps greater than 1/4 inch in 10 feet shall be surface planed by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. The City may also require surface planing based on cross-sections. In the case of an asphalt surface, planing or additional overlay may be required at the Contractor's expense. Areas to be checked for smoothness by a bump cart will be determined by the Engineer based on the ride produced by the completed paving and/or a visual inspection. Entire lengths of streets will not be bump cart tested unless conditions warrant that it be done. 14. CRACKING Should uncontrolled or random cracking occur, a joint of specified width and depth shall be formed with a crack saw or router along the line of the crack, and the joint shall be sand cleaned, roped and sealed as specified at the Contractor's expense. Should a crack develop from pavement settlement,base repair and full panels shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. Should transverse or longitudinal joints widen or open up, the joint shall be stitched according to specifications determined by the Engineer. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 5 of 15 PAYMENT, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES AND PENALTIES 15. PAYMENT FOR PAVING ITEMS This paragraph shall apply to the unit prices for paving related items and restrict full payment of the unit bid prices until a street or phase is completed and opened to traffic or surface restored. By providing a breakdown of the unit price, the intent is to encourage the Contractor to promptly complete the paving. The breakdown of the unit price does not give the Contractor the choice of eliminating a portion of the work under this unit price or delay his schedule for reason of obtaining payment based on a certain percentage of his preference. Payment shall be made on a breakdown of the unit bid price basis by withholding a portion of the unit bid price based on work completed or by apportioning the quantity of completed — work in accordance with the following schedule: Payment as % of Contract Work Performed Unit Price for Paving Items A. All items of work related to paving, except for those items identified in "B" which follows. 80% B. Fine grading of backfill,resetting mail boxes,boxouts, final cleanup and linseed oil surface treatment. 20% • When all work is completed, payment shall be made on 100 percent(100%) of the unit bid price for paving related items. Topsoil is paid as a separate bid item and will be paid when completed. 16. PAYMENT FOR SEWER PIPE AND DRAIN TILE This paragraph shall apply to the unit prices of sanitary and storm sewer pipe and drain tile and appurtenances and restrict full payment of the unit bid price until street is completed and opened to traffic or surface is restored. By providing a breakdown on the unit price, the intent is to encourage the Contractor to promptly restore the trenches. The breakdown of the unit price does not give the Contractor the choice of eliminating a portion of the work under this unit price or delaying his schedule for reason of obtaining payment based on a certain percentage of his preference. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 6 of 15 Contract for Sanitary or — Storm Work Performed Payment as % of Sewer& Drain Unit Price A. Trench excavation, including removal 40%and stockpiling of crushed rock and/ or topsoil from existing street, removal -- of surfacing, laying of pipe, dewatering, pumping, and other work as described under sanitary or storm sewer pipe and drain tile and required for the laying of pipe, and placing two (2) feet of backfill above the top of pipe. — B. Backfill of trench and compaction with 25% moisture and density control of pipe and appurtenances. If such compaction with moisture and density control is not required, 65% of the unit bid price will be paid when backfill is complete. C. Shaping of street surface ready to receive 35% paving or surfacing or natural grade including relaying of topsoil (where street surfacing will not be required) and all other work as further described in this paragraph. When all work is completed,payment shall be made on 100% of the unit bid price for sanitary, storm sewer pipe and drain tile. 17. TRAFFIC CONTROL The Engineer, or authorized representative, shall periodically review traffic control that has been put in place by the Contractor. If traffic control devices are found to be without proper maintenance, penalties shall be assessed. Improper maintenance shall include,but not be limited to, the following situations: A. Less than 100 percent of lights in working order. B. Any barricade or sign moved or tipped over. C. Fencing not supported in a vertical position. D. Fencing not placed around excavations when workers/equipment are not working at the location. E. Lack of proper barricades or signage. Each incident is treated as a separate citation on an individual basis. It is not intended that minor deficiencies be price adjusted if corrected the day notification is given. In addition SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 7 of 15 to a price adjustment, the Engineer may suspend work for irresponsible and/or repeated failure to construct the project using proper traffic control procedures. Penalties: 1st Offense Written warning given by City. 2nd Offense $ 100 3rd Offense $ 250 4th Offense $ 500 5th Offense $1,000 6th Offense Engineer's discretion(amount or more equal or greater than $1,000) 18. UNAUTHORIZED USE OF PAVING If the Contractor, any of his subcontractors, or any other motorist drives any unauthorized vehicles or equipment on the paving before it has reached its specified strength and/or age, the following shall be required of the Contractor: A. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the paving has been damaged to the extent of surface indentations being visible, stress cracks or loss of strength due to cracking, panels in the affected area(s) shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense. B. If no visible signs of damage are present, a decrease change order shall be issued. The amount of the decrease change order will be determined by a percentage of the cost of total removal and replacement of the effected area(s). The amount shall be the percentage proportional to the cure time remaining before authorized opening. (If paving requires a seven-day cure time and unauthorized Contractor traffic has driven on the paving on the fifth day, 2/7 of the total replacement cost shall be assessed for the area affected. If the maturity method is used, the amount will be based on the strength curve and the strength at time of unauthorized use compared to opening strength required.) 19. RAIN/SNOW DAMAGED CONCRETE Areas not covered when raining or snowing conditions exist shall receive a 5 percent deduct even if no damage is visible. If aggregate is visible,there shall be a 10 percent deduct. If cement/water paste is washed from aggregate and/or troughs have occurred in the concrete, 15 percent deduct,patching or full removal and replacement, as determined by the Engineer, of the damaged area shall be required. See IDOT Construction Manual Chapter 2, Section 2.53.B2c for additional description of damage. Refinishing the surface to eliminate these conditions shall not constitute an acceptable product. Tempering the surface of the paving with water to enhance finishing operations shall be considered the same as rain. If further deterioration occurs within the two-year maintenance bond period, additional correction will be required. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 8 of 15 20. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period,plus authorized extensions, the Contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount -- described below for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. For the completion of the storm sewer, pump station force main and gatewell modifications, Liquidated Damages shall be two thousand dollars ($2,000.00)per day. For the project completion the -- Liquidated Damages shall be one thousand dollars ($1,000.00)per day. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the Contractor does, or could have worked from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sundays if no work is done, and legal holidays. Also, days will not be charged for delays caused by late delivery of pumps, controls and/or appurtenant equipment items to be provided by others under the Waterloo Contract No. 750. The Contractor shall consider the following pump, control and appurtenant delivery periods specified in Waterloo Contract No. 750 for the delivery of equipment to be installed by the Contractor of this Waterloo Contract No. 720: Delivery time after issuance Items of Notice to Proceed by City 1. Pump base elbows, guide bars, access covers, 14 Weeks level sensing equipment and appurtenant items, for all four(4)pumps. _ 2. All pumps and appurtenant items, for the Base Bid, 26 Weeks Base Bid plus the Alternate No. 1 Bid or the Base Bid plus the Alternate No. 2 Bid. 3. Motor control center,variable frequency drive and 26 Weeks all other equipment and appurtenant items for the Base Bid, Base Bid plus Alternate No. 1 Bid or Base Bid plus the Alternate No. 2 Bid. The above delivery times are for the Base Bid and the Base Bid plus either Alternate Bid. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work, -- the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 9 of 15 This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, Engineering and contract administration. 21. HAUL ROUTES Haul routes to and from the project site shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. In general,the Contractor shall request haul routes over the main streets in the area, staying on streets within the project as much as possible and should not include truck-embargoed streets. 22. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The Standard Specifications which are referenced in the contract documents are designated as follows: WATERLOO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - "Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works Construction, City of Waterloo, Iowa." IDOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation,Ames, Iowa, Series of 2001" (unless otherwise noted) and current revisions thereof. 23. QUANTITY ADJUSTMENTS All Bid Items are exempted from consideration under the provisions of Section B. "Scope of Work," Paragraph 7 of the "General Specifications for Construction" concerning the variance of the "As-Built" quantity of the listed item by more than twenty(20%)percent from the estimated quantity specified in the contract: 24. PERCENT OF CONTRACT TO BE PERFORMED BY PRIME CONTRACTOR The Prime Contractor shall be required to perform at least 50 percent of the total contract amount of this project. Purchasing of materials for subcontractors will not be an acceptable method for the prime contractor to meet the 50 percent requirement. 25. VOLUNTARY PARTNERING The City of Waterloo intends to encourage the formation of a partnership with the contractor and its principal subcontractors. This partnership will be structured to draw on the strengths of each organization to identify and achieve mutually beneficial goals. The objectives are effective and efficient contract performance and completion within budget, on schedule, and in accordance with plans and specifications. This partnership will be multi-lateral in makeup, and participation will be totally voluntary. Any cost associated with effectuating this partnering will be agreed to by all parties and will be shared equally by the participating parties. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 10 of 15 The establishment of a partnership charter on this project will not change the legal relationship of the parties to the contract nor relieve the parties from any of the terms of the — contract. 26. CLEARING AND GRUBBING Clearing shall consist of cutting,removal and disposal of trees. Grubbing shall consist of removal and disposal of stumps, including roots when the stumps and/or roots are located in an area of future paving or storm sewer in grassed area between back of curb and sidewalk. When the stumps and/or roots are located in the grassed area between the back of curb and sidewalk, the stump may be ground out to a minimum depth of eighteen(18) — inches below the adjacent ground level with the wood chips removed and the stump/root area filled with acceptable soil. When the stumps and roots are completely removed, the excavated area shall be filled with acceptable backfill material. The Contractor or individual performing the clearing and grubbing must be a licensed tree trimmer with the City of Waterloo. Before receiving a license, the City Clerk shall receive — a Certificate of Insurance in limits of not less than Three Hundred Thousand dollars ($300,000.00) combined single limit to any person and One Hundred Thousand dollars ($100,000.00)property damage. The City and its employees shall be named as additional insured's. All licensing, insurance and performance requirements shall comply with 1993 Code of Ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa—Chapter 35. 27. SEED, FERTILIZE AND MULCH IDOT Specification 2601, Erosion Control shall apply using the urban and rural areas seed mixture and application rate,where applicable. The Contractor shall be paid on a per acre basis. 28. PRECAST DETECTABLE WARNING SURFACES A. General. Detectable warnings shall consist of a surface of truncated domes aligned in a square grid pattern and shall comply with the manufacturer's specifications for installation and material. 1. Dome Size. Truncated domes in a detectable warning surface shall have a base diameter of 0.9 inches minimum to 1.4 inches maximum, a top diameter of 50% of the base diameter minimum to 65% of the base diameter maximum, and a height of 0.2 inches. 2. Dome Spacing. Truncated domes in a detectable warning surface shall have a center-to-center spacing of 1.6 inches minimum and 2.4 inches maximum, and a base-to-base spacing of 0.65 inches minimum,measured between the most — adjacent domes on square grid. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO. 720 Page 11 of 15 3. Contrast. Detectable warning surfaces shall contrast visually with adjacent walking surfaces. Approved color shall be SOLOMAN it115 TONE DARK RED as supplied by Stetson Building Products or Dynamic Color Solutions CS #1516 RED as supplied by Marquart Block. 4. Size. Detectable warning surfaces shall extend 24 inches minimum in the direction of travel and the full width of the curb ramp, landing, or blended transition. Approved size shall be 24"x 24"x 2". 5. Lifting Provisions. Units are to be made with cast in place inserts or galvanized lift loops to facilitate installation. 6. Cure. The area between the Precast sections and the back of curb shall be cured per Section 12 Curing and Concrete. Contractor shall use care so that no cure is applied to the precast sections. B. Location. 1. Curb Ramps and Blended Transitions. The detectable warning surface shall be located so that the edge nearest the curb line is 6 inches minimum and 8 inches maximum from the curb line. C. Approved Vendors (or equal) 1. Lister Concrete Products, Inc. 2116 Commercial Street Waterloo, Iowa 50702 (319) 232-4727 2. Hanover Architectural Products 240 Bender Road Hanover, Pennsylvania 17331 (717) 637-0500 3. Steps Plus, Inc. 6375 Thompson Road Syracuse,New York 13206 (315) 432-0885 29. SUBMERSIBLE PUMPING STATION, PUMPS AND APPURTENANCES 29.01 GENERAL A. The pumps, adjustable frequency drives (AFD'S), controls, discharge connection elbows, guide rails,lifting chains, access covers, anchoring bolts and devices, water level sensing and signaling equipment,pump power cable wiring,pump control cable and pump operating equipment is being bid separately from the installation of said equipment under a City of Waterloo Contract No. 750. These bids are further separated by a Base Bid and — SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 12 of 15 Alternate Bids 1 and 2. Additional Bids will be received for Alternates 3 and 4 in this Construction Contract No. 720 that will not involve storm water pumping station — equipment. The equipment to be provided under the aforesaid separate Equipment Contract No. 750 — shall include all equipment necessary to provide a complete, fully functioning pumping system for the various Base and Alternate Bids. Said Contract No. 750 equipment bid does not include equipment for lighting,heating or ventilating the control building or for — bringing electrical power to the building from MidAmerican Energy Co. Said Contract No. 750 equipment supplier shall work with the Construction Contractor for — City Contract No. 720 by providing the Construction Contractor with installation instructions and supervision during installation of equipment he/she provides for this project and instructions for the installation of piping, wiring, conduits, special concrete floor shaping and appurtenant items not provided as part of the equipment contract. Said Equipment Contract No. 750 shall also include start-up services after equipment installation to verify that the equipment has been installed properly and is operating properly. a. The pump station has been designed to include one(1) 6,000 gpm submersible non-clog pump with a TDH of 41.6 feet (32.6 feet static head) for small storm water flows and three(3) large submersible, non-clog pumps of identical size, type, flow and TDH that will be capable of pumping a combined stormwater —' flow of 63,000 gpm when all three(3)pumps are pumping at the same time (excluding the one(1)-6,000 gpm pump). Said three (3) large pumps shall also be capable of operating satisfactorily singularly and as duplex pumps within their respective and combined published pump curves for the static and total heads to be experienced with the valving and piping shown on the plans from the pumps through the force main to the outlet. The calculated flow and head requirements for these pumps are as follows: Pumps "On" Total Flow Individual Static TDH Together gpm Pump Flow Head gpm Ft Ft 1 27,000 27,000 30 58 2 48,000 24,000 30 67 3 63,000 21,000 30 76 _ The following describes what equipment is to be provided by others under Contract No. _ 750 for this Contract No. 720 Contractor to install under the Base Bid and Alternate Bids 1 and 2. 1. Base Bid. The Base Bid includes all access doors and covers for all four(4)pumps, all discharge elbows for all four(4)pumps and all liquid level sensing and signaling equipment for all four(4)pumps. The Base Bid also includes one (1) — small pump (Pump No. 1 in the Plans) and one(1) large pump (Pump No. 2 in the Plans) and the complete operating system for these pumps, including the adjustable SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 13 of 15 frequency drive(AFD) for Pump No. 2 and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete,properly functioning pumping system for pumps 1 and 2. 2. Alternate No. 1 Bid. The Alternate No. 1 Bid includes one(1) additional large pump (pump No. 3 in the Plans) and the necessary additions to the operating system to operate this pump with Pumps 1 and 2, including one(1) additional adjustable frequency(AFD) and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete,properly functioning pumping system for pumps 1, 2 and 3. 3. Alternate No. 2 Bid. The Alternate No. 2 Bid includes two (2) additional large pumps (Pumps 3 and 4 in the Plans) and the necessary additions to the operating system to operate Pumps 1,2,3 and 4, including two (2) additional adjustable frequency drives (AFD's) and all other equipment necessary to provide a complete, properly functioning pumping system for pumps 1,2,3 and 4. 29.02 SUBMERSIBLE PUMPS — A. The pumping systems shall include submersible non-clog waste water pumps equipped with submersible electric motors as provides by Flygt, KSB or approved equal. The system shall include the number and size of pumps described herein, the Construction Plans and Specification Section 11216. Pump discharge connection elbows, mounting equipment, guide rails with bottom, top and intermediate supports as required for proper support, access covers and appurtenant items shall also be provided. B. The Contract No.750 pump manufacturer shall verify that the pumps it is providing will function properly with the designed structure,piping and outlet forcemain for the operating flows specified and the static and dynamic head conditions the pumping system will encounter for Pump No. 1 operating singularly and all combinations of Pump No's 2, 3, and 4 operating singularly and together as one, two and three pumps operating at the same time as simplex, duplex and triplex systems. C. The pumps shall be provided by others under Contract No. 750 with sufficient submersible power and control cable suitable for submersible pump applications to efficiently install, remove and re-install each pump, without need for personnel to enter the wet well. The power cable shall be sized according to NEC and ICEA standards and shall meet P-MSHA approval. This Contract No. 720 contractor shall install these materials. 29.03 PUMP CONTROLS A. The pump control equipment shall be provided by the manufacturer's representative supplying the pumps under separate Contract No. 750. The pump control equipment shall be a completely integrated automatic control and monitoring system consisting of the required automation and alarm monitoring equipment in a factory wired and tested assembly. The automatic control and alarm/monitoring system components shall be standard, catalogued, stocked products of the system manufacturer supplier to assure one source responsibility, immediately available replacement parts,proper system interconnections and reliable long term operation. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 14 of 15 B. All of said equipment and materials shall be subject to the Engineer's review and shall not be purchased or manufactured until the review is complete. — C. The supplier of said equipment shall prepare detailed design information,procure, configure,install, start-up,make ready for use, the complete instrumentation's systems as — indicated on the plans and in each of the specifications. The specifications and drawings include descriptions of functional operation and performance, as well as standards,but do not necessarily enumerate detailed specifications for all components and devices that are essential for system operation. However, all components and devices shall be furnished and installed as required to provide complete and operable systems for accomplishing the functions and meeting the performance set forth herein. D. Qualified Personnel to supervise the installation of all equipment provided under this contract and for start-up and testing of said equipment shall be provided under the Equipment Contract No. 750. E. The motor control center and all other control devices and cabinets shall be designed and provided such that if only the base bid is initially accepted by the City, the motor control center and all other control devices may be modified in the future to include Pump Nos. 3 and 4 within the building without disrupting the operation of Pump Nos. 1 and 2, and without major modifications to the controls and other equipment provided under the Base Bid. F. Control and operating equipment shall be designed and provided which is compatible with the space shown within the pump station control building. 29.04 ACCESS COVERS A. The access covers to be provided by the Contract No. 750 Equipment Provider shall be double leaf, angle frame, aluminum access frames and covers of the sizes noted in the Construction Plans, and described herein and on said Plans. Door panels shall be 'A"thick, _ mill finish, aluminum frame incorporating a continuous concrete anchor. Door panels shall be '/ inch(7 mm) aluminum diamond plate, reinforced to withstand a live load of 300 lbs. psf(1464 kg. psm),Uniform live load with a maximum allowable deflection of 1/150 of the span. Doors shall open to 90 degrees and automatically lock with T-316 stainless steel hold open arms with aluminum release handles and shall include stainless steel compression springs for easy door operation. Doors shall close flush with the frame. Hinges and all fastening hardware shall be T-316 stainless steel. Unit shall lock with a non-corrosive locking bar and have a non-corrosive handle. Unit shall carry a lifetime guarantee against defects in material and/or workmanship. _ All hinges,bolts, washer, etc. shall be T-316 stainless steel. All areas of the frames to be in direct contact with concrete shall be painted with bituminous coating. All access covers to be provided with safety grates painted with safety orange powder coat. All four(4) access covers are to be provided under the Equipment Contract No. 750 under the Base Bid and installed by the Contractor under this Contract No. 720. SPECIAL PROVISIONS CONTRACT NO.720 Page 15 of 15 SPECIAL PROVISION JD-RCRA CITY OF WATERLOO'S SPECIAL PROVISION FOR CONSTRUCTION AT THE FORMER JOHN DEERE RCRA FACILITY THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS ARE AMENDED BY THE FOLLOWING ADDITIONS AND MODIFICATIONS. THESE ARE SPECIAL PROVISIONS AND SHALL PREVAIL OVER THOSE PUBLISHED IN THE STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS. 1.01 DESCRIPTION This Special Provision covers the requirements for construction on the former Deere and Company(Deere) property,which is the location of a U.S.Environmental Protection Agency(EPA)Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA) Site. This Special Provision was developed to address Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA)and U.S.EPA requirements related worker safety and the implementation of corrective measures on the former Deere property. This property,which includes an area north of Westfield — Avenue/U.S.218/63,south and east of John Deere Waterloo Works,and west of River Road is referred to as the Area of Contamination(AOC)A(Figure 1). In general,this site is classified as a RCRA site due to the possibility of chemical spills or prior waste filling — operations. Foundry sand and other Industrial fill materials have been discovered in portions of AOC A. Industrial fill, where present, has been found to include contaminants which may exceed the"Region IX Industrial Preliminary Remediation Goals. Groundwater has been found to include contaminants which may exceed Region IX Tap water goals or U.S. EPA's Maximum Contaminant Levels (MCLs) for domestic groundwater use. Chemical hazards of potential concern, detected within AOC A, have been found to include: • Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) — Acetone, Benzene, Chlorobenzene, Chloroethane, Chloroform,Cis-1,2-Dichloroethene,Ethylbenzene,Hexane,Isopropylbenzene,Methylene chloride, Methyl tert butyl ether (MTBE), Naphthalene, N-Butylbenzene, N-Propylbenzene, Sec- — Butylbenzene,Tert-Butylbenzene,Tetrachloroethene(PCE),Trichloroethene(TCE),Toluene,Sym- Trinitrobenzene, Xylenes, 1,2-Dichlorobenzene, 1,4-Dichlorobenzene, 2,4-Dinitrotoluene, 4- Isopropyltoluene, 2-Methylnaphthalene, 1,1,2,2-Tetrachloroethane, 1,1,1-Trichloroethane, 1,1,2- Trichloro ethane, 1,2,4-Trimethylbenzene, 1,3,5-Trimethylbenzene. • Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds (SVOCs) — Acenaphthene, Acenaphthylene, Anthracene, Naphthalene, Benzo(a)anthracene, Benzo(a)pyrene, Benzo(b)fluoranthene, Benzo(g,h,i)perylene, Benzo(k)fluoranthene,Bis(2-Ethylhexyl)phthalate,Chrysene Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene,Dibenzofuran, Fluoranthene,Fluorene,Indeno(1,2,3-cd)pyrene,Naphthalene, Phenanthrene,Phenol,Pyrene,7,12- Dimethylbenz(a)anthracene. • Polychlorinated Biphenyls(PCBs)—Aroclor 1248,Aroclor 1254,Aroclor 1260. • Metals—Arsenic,Barium,Beryllium,Cadmium,Chromium,Cobalt,Copper,Lead,Mercury,Nickel, — Selenium,Vanadium,Zinc. 1.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS In general, the requirements for construction in the AOC A stipulate that soil within said area must either remain within the existing footprint,or be transported off-site to a treatment and/or disposal facility approved by ENGINEER. Any exposed soils in AOC A must be capped with either a paved surface(as specified in the plans) or 1.5 feet of clean imported material. In areas to be covered by concrete or asphalt surfacing, as shown in the plans, the surfacing is considered to be a sufficient cover and the requirement for 1.5 feet of clean fill does not apply. Requirements for the imported fill material are described in Part 1.02.2.1 of this specification. Page 2 of 14 Soil and/or groundwater,if exposed within AOC A,shall be managed in a way that is protective of human health and the enviromnent and complies with applicable federal, state, and local requirements. The corrective measures associated with contaminated soil shall allow for the use of U.S.EPA AOC policy as described in the National Contingency Plan and as such,routine soil and debris handling can occur as long as this material is not transferred outside the AOC A boundary. Special controls shall be implemented during earthwork construction and dewatering activities to minimize environmental releases and to protect worker safety. These controls are described in this Special Provision, the project-specific health and safety plan(HASP),and Plan Sheet S-12(Cofferdam Dewatering Notes). A preliminary version of ENGINEER's HASP is available for review at the City of Waterloo's Engineering Office. 1.02.1 General Responsibilities and Requirements 1.1 At all times, the CONTRACTOR shall conduct construction work safely and in accordance with applicable local,state, and federal requirements concerning construction health and safety. 1.2 The Construction Contractor has the option to adopt ENGINEER's HASP or develop and administer their own HASP as long as the requirements are equivalent to or more stringent than ENGINEER's HASP. If the Contractor chooses to develop and administer their own HASP,they must also provide their own health&safety personnel in accordance with this specification. 1.3 WORK INCLUDED A. Health and Safety Requirements for the CONTRACTOR. Health and safety is the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR. The CONTRACTOR shall take precautions to prevent damage,injury,or loss to all employees on the work site and to other persons who may be affected by such incidents. _ B. Principal Work Items. 1. Project-specific HASP development and implementation. Notwithstanding CONTRACTOR's use of ENGINEER's HASP,the CONTRACTOR shall still be responsible for maintaining all programs and documentation required by applicable law,rules and regulations. 2. Adherence to OWNER's Safety Requirements. C. Unforeseen Hazards. Should any unforeseen or site peculiar safety related factor,hazard,or condition become evident during performance of works at site,it shall be CONTRACTOR's responsibility to bring such to the attention of ENGINEER verbally and in writing as quickly as possible,for resolution. In the interim take prudent action to establish and maintain safe working conditions and to safeguard,employees,the public,OWNER,ENGINEER,and the environment. 1.4 DISCLOSURE OF PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL CHARACTERISTICS A. ENGINEER will make available to CONTRACTOR,documents and information that relates to the identity, location, quantity, nature or characteristics of hazardous substances at, or under the work areas. Applicable documents and information are available at the City of Waterloo's Engineering Office. Page3of14 B. The CONTRACTOR is responsible for reviewing and understanding all available surveys, data,studies,plans,documents or reports pertaining to surface or subsurface site conditions required for analyzing possible hazards present at the site. ENGINEER,however,assumes no responsibility or liability for their accuracy or completeness. 1.5 REFERENCES A. If CONTRACTOR develops their own site-specific HASP, it shall be consistent with the latest version of the following guidance and/or regulations: 1. 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 1926 Safety and Health Regulations for Construction 2. 29 CFR 1910 Occupational Safety and Health Standards(General Industry). -- 3. 29 CFR 1910.120 Hazardous Waste Operations and Emergency Response (HAZWOPER). B. Requirements for Worker Health and Safety included in the National Oil and Hazardous Substances Contingency Plan(40 CFR 300.38). C. Occupational Safety and Health Guidance Manual for Hazardous Waste Site Activities, NIOSH Publication No. 85-115,October 1985. D. The Standard Operating Safety Guidelines,EPA,November 1984. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. If CONTRACTOR chooses to develop and administer their own HASP,they shall submit the proposed HASP to ENGINEER within 10 working days from the Pre-Construction Meeting date and prior to conducting any mobilization or related site work. B. The HASP shall include,at a minimum: 1. Employee training documentation. 2. Employee compliance agreements. 3. Logs and Reports. a. Safety Inspection Log. b. Weekly Health and Safety Report. c. Check In/Check Out Log for the site. 4. Qualifications of Program Safety Manager(PSM). 5. Qualifications of Field Safety Officer(FSO). 6. Overall site operations safety plan. 7. Emergency and contingency plans. C. Specific plan requirements are listed in Part 1.02.3.02 of this Specification. 1.7 DEFINITIONS A. Program Safety Manager (PSM). CONTRACTOR's representative responsible for development,submittal,and implementation of the HASP. B. Field Safety Officer(FSO). CONTRACTOR's representative directly responsible for the daily implementation of the HASP. Page 4 of 14 C. Gaseous Conditions. (Use OSHA definition). D. Potentially Gaseous Conditions. (Use OSHA definition). E. Non-gaseous Conditions. (Use OSHA definition). _ F. OSHA Permissible Exposure Limits(PEL). Time-weighted average(TWA)concentrations to which most workers can be exposed for eight hours per day, 40 hours per week on a permanent basis with no significant health effects. These concentrations are enforceable OSHA standards. (Source: NIOSH/OSHA;Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards,February, 2004). G. Immediately Dangerous to Life and Health (IDLH). Concentrations representing a maximum level from which one could escape within 30 minutes without any escape- impairing symptoms or irreversible health effects. (Source:NIOSH/OSHA;Pocket Guide to Chemical Hazards,February,2004). H. Threshold Limit Values Time Weighted Averaged(TLV-TWA). Time-weighted average concentrations to which most workers can be exposed for eight hours per day,40 hours per week on a permanent basis with no significant health effects. They are similar to PELs, except they are not enforceable standards and are updated annually. (Source: ACGIH Threshold Limit Values and Biological Exposure Indices for(1990-91.) I. Other Abbreviations/Definitions — 1. AOC: Area of Contamination,as described in Par. 1.01 2. CFR: Code of Federal Regulations 3. CGI: Combustible Gas Indicator 4. CIH: Certified Industrial Hygienist 5. CPR: Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation 6. CSP: Certified Safety Professional 7. DOT: Department of Transportation 8. EPA: U.S.Environmental Protection Agency 9. HASP: Health and Safety Plan 10. LEL: Lower Explosive Limit 11. OSHA: Occupational Safety and Health Administration 12. PCB: Polychlorinated Biphenyls 13. PID: Photo-Ionization Detector 14. PRG: Preliminary Remediation Goal 15. RAM: Respiratory Air Monitor 16. RCRA: Resource Conservation and Recovery Act 17. SOP: Standard Operating Procedure 18. SVOC: Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds 19. VOC: Volatile Organic Compounds 1.8 SITE SAFETY REGULATIONS A. The CONTRACTOR shall report any suspected contaminated material to the ENGINEER upon discovery. B. Contact with contaminated or suspected contaminated surfaces should be avoided. C. Alcoholic beverages and controlled substances shall not be allowed on-site. Page 5 of 14 D. The use of tobacco products is prohibited inside the Work Zone. ENGINEER will designate work zone boundaries. E. A project-specific HASP shall be developed for all phases of site operations and shall be made available to all personnel. F. All personnel shall be familiar with standard operating safety procedures and any additional instructions and information contained in the site HASP. G. All personnel shall adhere to the project-specific HASP. Personnel entering the site will be required to read and sign the HASP,demonstrating their concurrence with the requirements and their understanding of the safety procedures of the plan.H. All personnel going on-site shall be adequately trained and thoroughly briefed on anticipated hazards, safety equipment to be employed, safety practices to be followed, emergency • procedures and communications,and responsible safety personnel on-site. I. Entrance and exit locations shall be designated and posted,and emergency escape routes shall be delineated. Warning instructions for site evacuation must be established and communicated to all personnel. 1.9 MEDICAL CARE A. Medical care is divided into routine health care and emergency medical care and treatment. 1. Routine Health Care. Routine health care shall provide special pre-assignment and periodic medical examinations. 2. Any special tests needed depend on the chemical substance to which the individual could be or has been exposed,as recommended by the physician. • 3. Care and counseling in the case of potential,known,or suspected exposure to toxic substances shall also be provided. B. Emergency Medical Care and Treatment. The Medical Program shall address emergency medical care and the treatment of project personnel. The medical program shall include: 1. The posted name,address,and telephone number of the nearest medical facility with a map,the travel time,and the directions from each job site. 2. An investigation of local emergency organizations to respond to potential emergencies at the site. If local organizations are unable to adequately respond, other emergency prearrangements shall be made. 3. Arrangements shall be made to quickly obtain emergency services. Telephone numbers and procedures shall be posted. 4. The posted location and route to the nearest medical facility 1.10 PERSONNEL A. Program Safety Manager(PSM) 1. Qualifications. a. Two or more years'relevant experience. b. Certified Safety Professional(CSP)or a Certified Industrial Hygienist(CIE). Page 6 of 14 c. Management/supervisor training course completed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(4). 2. Responsibilities. a. Develop,submit,and implement HASP. b. Conduct site inspections to monitor compliance with HASP. c. Provide and coordinate training sessions. d. Conduct incident investigations and follow-up. e. Notify OWNER of HASP violations,health-related incidents,and other increased risk situations. 3. Authority. a. Suspend an individual from field activities for infractions of the HASP b. Authorize personnel to enter the work site. B. Field Safety Officer(FSO). 1. Qualifications. a. One or more years'relevant experience. b. Current certification in First Aid and CPR procedures. c. Management/supervisor training course completed in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.120(e)(4). 2. Responsibilities. a. Direct health and safety activities on-site. b. Report safety-related incidents to PSM and fill out incident forms as required. c. Implement HASP. d. Maintain health and safety equipment. e. Perform air monitoring as required by the HASP under the supervision of the PSM. f. Document HASP violations,health-related incidents,and other increased risk situations. Notify the PSM and CONTRACTOR of such violations,incidents, or situations. 3. Authority. a. Suspend an individual from field activities for infractions of the HASP. b. Authorize personnel to enter the work site. 1.02.2 PRODUCTS 1.02.2.1 Source Quality Control for Imported Fill A. Chemical Testing and Analysis 1. All imported soil and topsoil, to be used for soil cover systems,will be SAMPLED by the ENGINEER and tested for the following: a. Volatile Organic Compounds b. Semi-Volatile Organic Compounds(SVOCs) c. PCBs/Pesticides d. Herbicides e. RCRA Metals Page 7 of 14 —' 2. All imported soil and topsoil, to be used for soil cover systems,shall exhibit chemical concentrations lower than U.S. EPA Region IX PRGs for industrial land use. 3. Imported soils will be sampled by the ENGINEER at a rate of I sample per 1,000 cubic yards for the analytes specified herein. B. When chemical tests indicate materials do not meet the specified requirements, materials must be changed and ENGINEER will retest for the specified analytes. C. Furnish materials of each specified type from sources pre-approved by the ENGINEER. 1.02.2.2 Decontamination Products A.The CONTRACTOR shall provide the appropriate brushes,tubs,detergents and pressure wash units required to complete decontamination of personnel and equipment as described in Part 1.02.3.09 of this specification. On-site workers must be provided with a station where eyes,hands and/or exposed body parts can be washed.B.Pressure wash units shall be portable high-pressure units with a self-contained water storage tank and pressurizing system.Each unit provided shall be capable of heating wash waters to 180°F and providing a nozzle pressure of 150 psi. C.The materials supplied for constructing a temporary decontamination pad, as described in Part 1.02.3.09 of this specification, shall be proposed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. D.The CONTRACTOR shall submit a comprehensive material list to the ENGINEER for approval. 1.02.3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The CONTRACTOR must develop and manage their own Health and Safety Program. This written program shall contain and/or address: 1. An organizational structure. 2. A comprehensive work plan. 3. Project-Specific HASP(May be adopted from ENGINEER) 4. Health and Safety Training Program. _. 5. The Medical Surveillance Program. 6. Standard Operating Procedures(SOPs) 7. Any necessary interface between general program and site-specific activities. B. The CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for ensuring the Health and Safety Program meets all the requirements of 29 CFR 1910.120(b). Page 8 of 14 3.02 HEALTH AND SAFETY PLAN A. General. 1. Minimum requirements for the HASP are presented in this section. If CONTRACTOR chooses to develop their own HASP,elements described in this section should be used as a basis, adding additional requirements as deemed necessary by the ENGINEER. The CONTRACTOR shall not commence work prior to ENGINEER's review of the HASP. _ 2. The HASP shall establish guidelines for the safety of personnel during the conduct of work. The CONTRACTOR shall make available a copy of the HASP to each employee. All employees shall be required to read and understand the HASP,to sign a compliance agreement,and to abide by all provisions of the HASP. Plan may be modified by the PSM,with written review and comments from the ENGINEER,in response to site conditions. 3. The HASP shall include: a. A Site Description. Physical description of site and site conditions. Site-specific data pertaining to hazards. Identifies hazards known at time. If additional hazards are discovered,they should be added to this section by change order. b. A Project Description. Project-specific description of work to be performed. c. A Hazard Assessment. Hazard assessment shall include a task-by-task risk assessment that provides strategies for protection of workers against the following hazards: 1. For activities that involve no hazardous material contact, primary hazards are physical hazards associated with construction,use of heavy equipment,fire hazards and heat stress/cold stress 2. For activities that involve only limited hazardous material contact or the potential for hazardous material contact, the following hazards shall be appropriately protected against: a. Physical hazards associated with construction,use of heavy equipment,and fire hazards. _ b. Heat stress/cold stress. c. Inhalation of contaminants. d. Skin or eye contact with contaminants. e. Ingestion of contaminants. 3. For activities that involve direct contact with hazardous materials, the following hazards shall be appropriately protected against: Page9of14 -- a. Physical hazards associated with construction,use of heavy equipment,and fire hazards. b. Heat stress/cold stress. c. Inhalation of contaminants. d. Skin or eye contact with contaminants. e. Ingestion of contaminants. d. List of Key Personnel. The HASP shall identify key personnel responsible for site safety, as outlined in Part 1.02.1.10 of this specification. The CONTRACTOR shall conspicuously post a list of the names,telephone numbers,organizations,and addresses of these individuals at the work site. e. Air Monitoring Program. 1. The HASP shall designate the personnel responsible for implementing the air monitoring program. 2. The FSO shall be responsible for enforcing established Air Action Levels. 3. The Air Monitoring Program shall be described in detail in the HASP and,at a minimum,shall include: a. Work Area Monitoring Program during construction activities. b. Personnel monitoring,as appropriate. _ 4. During construction activities, a Work Area Monitoring Program shall be implemented, including surveys of work areas and vicinity using at least the following instruments: —' a. Combustible Gas Indicator (CGI) for detecting hazardous atmospheres in confined spaces b. Photoionization Detector (PID) for measuring volatile organic concentrations in the work zone atmosphere. c. Detector tubes, as appropriate, for periodic measurements of specific compounds in the work zone atmosphere. d. RAM, Mini-RAM or equivalent device for measuring total aerosol (dust) levels in the work zone atmosphere. 5. Action Levels. a. CGI measurements are applicable to confined spaces on the site. i. The CGI shall measure concentrations of _ flammable gases in the air as a percentage of the Lower Explosive Limit(LEL). Page 10 of 14 ii. Action Level: 10 percent or greater of the LEL—all ignition sources shall be shut off and personnel shall be restricted from the affected area. b. PID measurements:The PSM shall use data from the Site Characteristics Summary to determine known and suspected air contaminants and to establish level of protection upgrade/downgrade action levels to be based on PID readings. c. RAM,Mini-RAM or equivalent measurements:Action level of 1.5 mg/m3(non-silica dust) and 0.06 mng/m3 (silica dust) for upgrading/downgrading levels of protection. f. Emergency Response Procedures. 1. Emergency Response Procedures shall be included in the HASP. 2. Response actions to control releases of contaminants shall be included in the HASP. g. Confined Space Entry Procedures Confined space entry procedures shall be developed and implemented in accordance with the 14 January 1993 Final Rule of 129 CFR 1910.146. h. Spill Containment Program Where spills may occur, a spill containment program shall be implemented to contain and isolate the entire volume of the potentially hazardous material,liquid,etc. i. Personal Protective Equipment A written personal protective equipment program(which is part of the Health and Safety Program) shall be implemented to address the protective equipment requirements for each of the site tasks and operations to be conducted. j. Site Control Measures A site control program and appropriate procedures shall be implemented to control employee exposure to hazardous substances as part of the Health and Safety Program. Page 11 of 14 -- 3.03 TRAINING REQUIREMENTS A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide training that complies with the requirements of 29 CFR 1926.21 and other applicable portions of 29 CFR 1910 and 1926 to all of its employees and its subcontractors that will be assigned to the project. Training shall cover(at a minimum): 1. Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site health and safety. 2. Health and safety hazards present on-site. 3. Personal protective equipment use,care,and limitations.4. Work practices that minimize risks from hazards. 5. Safe use of engineering controls and equipment on-site. 6. Hazard Communication(Right-To-Know program). 7. Site control measures. 8. Site SOPs. 9. Contingency plan. 10. Confined space entry procedures. — 11. Identification and avoidance of harmful plants/animals and related first aid procedures. In addition,employees who are responsible for responding to emergency situations shall be trained in how to respond to any anticipated emergency conditions. B. Emergency Response Training. 1. Site Evacuation Drill. The CONTRACTOR shall conduct one site evacuation drill during the first full week of work to test the effectiveness of evacuation protocols. '- 2. Fire Extinguisher Training. The CONTRACTOR shall train at least one member of each work crew in the use of portable fire extinguishers, in accordance with 29 CFR 1910.157(g). _ C. Visitor Training. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for training visitors to the site to make them aware of hazards associated with the site and to explain emergency procedures. 3.04 STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOPs) The CONTRACTOR shall develop and implement SOPs as part of their written Health and Safety Program. At a minimum, the following SOPs shall be written: A. Heat Stress/Cold Stress Prevention Plan. B. Respiratory Protection Plan. C. Hearing Conservation Plan D. Bloodbome Pathogens Exposure Control Plan _ E. Incident/Accident Reporting Procedures. F. Site Control Procedures. 1. Security procedures. 2. Communication procedures. 3. Site layout. 4. Work zones. _ Page 12 of 14 5. Documentation of site access. G. Emergency Preparedness. 1. Procedures to address the following emergency situations: a. Medical emergencies. b. Fires. c. Spills. d. Accidents. e. Safety equipment problems. 2. Provisions for emergency equipment,such as(at a minimum): a. First aid kits. b. Fire extinguishers. c. Splints. d. Blankets. _ e. Eyewashes and emergency showers. f. Bloodborne pathogen kits(biohazard cleanup) 3.05 INSPECTIONS It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to determine and document that CONTRACTOR'& Health and Safety Program is being followed in accordance with minimum requirements of this Specification and any additional requirements of the CONTRACTOR's HASP. This shall be accomplished through the use of inspections and audits conducted by the Field Safety Officer and staff on a daily basis and by the PSM,as required. 3.06 RECORD-KEEPING The CONTRACTOR shall maintain,as a minimum,the records specified in this section and any additional _ records required to develop,implement, and maintain the requirements of the CONTRACTOR's HASP. 3.07 REPORTING The CONTRACTOR shall notify the ENGINEER when work may affect adjacent properties. All damage,injury,or loss of any property caused by the work shall be remedied by the CONTRACTOR at no additional cost to the ENGINEER. 3.08 DUST CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION A. CONTRACTOR shall minimize visible dust levels at all times,including nonworking periods.The use of dust palliatives(e.g.calcium chloride),other than water,shall be preapproved by the ENGINEER in writing. B. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor,material,tools,and equipment to apply water or dust palliatives on roads or traveled surfaces within the construction site when directed by the OWNER and/or as necessary to control dust.CONTRACTOR must also minimize air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. C. Water shall be applied by equipment approved by the ENGINEER. At a minimum,it shall consist of a tank,a spray bar,and a gauge equipped pump.Water shall be dispersed through nozzles at a minimum pressure of 20 psi. Page 13 of 14 D. If used, dust palliatives shall be properly applied where directed by the ENGINEER and distributed at the rate specified or ordered. Method of application shall be by hand or approved spreading device.The number and frequency of application shall be determined by the ENGINEER. E. Whenever dust palliatives are applied, the CONTRACTOR shall take every precaution necessary to prevent them from entering and contaminating surface waters on and around the job site.Any damage resulting to property or surface and groundwater(including public and _ private water supplies), from the use of dust palliatives, shall be the CONTRACTOR's liability. F. A wet saw will be utilized for all concrete cutting activities. The FSO will monitor the — breathing zone of all persons involved with concrete saw cutting or crushing activities within AOC A. If particulate levels attain the breathing zone action level,the FSO will document this hazard and immediately notify the PSM and CONTRACTOR of this violation. 3.09 DECONTAMINATION REQUIREMENTS 3.09.1 SUMMARY A. This section describes the requirements for equipment and personnel decontamination and includes construction of decontamination facilities. B.The CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary personnel,equipment,and temporary facilities,as required, for proper decontamination of equipment, materials, and personnel, as specified in this section and the Site-Specific HASP. — C.Decontamination of personnel,tools,and equipment shall be required prior to leaving the work zone or in conjunction with any other activity when the potential for contamination transfer exists. On-site workers MUST be provided with a station where eyes,hands and/or exposed body parts can be washed. D. The CONTRACTOR shall construct a temporary decontamination pad prior to initiation of -- excavation activities.The CONTRACTOR shall propose the area where the temporary pad will be constructed,and this area shall be approved by the ENGINEER. E. The CONTRACTOR shall take caution when loading contaminated soil into dump trucks for transportation purposes. Containers shall not be overfilled. The CONTRACTOR shall assume complete responsibility for any contaminated soil spills on the site, including additional costs associated with excavation and disposal of materials potentially contaminated as a result of the spill. _. 3.09.2 PERSONNEL DECONTAMINATION A.The contractor shall perform personnel decontamination as specified in the CONTRACTOR's site- specific HASP. A preliminary version of the ENGINEER's HASP is available for review at the City of Waterloo's Engineering Office. The approved version of the ENGINEER's HASP will be submitted to CONTRACTOR within 10 working days from the date of the pre-Construction Meeting and prior to conducting any mobilization or related site work. Page 14 of 14 B.Personnel decontamination facilities shall be designed by the CONTRACTOR and approved by the ENGINEER. Details of the personnel decontamination facility shall be included in the CONTRACTOR's site-specific HASP. 3.09.3 TEMPORARY DECONTAMINATION PAD CONSTRUCTION A.The CONTRACTOR shall construct a temporary decontamination pad at the work site(as directed by the ENGINEER)to allow for heavy equipment decontamination prior to leaving the exclusion zone.This temporary pad shall be located near the staging and support area to allow control of site access and to ensure decontamination is completed prior to equipment leaving the site. B.The exact design of the temporary decontamination pad will be proposed by the CONTRACTOR and will be approved by the ENGINEER. The design/construction of the temporary decontamination pad must be sufficient to contain any wash waters used, and solids removed during the decontamination process.Typical temporary decontamination pads are constructed using railroad ties as contaimnent barriers, a HDPE membrane as a collection barrier, and 3-inch stone aggregate to protect the membrane. The subgrade area,beneath the HDPE membrane,shall be sloped toward an earthen sump location. All wash waters and solids,collected during the decontamination process, shall be transferred to the foregoing sump area. 3.09.4 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION-CONTRACTOR A.The CONTRACTOR shall perform the following steps during equipment decontamination: 1. Scrape,brush,or otherwise remove all visible earthen material and debris from the equipment. 2. Pressure wash all surfaces with a portable high-pressure hot water steam cleaner to remove any residual waste,dirt,or debris,if necessary.Proper care must be taken to avoid aerosolizing _ soil particles during decontamination procedures. 3. Manage rinsate and solids by staging in a designated area. B.All decontamination facilities shall be removed by the CONTRACTOR prior to site restoration activities.The area disturbed by decontamination operations shall be restored during the site restoration activities. 1.03 SUPPLEMENTAL INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS In addition to other insurance requirements,the CONTRACTOR shall name Deere and Company and Cedar Valley TechWorks as additional insureds on their liability insurance coverage for this project. 1.04 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT The work described in this Special Provision will be measured and paid as a Lump Sum payment. This payment will be full compensation for all work,training,equipment,tools and labor necessary for compliance with this Special Provision,and which is not covered by other bid items on this contract. Unforeseen work related to the RCRA site compliance,and not described in this Special Provision,will be paid as extra work. END OF SECTION GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SECTION A-Defmitions of Terms SECTION B- Scope of work SECTION C- Control of Materials and Work — SECTION D - Procedure and Progress SECTION E-Measurements and Payments SECTION F-Legal Relations and Responsibility —` SECTION A- DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the First Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. — 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. CITY ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. ENGINEER. Wayne Claassen Engineering and Surveying, Inc. 5. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefore and to such other duties as may be delegated to him in these specifications. _ 6. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanying contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 7. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract. 8. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a — part of the work provided for in these specifications. 9. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or — Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. 10. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance of the contract. 11. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications. GENERAL SPECS Page 1 of 16 12. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 13. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying _ to the contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. _ 14. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 15. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 16. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 17. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. 18. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in — accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 19. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the specified date of completion,both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of completion. 20. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 21. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 22. WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. 23. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. — GENERAL SPECS Page 2 of 16 SECTION B- SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. — 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the Engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of —, drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to the Engineer and to his representatives. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the — Contractor has,by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the — prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or — modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the — course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same. 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such — modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may — order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such — work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. GENERAL SPECS Page 3 of 16 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent(20%) from the estimated quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used,he shall make application to the Engineer, who will provide and install suitable meters and supply the Contractor's representative with suitable hydrant wrenches when the use of hydrants is necessary. The Contractor shall designate one of his employees who shall be responsible for operating the hydrants used by the Contractor. The employee so designated shall be under the direct supervision of the Engineer, and no other employee may operate any hydrant or valve without the written permission of the Engineer. The meters shall not be moved by the Contractor,but will be moved by City employees as directed by the Contractor. The water used will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of twenty(20) cents per 1,000 gallons. 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets,highways, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. — In doing the work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street,highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences,properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. GENERAL SPECS Page 4 of 16 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer,remove from the City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary — structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special — reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials and construction work shall, at all times,be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority —' require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer of the date fixed for inspection. — Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if _ required by the Engineer,be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, — the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that — the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work — performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement;but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. GENERAL SPECS Page 5 of 16 In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge,relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work. 4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time,make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved,which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall not furnish stakes or men to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks,reference points, and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction,he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused,by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer,unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The — Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions, and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being give, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. -- GENERAL SPECS Page 6 of 16 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the Engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable _ time, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may,upon ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. 9. MATERIALS,EQUIPMENT,APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the — work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. — Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the — work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the — material. These samples will be considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the _ work who shall refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the Engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not _ be re-employed unless express permission be given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. GENERAL SPECS Page 7 of 16 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer. 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of Waterloo, after three(3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have,make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor,provided,however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS _ 1. ORDER OF COMPLETION-USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The City shall have the right to take possession of an use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time,but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or used, or any part thereof. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work,the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work at such time. 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation,unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay,then the time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty(30) days before claim therefore is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under provisions in the contract documents. GENERAL SPECS Page 8 of 16 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable — prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in _ charge of any office used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office,postpaid, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth(1/4)of the contract period, one-eighth(1/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half(1/2) of the contract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (3/4) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written — notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten(10) days, to proceed as .,.. directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or -- if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to — Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City,upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer. GENERAL SPECS Page 9 of 16 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor,if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E -MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed,the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered _ by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefore the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work,plus fifteen percent(15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefore, and cost of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work. (c) Liability insurance,prorated, for the extra work. Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct,he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine,power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools,which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon,to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. GENERAL SPECS Page 10 of 16 The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent(15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten(10) days after completion of the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the _ Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Such notice to the Engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten(10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten(10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. -' The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall, within a period of five(5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also — file a written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent(10%) of the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty(30) days. If no claims are filed against the Contractor within thirty(30) days, the final ten percent(10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. GENERAL SPECS Page 11 of 16 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. SECTION F-LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. _ 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the Engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make no charge for delay due to such cause. He may,however,be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City harmless therefore. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which -- shall save the City and the Engineer harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefore, and said Contractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk --- with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten(10) days following the filing of written notice of cancellation,protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. GENERAL SPECS Page 12 of 16 (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. (c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other persons, firms, or corporations. (e) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 2,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.00 The Contractor shall have the City of Waterloo, Iowa, the Engineer, and Cedar Valley Tech Works named as an "Additional Named Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the -- above insurance. 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and — without further or other order,provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer,to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading — plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. GENERAL SPECS Page 13 of 16 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City. 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within ten(10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within a reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. GENERAL SPECS Page 14 of 16 The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise,there shall be three-- one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or,if they fail to select a third within ten(10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. If there be one arbitrator,his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time,expense, and _ trouble incident to the appeal, and,if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account of the form of proceeding or the award,unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa. -- In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. 12. PERFORMANCE BOND. The Contractor shall, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City a written bond of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. This bond shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the -" provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. 14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. GENERAL SPECS Page 15 of 16 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the Engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. _ 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefore, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. GENERAL SPECS Page 16 of 16 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. SUBCONTRACTS _ The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. 2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work,materials, equipment, payrolls,personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided,however, that all _ instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of — production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance,unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or(4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or —` in part will be made at the project site. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 1 OF 2 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease- purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing con- tained in this paragraph,however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS PAGE 2 OF 2 STATE OF I T DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCE$ CHESTER J.CULVER,GOVERNOR RICHARD A,LEOPOLD,DIRECTOR PATIYJUDGE.LT,GOVERNOR • DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM(NPDES) NOTICE OF GENERAL PERMIT COVERAGE UNDER GENERAL PERMIT I' O.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY This notice of general permit coverage for a storm water discharge associated with construction activity is issued pursuant to the authority of section 402 (b) of the Clean Water Act(U.S.C. 1342(b)),Iowa Code 455)3.174, and subrule 567-64.4(2), Iowa Administrative Code.A Notice of Intent has been filed with the Iowa Department of Natural Resources that this storm water discharge complies with the terms and conditions of NPDES General Permit No, 2. Authorization is hereby issued to discharge storm water associated with industrial activity as defined in Part VIII of the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No. 2 in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in the permit, Owner: CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS 360 WESTFIELD AVE, WATERLOO IA 50701 (319)232-1156 Permit Coverage Issued To: CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS 360 WESTFIELD AVE_ in WATERLOO,BLACK HAWK COUNTY located at Latitude Longitude _1/4 Section Section Township Range Lk es Minutes Seconds °egnx9 Minutes Seconds If SW&SE-23 NW-26 89N 13W Coverage Provided Through: 3/27/2009 NPDES Permit Discharge Authorization Number: 13207- 12998 Discharge Authorization Date: 3/27/2007 Project Description: REDEVELOPMENT OF BROWNFIELD SITE TO BECOME BIO- TECHOLOGY CAMPUS. 36 ACRES. WALLACE STATE OFFICE BUILDING I DES MOINES, IOWA 50319/515-281-5145/FAX 515-281-8895 CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO, IOWA STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 1. SITE DESCRIPTION The project is located in the SW1/4 and SE1/4 of Section 23, and in the NW1/ of Section 26, all in T89N-R13W in Black Hawk County, Iowa. The work consists of building demolition, grading, drainage,utilities,paving and building construction on approximate 42 acres of land. The project is located in the area of Kenyon-Floyd-Clyde Soil Association. The estimated average SCS run-off curve number for this project, after completion,will be 94. Refer to the site grading plan for locations of typical slopes, ditch grades, and major structural and non-structural controls. A copy of this plan will be on file at the Project Engineer's office and Contractor's field office. Run-off from this project will discharge to storm sewers and then to Black Hawk Creek and/or the Cedar River. Potential Sources of Pollution Site sources of pollution generated as a result of this project relate to silts and sediment which may be transported as a result of a storm event. 2. CONTROLS Silt fence will be placed by the grading contractor along the perimeter of the project at -- locations in which run-off can move eroded soil off site prior to beginning grading operations. Vegetation in areas not needed for construction shall be preserved. As areas reach their final grade, silt fences, silt basins, intercepting ditches, straw bale check dams and earth dikes shall be installed as required by the Project Engineer. Temporary stabilizing seeding shall be completed as soon as practicable after completion of the final grading. If construction activity is not planned to occur in an area for at least 21 days, the area shall be stabilized by temporary seeding or mulching within 14 days. As the project progresses, additional erosion control items such as subsurface drains, straw bale check dams, soil stabilization mats and other appropriate measures shall be installed by the contractor as determined by the Engineer after field investigation. The project will be completed by the establishment of permanent perennial vegetation of all disturbed areas by the site work grading contractor. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Page 1 of 2 3. OTHER CONTROLS Contractor disposal of unused construction materials and construction material wastes shall comply with applicable state and local waste disposal, sanitary sewer, or septic system regulations. In the event of a conflict with other governmental laws, rules and regulations, the more restrictive laws,rules or regulations shall apply. Approved State of Local Plans During the course of this project, it is possible that situations will arise where unknown materials will be encountered. When such situations are encountered, they will be handled according to all Federal, State and Local regulations in effect at the time. 4. MAINTENANCE The contractor is required to maintain all temporary erosion control measures in proper working order, including cleaning,repairing or replacing them throughout the contract period. Cleaning of silt control devices shall begin when the features have lost 50% of their capacity. 5. INSPECTION The project will be inspected by the owner's representatives every seven calendar days and after each rain event that is 1/2 inch or greater. The findings of this inspection shall be recorded in the project diary. This plan may be revised based on the findings of the inspection and the contractor shall implement all revisions. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan Page 2 of 2 CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO, IA CERTIFICATION STATEMENT I certify under penalty of law that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System(NPDES)permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site as part of this certification. Further,by my signature,I understand that I am becoming a co-permittee,along with the owner(s)and other contractors and subcontractors signing such certifications to the Iowa Department of Natural Resources NPDES General Permit No.2 for"Storm Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the identified site. As a co-permittee,I understand that I,and my company,are legally required under the Clean _ Water Act and the Code of Iowa,to ensure compliance with the terms and conditions of the storm water pollution prevention plan developed under this NPDES permit and the terms of this NPDES permit. I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true,accurate and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Prime Contractor Signature Date Printed Name and Title Address Telephone No. Subcontractor Signature Date Printed Name and Title Address Telephone No. Subcontractor Signature Date Printed Name and Title Address Telephone No. (Folder\PPP\cedar Valley Tech Works.cs) CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO, IA STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN SEQUENCE OF EVENTS — 1. Installation of Inlet Grate Protection. 2. Demolition of Buildings. — 3. Stockpiling of Demolition Materials. 4. Pavement, Floor Slab and Foundation Removals 5. Installation of Silt Fence "- 6. Storm Sewer Construction 7. Rough Grading 8. Pump Station and Force Main Construction 9. Subbase Construction 10. Paving 11. Sidewalks and Bikeway Construction 12. Finish Grading — 13. Seeding, Fertilizing, and Mulching (Cedar Valley Tech Works.Seq Events) CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO,IA REPORT NO.: CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO,IA STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE FORM TO BE COMPLETED EVERY 7 DAYS AND WITHIN 24 HOURS OF A RAINFALL EVENT OF 0.5 INCH OR MORE INSPECTOR: DATE: INSPECTOR'S QUALIFICATIONS: DAYS SINCE LAST RAINFALL: AMOUNT OF LAST RAINFALL: INCHES STABILIZATION MEASURES DATE SINCE STABILIZED AREA LAST DATE OF NEXT ? STABILIZED CONDITION DISTURBED DISTURBANCE (YES/NO) WITH _ STABILIZATION REQUIRED: `— ARE SILT FENCES PERFORMING AS EXPECTED? (YES/NO) GENERAL CONDITION OF SILT FENCES: -- CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO,IA Page 1 of 2 CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO, IA STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE FORM GENERAL QUALITY OF SEEDING(TEMPORARY AND/OR PERMANENT): DOES MUCH SEDIMENT GET TRACKED ONTO ROAD(YES/NO) IF SO,LIST IMPROVEMENTS THAT WILL BE MADE TO ELIMINATE THE PROBLEM: DESCRIBE THE OVERALL EFFECTIVENESS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN: CHANGES REQUIRED TO THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN: REASONS FOR CHANGES: I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under my direction or supervision in _ accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel properly gathered and evaluated the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or persons who manage the system,or those persons directly responsible for gathering the information,the information submitted is,to the best of my knowledge and belief,true,accurate,and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information,including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations. Signed: Date: (Folder\PPP\Cedar Valley Tech Works Gen Insp.frtn) CEDAR VALLEY TECH WORKS WATERLOO,IA Page 2 of 2 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM (NPDES) GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 EFFECTIVE DATES OCTOBER 1, 2007 THROUGH OCTOBER 1, 2012 FOR STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 502 EAST 9th STREET DES MOINES,IOWA 50319 515-281-7017 FAX 515-281-8895 www.iowadnr.gov/water/stormwater/index.html NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO. 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS PART I. COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT 1 A.PERMIT AREA. 1 B.ELIGIBILITY. 1 C.REQUIRING AN INDIVIDUAL PERMIT. 1 D.AUTHORIZATION. 2 PART H. NOTICE OF INTENT(NOI)REQUIREMENTS 2 A.DEADLINES FOR FILING A NOTICE OF INTENT 2 B.FAILURE TO NOTIFY 2 C.CONTENTS OF I'HL NOTICE OF INTENT. 2 D.WHERETO SUBMIT. 3 E.RENOIJ.FICATION 3 F.TRANSFER OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT. 4 G.NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION. 4 PART III. SPECIAL CONDITIONS,MANAGEMENT PRACTICES,AND OTHER NON- NUMERIC LIMITATIONS 4 A.PROHIBITION ON NON-STORM WATER DISCHARGES. 4 B.RELEASES IN EXCESS OF REPORTABLE QUANTITIES. 5 PART IV. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS 5 A.DEADLINES FOR POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN PREPARATION AND COMPLIANCE. 5 _. B.SIGNATURE AND PLAN REVIEW 5 C.KEEPING PLANS CURRENT. 5 D.CONTENTS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN 6 PART V. RETENTION OF RECORDS .9 PART VI. STANDARD PERMIT CONDITIONS 10 A.DUTY TO COMPLY 10 B.CONTINUATION OF THE EXPIRED GENERAL PERMIT. 10 C.NEED TO HALT OR REDUCE ACTIVITY NOT A DEFENSE. 10 D.DUTY TO MITIGATE. 10 E.DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMATION. 10 F.O IHER INFORMATION. 10 G.SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS 10 H.CERTIFICATION 11 '- I.OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE LIABILITY 11 J.PROPERTY RIGHTS 11 K.SEVERABILITY. 11 L.TRANSFERS. 11 M.PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE. 11 N.INSPECTION AND ENTRY. 11 O.PERMIT ACTIONS. 12 P.ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS. 12 PART VII. REOPENER CLAUSE 12 PART VIII. DEFINITIONS 12 .� ii IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFIECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 PART 1. COVERAGE UNDER THIS PERMIT B. storm water discharges associated with industrial activity for construction activities .. A. PERMIT AREA This permit covers all areas of which are covered by an existing individual the State of Iowa. NPDES permit or which are issued a permit in accordance with Part I.C.of this permit. B. ELIGIBILITY Storm water discharges authorized by an 1. A. Except for discharges identified under existing individual NPDES permit will be Parts I.B.2. and I.B.3., this permit may eligible to apply for coverage under this authorize the discharge of storm water general permit as the existing individual associated with industrial activity from permit expires;and construction sites, (those sites or common plans of development or sale that will result in C. storm water discharges associated with the disturbance of one or more acres total land industrial activity for construction activities area), (hereafter referred to as storm water that the Iowa Department of Natural discharge associated with industrial activity Resources has determined to be or may for construction activities) occurring after the reasonably be expected to be contributing to a effective date of this permit (including violation of a water quality standard. discharges occurring after the effective date of this permit where the construction activity 3. EXCLUSIONS The following "storm water was initiated before the effective date of this discharges associated with industrial activity" permit), including storm water discharge from construction activities do not require a associated with industrial activity from areas NPDES permit: that are dedicated to producing earthen materials, such as soils, sand and gravel, for discharges from agricultural and silvicultural use at a single construction site. activities including storm water runoff from orchards, cultivated crops, pastures, range B. This permit may authorize storm water lands, and forest lands, but not discharges discharge from a construction site that is from concentrated animal feeding operations mixed with storm water discharge associated as defined in 40 C1 K 122.23, concentrated with industrial activity from sources other aquatic production facilities as defined in 40 than construction activities provided that the CFR 122.24, discharges to aquaculture storm water discharge from the industrial projects as defined in 40 CFR 122.25, and(non-construction) source is in compliance discharges from silvicultural point sources as with the terms of a NPDES general permit, defined in 40 CFR 122.27. other than this general permit, or individual permit authorizing such discharge. In C. REQUIRING AN INDIVIDUAL PERMIT addition, the storm water other than from construction, shall be in compliance with Part 1. The Department may require any person IV.D.6.of this permit. authorized by this permit to apply for and obtain an individual NPDES permit. The 2. LIMITATIONS ON COVERAGE The following Department may require any owner or storm water discharges associated with operator authorized to discharge under this industrial activity for construction activities permit to apply for an individual NPDES are not authorized by this permit: permit only if the owner or operator has been notified in writing that a permit application is A. storm water discharges that are mixed required. This notice shall include a brief with sources of non-storm water other than statement of the reasons for this decision, an discharges identified in Part III.A.2. of this application form, a statement setting a permit; deadline for the owner or operator to file the application, and a statement that on the effective date of the individual NPDES 1 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 permit, coverage under this general permit associated with industrial activity for shall automatically terminate. If an owner or construction activities under the terms and operator fails to submit an individual NPDES conditions of this permit on the date the permit application required by the Department completed Notice of Intent was received by under this paragraph, coverage of this general the Department or the date construction is permit automatically is terminated at the end scheduled to begin as provided on Form 542- - of the day specified for submittal of the 1415 (Notice of Intent) whichever is later. individual NPDES application. Upon review of the Notice of Intent, the Department may deny coverage under this _ 2. Any person authorized to discharge under this permit and require submittal of an application permit may apply for an individual NPDES for an individual NPDES permit. permit. In such cases, the discharger shall submit the following in accordance with the requirements of subrule (567)--64.3(4) in the PART II. NOTICE OF LNTENT (NOI) Iowa Administrative Code: REQUIREMENTS A. an individual application, using DNR A. DEADLINES FOR FILING A NOTICE OF Form 1 and EPA Form 2F,and, INTENT B. all applicable fees identified in rule 1. Except as provided in Parts II.A.2. and II.A.3. (567)--64.16 in the Iowa Administrative of this permit, Individuals who intend to Code. obtain coverage for an existing storm water discharge associated with industrial activity 3. When an individual NPDES permit is issued for construction activities which expired on or to a discharger covered under this general after October 1,2007, shall submit a complete permit,the applicability of this general permit Notice of Intent(NOI) in accordance with the to the individual NPDES permittee is requirements of Part II.C. on or before April automatically terminated on the effective date 1,2008. of the individual NPDES permit. 2. For storm water discharge associated with When an individual NPDES permit is denied industrial activity for construction activities to a discharger otherwise subject to this where construction begins after October 1, permit, the applicability of this permit to the 1992, construction activities shall not individual NPDES permittee is automatically commence until an authorization has been terminated on the date of such denial, unless issued for the project by the Department. otherwise specified by the Depal lucent. B. FAILURE TO NOTIFY Dischargers who fail to D. AUTHORIZATION notify the Department of their intent to be covered, and discharge pollutants to water of 1. A discharger must submit a Notice of Intent the United States within Iowa, without an (NOI) in accordance with the requirements of NPDES permit, are in violation of the Clean Part II of this permit in order for storm water Water Act and the Code of Iowa. discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities pursuant to Part I.B. C. CONTENTS OF THE NOTICE OF INTENT A of this permit to be authorized to discharge complete Notice of Intent shall include the under this general permit. items described in Parts II.C.1., II.C2., and II.C3.of this permit. 2. Unless notified by the Department to the contrary, dischargers who submit a Notice of 1. A completed Notice of Intent (NOI) form, Intent (NOI) in accordance with the DNR Form 542-1415, signed in accordance requirements of Part II of this permit are with Part VI.G. of this permit. The authorized to discharge storm water 2 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTWITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 information on the form shall include the G.(2). the pollution prevention plan will following: be implemented on October 1, 1992 for any existing storm water discharge associated with A. Name, address, and location of the industrial activity for construction activities. construction site for which this notification is For a storm water discharge associated with submitted. The location should be provided industrial activity for construction activities as the 1/4 section, township, range, and the that commence after October 1, 1992, the county in which the storm water discharge is pollution prevention plan shall be located. implemented with the start of construction activities; B. The owner's name, address, telephone number, and status (federal, state, private, G.(3). this Notice of Intent will be _ public or other entity). included and incorporated into the pollution prevention plan and will be updated as C. The name, address and telephone required;and, number of any operator (contractor) that has been identified as having a role in the storm G.(4). the storm water pollution water pollution prevention plan for the site prevention plan provides compliance with required under Part IV.D.7. of this permit. section 467A.64 of the Code of Iowa and Contractors (operators) identified after the local sediment and erosion plans and are submittal of the completed Notice of Intent consistent with the requirements of Part IV of shall be identified in the pollution prevention this general permit. plan. -- 2. APPLICABLE FEES The applicable fees D. The type of discharge (new or existing specified in Iowa Administrative Code 567 -- as related to October 1, 1992);whether or not 64.16(455B). the discharge is to a municipal separate storm sewer system; the date the discharge is to 3. PUBLIC NOTIFICATION A demonstration that • commence;the permit status of the discharge; the public notice specified in Iowa and,the name of the receiving waters. Administrative Code 567-64.6(1)"c"(2) was published at least one day, in at least two E. An indication if any existing quantitative newspapers with the largest circulation in the data is available describing the concentration area in which the facility is located or the of pollutants in storm water discharges and a activity will occur. summary of available existing data. (Existing data should not be included as part of the D. WHERE TO SUBMIT Facilities which NOI,it should retained as part of the Pollution discharge storm water associated with -- Prevention Plan). industrial activity for construction activities must submit items described in Parts ll.C.l., F. A brief description of the project; an 2., and 3. of this permit to the Department at estimated timetable for major activities; and, the following address: an estimate of the number of acres of the site on which soil will be disturbed. Storm Water Coordinator Iowa Depai talent of Natural Resources G. A certification that compliance with 502 E.9th St. G.(1).through G.(4).are met: Des Moines,IA 50319-0034 G.(1). the pollution prevention plan has E. RENOTIFICATION Prior to the expiration of been developed before this Notice of Intent is an authorization issued under this general submitted to the Department; permit, the pennittee is required to resubmit a Notice of Intent (no additional public notices are required) with the Department for 3 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EI rECTWE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 coverage under the new general permit. If a new general permit has not been reissued prior A. the name of the owner/operator to which to the expiration-of the current permit, the the permit was issued; — provisions and coverage of the current permit are extended until replaced by the adoption of B. the general permit number and permit a new general permit. authorization number; F. TRANSFER OF COVERAGE UNDER THIS C. the date the construction site reached PERMIT For storm water discharge associated final stabilization;and, with industrial activity for construction D. the following certification signed in activities where the ownership changes, the accordance with Part VI.G.of this permit: Department must be notified of the title transfer within 30 days. If a storm water "I certify under penalty of law that disturbed discharge associated with industrial activity soils at the identified facility have been finally for construction activities is covered by this stabilized and temporary erosion and sediment general permit, the new owner(s) shall be control measures have been removed or will subject to all terms and conditions of this be removed at an appropriate time. I general permit. A copy of the notice of understand that by submitting this Notice of transfer that was sent to the Department shall Discontinuation, that I am no longer be included in the pollution prevention plan. authorized to discharge storm water For construction activity which is part of a associated with industrial activity for larger common plan of development such as a construction activities by Iowa Department of housing or commercial development project, Natural Resources General NPDES Permit if a permittee transfers ownership of all or any No. 2. and that discharging pollutants from part of property subject to this permit, both storm water associated with industrial activity the permittee and transferee shall be to waters of the United States is unlawful responsible for compliance with the under the Clean Water Act where the provisions of this permit for that portion of discharge is not authorized by a NPDES the project which has been transferred permit." including when the transferred property is less than one acre in area. If the new owner(s) agree in writing to be solely responsible for PART LEL SPECIAL CONDITIONS, compliance with the provisions of this permit MANAGEMENT PRACTICES, AND OTH P.R for the property which has been transferred, NON-NUMERIC LIMITATIONS then the existing permittee(s)shall be relieved of responsibility for compliance with this A. PROHIBITION ON NON-STORM WATER permit for the transferred property, from and DISCHARGES after the date the Department receives written notice of transfer of responsibility. A copy of 1. All discharges authorized by this permit shall the notice of transfer of responsibility shall be be composed entirely of storm water except included in the pollution prevention plan. for non-storm discharges listed in Part III.A.2. G. NOTICE OF DISCONTINUATION 2. Discharges from fire fighting activities; fire hydrant flushings; waters used to wash 1. Within 30 days after final stabilization at a vehicles in accordance with Part construction site (as defined in Part VIII of IV.D.2.c.(2).;potable water sources including this permit), the operator or owner of the waterline flushings; irrigation drainage; facility shall submit a Notice of routine external building washdown which Discontinuation to the Department. does not use detergents;pavement washwaters where spills or leaks of toxic or hazardous 2. The Notice of Discontinuation shall include materials have not occurred(unless all spilled the following information: material has been removed) and where 4 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 detergents are not used; air conditioning A. DEADLINES FOR POLLUTION PREVENTION condensate;springs; and foundation or footing PLAN PREPARATION AND COMPLIANCE drains where flows are not contaminated with process materials such as solvents; may be 1. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN authorized by this permit provided the non- PREPARATION DEADLINE The pollution storm water component of the discharge is in prevention plan shall be completed prior to compliance with Part IV.D.5.of this permit. the submittal of an NOI to the Department to be covered under this permit and shall be updated as appropriate. B. RELEASES IN EXCESS OF REPORTABLE QUANTITIES Any owner or operator 2. POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN identified in the pollution prevention plan is COMPLIANCE DEADLINE The pollution subject to the spill notification requirements prevention plan shall provide for compliance as specified in 455B.386 of the Iowa Code. with the terms and schedule of the plan prior Iowa law requires that as soon as possible but to the initiation of construction activities. not more than six hours after the onset of a "hazardous condition" the Department and B. SIGNATURE AND PLAN REVIEW local sheriffs office or the office of the sheriff of the affected county be notified. 1. The plan shall be signed in accordance with Part VI.G., and be retained at the construction The storm water pollution prevention plan site from the date construction activities begin described in Part IV of this permit must be to the date of final stabilization. modified within 5 calendar days of knowledge of the release to provide a description of the 2. The permittee shall make plans available to release and the circumstances leading to the the Department upon request,or in the case of release and to identify and provide for the a storm water discharge associated with implementation of steps to prevent the industrial activity for construction activities reoccurrence of such releases and to respond which discharge through a large or medium to such releases. municipal separate storm sewer system with an NPDES permit, to the municipal operator of the system. PART IV. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLANS 3. The Department may notify the permittee at any time that the plan does not meet one or A storm water pollution prevention plan shall be more of the minimum requirements of this developed for each construction site covered by this Part. After such notification from the permit. Storm water pollution prevention plans shall Department,the permittee shall make changes be prepared in accordance with good engineering to the plan and shall submit to the Department practices. The plan shall identify potential sources of a written certification that the requested pollution which may reasonably be expected to affect changes have been made. Unless otherwise the quality of the storm water discharge from the provided by the Department, the permittee construction activities. In addition, the plan shall shall have 7 days after such notification to describe and ensure the implementation of practices make the necessary changes. which will be used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for 4. All storm water pollution prevention plans construction activities at the construction site and to received by the Department from the assure compliance with the terms and conditions of permittee are considered reports that shall be this pen-nit. Facilities must implement the provisions available to the public under Section 308(b)of of the storm water pollution prevention plan required the CWA and Chapter 22 of the Code of under this part as a condition of this permit. Iowa. However,the permittee may claim any portion of a storm water pollution plan as confidential in accordance with Chapter 22 of 5 • IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 the Code of Iowa and Iowa Administrative D. a site map indicating drainage patterns Code(561)--2.5. and approximate slopes anticipated after major grading activities, areas of soil C. KEEPING PLANS CURRENT The permittee disturbance, the location of structural and shall amend the plan whenever there is a nonstructural controls identified in the plan, change in design, construction, operation, or the location of areas where stabilization maintenance,which has a significant effect on practices are expected to occur,surface waters the potential for the discharge of pollutants to (including wetlands), and locations where the waters of the United States and which has storm water is discharged to a surface water; not been addressed in the plan or if the storm and water pollution prevention plan proves to be E. the name of the receiving water(s) and ineffective in eliminating or significantly the ultimate receiving water(s). minimizing pollutants from sources identified in Part IV.D.2. of this permit, or in otherwise 2. CONTROLS Each plan shall include a achieving the general objectives of controlling description of controls that will be pollutants in storm water discharge associated 'implemented at the construction site. The _ with industrial activity for construction plan will clearly describe the intended activities. In addition, the pollution sequence of major activities and for each prevention plan shall be updated to: include activity,the appropriate control measures and contractors identified after the submittal of the the timing during the construction process that Notice of Intent as Co-permittees, described the measures will be implemented. (For in Part IV.D.7. of this permit; identify any example,perimeter controls for one portion of change in ownership or transference of the the site will be installed after the clearing and permit and permit responsibilities; or, if grubbing necessary for installation of the required, by the occurrence of a hazardous measure,but before the clearing and grubbing condition (as defined in Part VIII of this for the remaining portions of the site. permit). Amendments to the plan may be Perimeter controls will be actively maintained reviewed by the Department of Natural until final stabilization of those portions of the Resources in the same manner as Part IV.B.2. site upward of the perimeter control. Temporary perimeter controls will be D. CONTENTS OF THE POLLUTION PREVENTION removed after final stabilization). The PLAN. The storm water pollution prevention description of controls shall address the plan shall include the following items: following minimum components: 1. SITE DESCRIPTION Each plan shall provide a A. EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROLS description of the following: A.(1). STABILIZATION PRACTICES A _ A. a description of the nature of the description of temporary and permanent construction activity; stabilization practices, including site-specific scheduling of the implementation of the B. estimates of the total area of the site and practices. Site plans should ensure that the area of the site that is expected to be existing vegetation is preserved where disturbed by excavation, grading, or other attainable and that disturbed areas are activities; stabilized. Stabilization practices may include: temporary seeding, permanent C. an estimate of the runoff coefficient of seeding, mulching, geotextiles, sod the site after construction activities are stabilization, vegetative buffer strips, completed and existing data describing the protection of trees, preservation of mature soil or the quality of any discharge from the vegetation, and other appropriate measures. site; Except as precluded by snow cover, stabilization measures shall be initiated on all disturbed areas as soon as practical but in no 6 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATE))WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 case where construction activity will not occur construction area or a sediment basin for a period of 21 or more calendar days later providing storage for 3,600 cubic feet of than the 14th day after no construction storage per acre drained. activity has occurred on such area. Where the initiation of stabilization measures by the 14th B. STORM WATER MANAGEMENT A day after no construction activity occurs is description of measures that will be installed precluded by snow cover, then stabilization during construction to control pollutants in measures shall be initiated as soon as storm water discharges that will occur after practicable thereafter. construction operations have been completed.The installation of these devices may be A.(2). STRUCTURAL PRACTICES A subject to Section 404 of the CWA. This description of structural practices to the permit only addresses the installation of storm degree attainable, to divert flows from water management measures, and not the exposed soils, store flows or otherwise limit ultimate operation and maintenance of such runoff from exposed areas of the site. Such structures after the construction activities have practices may include silt fences, earth dikes, been completed and the site has undergone brush barriers, drainage swales, sediment final stabilization. Permittees are only traps, check dams, subsurface drains, pipe responsible for the installation and slope drains,level spreaders, storm drain inlet maintenance of storm water management protection, rock outlet protection, reinforced measures prior to final stabilization of the site, soil retaining systems, gabions,and temporary and are not responsible for maintenance after or permanent sediment basins. Structural storm water discharges associated with practices should be placed on upland soils to industrial activity have been eliminated from the degree attainable. The installation of these the site. devices may be subject to Section 404 of the CWA. B.(1). Such practices may include: storm water detention structures (including wet A.(2).(a). For common drainage locations ponds); storm water retention structures; flow that serve an area with more than 10 disturbed attenuation by use of open vegetated swales acres at one time, a temporary(or permanent) and natural depressions; and infiltration of — sediment basin providing 3,600 cubic feet of runoff onsite; and sequential systems (which storage per acre drained shall be provided combine several practices). A goal of 80 where attainable until final stabilization of the percent removal of total suspended solids site has been achieved. The 3,600 cubic feet from those flows which exceed of storage area per acre drained does not predevelopment levels should be used in apply to flows from offsite areas and flows designing and installing storm water from onsite areas that are either undisturbed management controls (where practicable). or have undergone final stabilization where Where this goal is not met,the permittee shall such flows are diverted around the sediment provide justification for rejecting each basin. For drainage locations which serve practice based on site conditions. more than 10 disturbed acres at one time and where a temporary sediment basin providing B.(2). Velocity dissipation devices shall be 3,600 cubic feet of storage per acre drained is placed at discharge locations and along the not attainable, sediment traps, silt fences, or length of any outfall channel as necessary to equivalent sediment controls are required for provide a non-erosive velocity flow from the all sideslope and downslope boundaries of the structure to a water course so that the natural construction area. physical and biological characteristics and functions are maintained and protected (e.g. A.(2).(b). For drainage locations serving maintenance of hydrologic conditions,present 10 acres or less, sediment traps, silt fences or prior to the initiation of construction equivalent sediment controls are required for activities). all sideslope and downslope boundaries of the 7 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EF'NJ CTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 C. OTHER CONTROLS 4. INSPECTIONS Qualified personnel (provided by the discharger) shall inspect disturbed C.(1). WASTE DISPOSAL All wastes areas of the construction site that have not composed of building materials must be been finally stabilized at least once every removed from the site for disposal in seven calendar days and within 24 hours of permitted disposal facilities. No building the end of a storm that is 0.5 inches or greater. material wastes or unused building materials shall be buried, dumped, or discharged at the A. Disturbed areas and areas used for site. storage of materials that are exposed to _ precipitation shall be inspected for evidence c.(2). Off-site vehicle tracking of of, or the potential for,pollutants entering the sediments shall be minimized. drainage system. Erosion and sediment control measures identified in the plan shall c.(3). The plan shall ensure and be observed to ensure that they are operating demonstrate compliance with applicable State correctly. Where discharge locations or or local waste disposal, sanitary sewer or points are accessible, they shall be inspected _ septic system regulations. to ascertain whether erosion control measures are effective in preventing significant impacts D. APPROVED STATE OR LOCAL PLANS to receiving waters. Locations where vehicles Facilities which discharge storm water enter or exit the site shall be inspected for associated with industrial activity for evidence of offsite sediment tracking. construction activities must include in their storm water pollution prevention plan B. Based on the results of the inspection, procedures and requirements specified in the description of potential pollutant sources applicable sediment and erosion site plans or identified in the plan in accordance with storm water management plans approved by paragraph IV.D.1. of this permit and pollution State or local officials. Applicable prevention measures identified in the plan in requirements specified in sediment and accordance with paragraph IV.D.2. of this erosion plans, site permits or storm water permit shall be revised as appropriate as soon management plans approved by State or local as practicable after such inspection. Such officials that are applicable to protecting modifications shall provide for surface water resources are,upon submittal of implementation of any changes to the plan an NOI to be authorized to discharge under within 7 calendar days following the this permit, incorporated by reference and are inspection- - enforceable under this permit even if they are not specifically included in a storm water C. A report summarizing the scope of the pollution prevention plan required under this inspection, name(s) and qualifications of permit. personnel making the inspection, the date(s) of the inspection, major observations relating Operators of facilities seeking alternative to the implementation of the storm water permit requirements shall submit an individual pollution prevention plan,and actions taken in permit application in accordance with Part accordance with paragraph IV.D.4.B. of the I.C.2. of this permit along with a description permit shall be made and retained as part of of why requirements in approved State or the storm water pollution prevention plan for local plans should not be applicable as a at least three years after final stabilization has condition of an NPDES permit. been achieved and a Notice of 3. MAINTENANCE A description of procedures Discontinuation has been submitted to the to maintain in good and effective operating Department. The report shall be signed in conditions vegetation, erosion and sediment accordance with Part VI.G.of this permit. control measures and other protective measures identified in the site plan. 5. NON-STORM WATER DISCHARGES Except for flows from fire fighting activities, sources 8 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 of non-storm water listed in Part lII.A.2. of Upon signing the certification, the contractor this permit that are combined with storm or sub-contractor is a co-permittee with the water discharges associated with industrial owner and other co-permittee contractors. All activity from construction activities must be certifications must be included in the storm identified in the plan. The plan shall identify water pollution prevention plan. and ensure the implementation of appropriate pollution prevention measures for the non- B. CERTIFICATION STATEMENT All storm water component(s)of the discharge. contractors and subcontractors identified in a storm water pollution prevention plan in 6. ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR STORM accordance with Part IV.D.7.A. of this permit WATER DISCHARGE FROM INDUSTRIAL shall sign a copy of the following certification ACTIVITIES OTHER THAN CONSTRUCTION, statement before conducting any professional INCLUDING DEDICATED ASPHALT PLANTS, service at the site identified in the storm water AND DEDICATED CEMENT PLANTS This pollution prevention plan: permit may only authorize a storm water discharge associated with industrial activity "I certify under penalty of law that I from a construction site that is mixed with a understand the terms and conditions of the storm water discharge from an industrial general National Pollutant Discharge source other than construction,where: Elimination System (NPDES) permit that .. authorizes the storm water discharges A. the industrial source other than associated with industrial activity from the construction is located on the same site as the construction site as part of this certification. construction activity; Further, by my signature, I understand that I — am becoming a co-permittee, along with the B. storm water discharges associated with owner(s) and other contractors and industrial activity from the areas of the site subcontractors signing such certifications, to where construction activities are occurring are the Iowa Department of Natural Resources in compliance with the terms of this permit; NPDES General Permit No. 2 for "Storm and, Water Discharge Associated with Industrial Activity for Construction Activities" at the C. storm water discharges associated with identified site. As a co-permittee, I industrial activity from the areas of the site understand that I, and my company, are where industrial activity other than legally required under the Clean Water Act construction are occurring (including storm and the Code of Iowa, to ensure compliance water discharges from dedicated asphalt with the terms and conditions of the storm plants and dedicated cement plants) are in water pollution prevention plan developed compliance with the terms and conditions, under this NPDES permit and the terms of this including applicable NOI or application NPDES permit." requirements, of a different NPDES general permit or individual permit authorizing such The certification must include the name and discharges. title of the person providing the signature; the name, address and telephone number of the 7. CONTRACTORS contracting firm; the address (or other identifying description) of the site; and the A. The storm water pollution prevention plan date the certification is made. must clearly identify for each measure in the plan, the contractor(s) and/or subcontractor(s) that will implement the measure. All PART V. RETENTION OF RECORDS �. contractors and subcontractors identified in the plan must sign a copy of the certification A. The permittee shall retain copies of storm statement in Part IV.D.7.B. of this permit in water pollution prevention plans and all accordance with Part VI.G. of this permit. reports required by this permit,and records of 9 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 all data used to complete the Notice of Intent establish these standards or prohibitions, even to be covered by this permit,for a period of at if this permit has not yet been modified to least three years from the date that the site is incorporate the requirement. finally stabilized and a Notice of Discontinuation has been submitted to the B. CONTINUATION OF THE EXPIRED GENERAL Department. PERMIT This permit expires on October 1, 2012. An expired general permit continues in B. If there is a construction trailer, shed or other force until replaced by adoption of a new covered structure located on the property the general permit. permittee shall retain a copy of the storm water pollution prevention plan required by C. NEED TO HALT OR REDUCE ACTIVITY NOT A this permit at the construction site from the DEFENSE It shall not be a defense for a date of project initiation to the date of final permittee in an enforcement action that it -- stabilization. If there is no construction would have been necessary to halt or reduce trailer, shed or other covered structure located the permitted activity in order to maintain on the property, the permittee shall retain a compliance with the conditions of this permit. copy of the plan at a readily available alternative site approved by the Department D. DUTY TO MITIGATE The permittee shall take and provide it for inspection upon request. If all reasonable steps to minimize or prevent the plan is maintained at an off-site location any discharge in violation of this permit -- such as a corporate office,it shall be provided which has a reasonable likelihood of for inspection no later than three hours after adversely affecting human health or the being requested. environment. C. ADDRESSES All written correspondence to E. DUTY TO PROVIDE INFORMATION The the Department should be sent to the permittee shall furnish to the Department, following address: within a reasonable time, any information which the Depai lucent may request to Storm Water Coordinator determine compliance with this permit. The Iowa Department of Natural Resources permittee shall also furnish to the Department 502 E. 9th St. upon request copies of records required to be Des Moines,IA 50319-0034 kept by this permit. F. OTHER INFORMATION When the permittee -- PART VI. STANDARD PERMIT CONDITIONS becomes aware that he or she failed to submit any relevant facts or submitted incorrect A DUTY TO COMPLY information in the Notice of Intent or in any other report to the Department,he or she shall 1. The permittee must comply with all conditions promptly submit such facts or information. of this permit. Any permit noncompliance constitutes a violation of the Code of Iowa G. SIGNATORY REQUIREMENTS All Notices of and the Clean Water Act and is grounds for Intent, storm water pollution prevention plans, enforcement action; for termination of reports, certifications or information either coverage under this general permit; or, for submitted to the Department or the operator of _ denial of a request for coverage under a a large or medium municipal separate storm reissued general permit. sewer system, or that this permit requires be maintained by the permittee,shall be signed in 2. TOXIC POLLUTANTS The permittee shall accordance with rule 567--64.3(8)of the Iowa — comply with effluent standards or prohibitions Administrative Code as follows: established under section 307(a) of the Clean Water Act (CWA) for toxic pollutants within the time provided in the regulations that 10 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES Errr,CTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007T0 OCTOBER 1,2012 64.3(8) Identity of signatories of operation knowledge and belief, true, accurate, and permit applications. The person who signs complete. I am aware that there are ._ the application for an operation permit shall significant penalties for submitting false be: information, including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations." a. Corporations. In the case of corporations, a principal executive officer of at least the I. OIL AND HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCE LIABILITY level of vice-president. Nothing in this permit shall be construed to preclude the institution of any legal action or b. Partnerships. In the case off a partnership, relieve the permittee from any responsibilities, a general partner. liabilities, or penalties to which the permittee is or may be subject under section 311 of the c. Sole proprietorships. In the case of a sole Clean Water Act. proprietorship,the proprietor. J. PROPERTY RIGHTS The issuance of this d. Public facilities. In the case of a permit does not convey any property rights of municipal, state, or other public facility, by any sort, nor any exclusive privileges, nor either the principal executive officer, or the does it authorize any injury to private property ranking elected official. nor any invasion of personal rights, nor any infringement of Federal,State or local laws or e. Storm water discharge associated with regulations. industrial activity from construction activity. In the case of a storm water discharge K. SEVERABILITY The provisions of this permit associated with industrial activity from are severable, and if any provision of this construction as identified in 40 CFR permit, or the application of any provision of 122.26(b)(14)(x), either the owner of the site this permit to any circumstance, is held or the general contractor. invalid, the application of such provision to other circumstances, and the remainder of this The person who signs NPDES reports shall be permit shall not be affected thereby. the same, except that in the case of a corporation or a public body, monitoring L. TRANSFERS This permit is not transferable to reports required under the terms of the permit any person except after notice to the may be submitted by the person who is Department. The Department may require the responsible for the overall operation of the discharger to apply for and obtain an facility from which the discharge originated. individual NPDES permit as stated in Part I.C. M. PROPER OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE H. CERTIFICATION Any person signing The permittee shall at all times properly documents under paragraph VI.G. shall make operate and maintain all facilities and systems the following certification: of treatment and control (and related appurtenances) which are installed or used by "I certify under penalty of law that this the permittee to achieve compliance with the document and all attachments were prepared conditions of this permit and with the under my direction or supervision in requirements of storm water pollution accordance with a system designed to assure prevention plans. Proper operation and that qualified personnel properly gathered and maintenance also includes adequate laboratory evaluated the information submitted. Based controls and appropriate quality assurance on my inquiry of the person or persons who procedures. Proper operation and manage the system, or those persons directly maintenance requires the operation of backup responsible for gathering the information, the or auxiliary facilities or similar systems, information submitted is, to the best of my installed by a permittee only when necessary _ 11 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 to achieve compliance with the conditions or this permit. "Best Management Practices" ("BMPs") means schedules of activities, prohibitions of N. INSPECTION AND ENTRY The permittee shall practices, maintenance procedures, and other allow the Department or an authorized management practices to prevent or reduce the representative of EPA, the State, or, in the pollution of waters of the United States. BMPs also case of a facility which discharges through a include treatment requirements, operating municipal separate storm sewer,an authorized procedures, and practices to control plant site runoff, representative of the municipal operator or the spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal, or separate storm sewer receiving the discharge, drainage from raw material storage. upon the presentation of credentials and other documents as may be required by law,to: "CWA" or "Clean Water Act" means the Federal Water Pollution Control Act. 1.Enter upon the permittee's premises where a regulated facility or activity is located or "Dedicated portable asphalt plant" means a conducted or where records must be kept portable asphalt plant that is located on or contiguous under the conditions of this permit; to a construction site and that provides asphalt only to the construction site that the plant is located on or 2. Have access to and copy at reasonable adjacent to. times, any records that must be kept under the conditions of this permit;and, "Dedicated portable concrete plant" means a portable concrete plant that is located on or 3.Inspect at reasonable times any facilities or contiguous to a construction site and that provides equipment (including monitoring and control concrete only to the construction site that the plant is equipment). located on or adjacent to. O. PERMIT ACTIONS Coverage under this "Dedicated sand or gravel operation" means permit may be terminated for cause. The an operation that produces sand and/or gravel for a filing of a request by the permittee for a single construction project. permit discontinuance, or a notification of planned changes or anticipated "Department" means the Iowa Department of noncompliance does not stay any permit Natural Resources. condition. "Final Stabilization" means that all soil P. ENVIRONMENTAL LAWS No condition of this disturbing activities at the site have been completed, permit shall release the permittee from any and that a uniform perennial vegetative cover with a responsibility or requirements under other density of 70% for the area has been established or environmental statutes or regulations. equivalent stabilization measures have been employed. PART VII. REOPENER CLAUSE "Hazardous condition" means any situation involving the actual, imminent, or probable spillage, If there is evidence indicating potential or realized leakage,or release of a hazardous substance on to the impacts or water quality due to any storm water land,into a water of the state, or into the atmosphere, _ discharge associated with industrial activity for which creates an immediate or potential danger to the construction activities covered by this permit, the public health or safety or to the environment. owner or operator of such discharge may be required 455B.381(2) 1991,Code of Iowa to obtain individual permit in accordance with Part I.0 of this permit. "Hazardous substance" means any substance or mixture of substances that presents a danger to the public health or safety and includes,but PART VIII. DEFINITIONS is not limited to, a substance that is toxic, corrosive, 12 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 or flammable, or that is an irritant or that, in "Runoff coefficient" means the fraction of confinement, generates pressure through total rainfall that will appear at the conveyance as — decomposition, heat, or other means. The following runoff. are examples of substances which, in sufficient quantity may be hazardous: acids; alkalis; "Storm Water" means storm water runoff, — explosives; fertilizers; heavy metals such as snow melt runoff,and surface runoff and drainage. chromium, arsenic, mercury, lead and cadmium; industrial chemicals; paint thinners; paints; "Storm water discharge associated with pesticides; petroleum products; poisons, radioactive industrial activity" means the discharge from any materials; sludges; and organic solvents. conveyance which is used for collecting and "Hazardous substances" may include any hazardous conveying storm water and which is directly related waste identified or listed by the administrator of the to manufacturing,processing or raw materials storage United State Environmental Protection Agency under areas at an industrial plant. The term does not the Solid Waste Disposal Act as amended by the include discharges from facilities or activities Resource Conservation and Recovery Act of 1976, or excluded from the NPDES program under 40 CFR any toxic pollutant listed under section 307 of the part 122. For the categories of industries identified federal Water Pollution Control Act as amended to in paragraphs (i) through (x) of this definition, the January 1, 1977, or any hazardous substance term includes, but is not limited to, storm water designated under section 311 of the federal Water discharges from industrial plant yards; immediate _ Pollution Control Act as amended to January 1, 1977, access roads and rail lines used or traveled by carriers or any hazardous material designated by the secretary of raw materials, manufactured products, waste of transportation under the Hazardous Materials material, or by-products used or created by the Transportation Act(49 CFR 172.101). 455B.381(1), facility; material handling sites; refuse sites; sites 1991 Code of Iowa used for the application or disposal of process waste waters(as defined at 40 CFR part 401);sites used for "Large and Medium Municipal Separate the storage and maintenance of material handling _ Storm Sewer System" means all municipal separate equipment; sites used for residual treatment, storage, storm sewers that are either: or disposal; shipping and receiving areas; manufacturing buildings; storage areas (including (i.) located in an incorporated place with a tank farms) for raw materials, and intermediate and population of 100,000 or more as determined by the finished products; and areas where industrial activity latest Decennial Census by the Bureau of Census;or has taken place in the past and significant materials remain and are exposed to storm water_ (ii.) located in the counties with unincorporated urbanized populations of 100,000 or For the categories of industries identified in more, except municipal separate storm sewers that paragraph (xi) of this definition, the term includes are located in the incorporated places, townships or only storm water discharges from all the areas towns within such counties; or (except access roads and rail lines) that are listed in the previous sentence where material handling (iii.) owned or operated by a municipality equipment or activities, raw materials, intermediate other than those described in paragraph(i)or(ii)and products, final products, waste materials, by- that are designated by the Director as part of the large products, or industrial machinery are exposed to or medium municipal separate storm sewer system. storm water. For the purposes of this paragraph, material handling activities include the storage, — "Municipality" means a city, town, borough, loading and unloading,transportation, or conveyance county, parish, district, association, or other public of any raw material, intermediate product, finished body created by or under State law. product, by-product, or waste product. The term excludes areas located on plant lands separate from "NOT' means Notice of Intent to be covered the plant's industrial activities, such as office by this permit(see Part II of this permit.) buildings and accompanying parking lots as long as the drainage from the excluded areas is not mixed — with storm water drained from the above described 13 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT NO.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 areas. Industrial facilities (including industrial facilities that are Federally, State, or municipally (v) Landfills, land application sites, and open owned or operated that meet the description of the dumps that receive or have received any industrial facilities listed in these paragraphs (i)-(xi) of the wastes (waste that is received from any of the definition) include those facilities designated under facilities described under this subsection) including 40 CFR 122.26(a)(1)(v). The following categories of those that are subject to regulation under Subtitle D facilities are considered to be engaging in "industrial of RCRA; activity"for purposes of this definition; (vi) facilities involved in the recycling of (1) Facilities subject to storm water effluent materials, including metal scrap yards, battery limitations guidelines, new source performance reclaimers, salvage yards, and automobile junkyards, standards, or toxic pollutant effluent standards under including but limited to those classified as Standard 40 CFR Subchapter N (except facilities with toxic Industrial Classification 5015 and 5093; — pollutant effluent standards which are exempted under category(xi)of this definition); (vii) Steam electric power generating facilities,including coal handling sites; _ (it) Facilities classified as Standard Industrial Classifications 24 (except 2434), 26 (except 265 and (viii) Transportation facilities classified as 267), 28 (except 283 and 285), 29, 311, 32 (except Standard Industrial Classifications 40,41,42 (except 323),33,3441,373; 4221-4225),43,44,45 and 5171 which have vehicle maintenance shops, equipment cleaning operations, Facilities classified as Standard or airport deicing operations. Only those portions of Industrial Classifications 10 through 14 (mineral the facility that are either involved in vehicle industry) including active or inactive mining maintenance (including vehicle rehabilitation, operations (except for areas of coal mining mechanical repairs, painting, fueling, and operations no longer meeting the definition of a lubrication), equipment cleaning operations, airport reclamation area under 40 CFR 434.11(1) because deicing operations, or which are otherwise identified the performance bond issued to the facility by the under paragraphs (a)-(viz) or (ix)-(xi) of this appropriate SMCRA authority has been released, or definition are associated with industrial activity; except for areas of non-coal mining operations which _ have been released from applicable State or Federal (ix) Treatment works treating domestic reclamation requirements after December 17, 1990) sewage or any other sewage sludge or wastewater and oil and gas exploration, production, processing, treatment device or system, used in the storage or treatment operations, or transmission facilities that treatment,recycling,and reclamation of municipal or discharge storm water contaminated by contact with domestic sewage, including land dedicated to the or that has come into contact with, any overburden, disposal of sewage sludge that are located within the raw material, intermediate products, finished confines of the facility, with a design flow of 1.0 _ products, byproducts or waste products located on mgd or more, or required to have an approved the site of such operations; (inactive mining pretreatment program under 40 Cl-K 403. Not operations are mining sites that are not being actively included are farm lands, domestic gardens or lands mined, but which have an identifiable used for sludge management where sludge is owner/operator; inactive mining sites do not include beneficially reused and which are not physically sites where mining claims are being maintained prior located in the confines of the facility,or areas that are to disturbances associated with the extraction, in compliance with 40 CFR 503; beneficiation, or processing of mined materials, nor sites where minimal activities are undertaken for the (x) Construction activity including clearing, sole purpose of maintaining a mining claim); grading and excavation activities except: operations that result in the disturbance of less than one acre of (iv) Hazardous waste treatment, storage, or total land area which are not part of a larger common disposal facilities, including those that are operating plan of development or sale; under interim status or a permit under Subtitle C of RCRA; 14 IOWA DEPARTMENT OF NATURAL RESOURCES NPDES GENERAL PERMIT No.2 STORM WATER DISCHARGE ASSOCIATED WITH INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITY FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES EFFECTIVE DATE-OCTOBER 1,2007 TO OCTOBER 1,2012 (xi) Facilities under Standard Industrial Classifications 20,21,22,23,2434,25,265,267,27, 283,285,30,31 (except 311),323,34(except 3441), 35, 36, 37 (except 373), 38, 39, 4221-4225, (and which are not otherwise included within categories (ii)-(x)); "Storm water discharge associated with industrial activity for construction activities" means activities that fall under subparagraph (x) in the definition of storm water discharge associated with industrial activity. • 15 FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y.2008 WEST COMMERCIAL ST.EXTENSION, RIVER ROAD RELOCATION,AND STORM WATER PUMP STATION CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA CONTRACT NO.720 RM-8155(671)--9D-07 This contract made and entered into this day of , 20_,by and between the City of Waterloo,Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and of ,Iowa, (hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH: PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the , and furnish all necessary tools, equipment,materials and labor necessary to do all the work called for in the plans and specifications in a workmanship like manner and for the prices set forth in Contractor's proposal,which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and -- agreed to be a part of this contract. PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the -- construction of the improvement,the Notice to Contractors as published,the Instruction to Bidders,the Form of Proposal,the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and approval of the City and its Engineer. PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is -- by reference made a part of this contract. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 1 OF 4 PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten(10)working days after receipt of"Notice to Proceed". The storm sewer,pump station, force main and gatewell modifications shall be completed and operational by June 1,2009. The final completion date for the project shall be September 1,2009. PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefore promptly by the date herein specified,the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa,relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys,keeping open passage ways for water,traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining — proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the backfilling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City and/or Engineer by reason of any — injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor,or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City,the Engineer and/or Cedar Valley Tech Works for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any — injuries allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction,hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for,that it will defend said suit and save the City, the Engineer and/or Cedar Valley Tech — Works harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City,the Engineer and/or Cedar Valley Tech Works,the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City,the Engineer and/or Cedar Valley Tech Works and those who use the streets of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also,to make any test or any material to be _ used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance,or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. PAR. 10 Any material which has been rejected by the construction reviewer shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. — PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work,but if said work is delayed by the City,the Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO.720 PAGE 2 OF 4 PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims of labor,material,men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor, -- material,or men under this contract. PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a -- form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders,which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and shall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty(30) consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten(10) days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City,or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material,tools, or machinery found along said line of work,doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained _ by the City from any compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work,the City agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors,the amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set out in the Contractor's proposal,which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract,based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100% surety bond is required is PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said streets, and to save the City and/or Engineer harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the street back in a proper condition for travel. PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible,but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference,this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract,it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100%of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 720 PAGE 3 OF 4 must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2)years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2)years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after having been given ten(10)days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given,then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four(4) and not less than three(3)months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three(3)months after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event,until two (2)years after the acceptance of the work. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor City Clerk Contractor BY: Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa,this day of ,20 . ATTEST: , City Clerk,Waterloo, Iowa FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT NO. 720 PAGE 4 OF 4 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, , of - (hereinafter called the Principal), and -- of (hereinafter called the Surety), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo (hereinafter called the Oblige), in the penal sum of Dollars ($ ), lawful money of the United States,to payment of which sum,well and truly to be made,the Principal here firmly binds himself/themselves,his/their heirs, executors, and administrators, and the said Surety binds himself,his successors, assigns, executors, and administrators,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, WHEREAS the above bounden Principal did, on the day of 20 , enter into a written contract with the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for the construction of , a copy of which contract,together with all of its terms, covenants, conditions, and stipulations, is incorporated herein and made a part hereof as full and completely as if said contract were recited at length herein; and WHEREAS,the Principal and Surety on this bond hereby agree to pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal or with subcontractors, all just claims due them for labor performed or materials furnished in the performance of the contract on account of which bond is given when the same are not satisfied out of the portion of the contract price which the public corporation is required to retain until completion of the public improvement,but the Principal -' and Surety shall not be liable to said persons, firms,or corporation unless the claims of said claimants against said portion of the contract price shall have been established as provided by law. Now, if the Principal shall in all respects fulfill his said contract according to the terms and tenor thereof, and shall satisfy all claims and demands incurred for the same, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Oblige from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall fully reimburse and repay the Oblige all outlays and expenses which it may incur in making good any such default,then the obligation is to be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. FORM OF BOND PAGE 1 OF 2 Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary — notwithstanding,to consent without notice: 1. To any extension of time to the contract in which to perform the contract. 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or contract when such change does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent(20%)of the total contract price, and -- shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to -- less than one(1)year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Oblige at the time such work was accepted. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,we have hereunto set our hands and seals this day of , 20_. Principal _ By: Surety Attorney-in-Fact FORM OF BOND PAGE 2 OF 2